WO2014113190A1 - Method, apparatus and system for managing bearers in a wireless communication system - Google Patents
Method, apparatus and system for managing bearers in a wireless communication system Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2014113190A1 WO2014113190A1 PCT/US2013/077294 US2013077294W WO2014113190A1 WO 2014113190 A1 WO2014113190 A1 WO 2014113190A1 US 2013077294 W US2013077294 W US 2013077294W WO 2014113190 A1 WO2014113190 A1 WO 2014113190A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- senb
- menb
- bearer
- request
- message
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 319
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 133
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 68
- 230000011664 signaling Effects 0.000 claims description 120
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 110
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 64
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 27
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 26
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 26
- 239000003550 marker Substances 0.000 description 15
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 13
- 230000009977 dual effect Effects 0.000 description 10
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 9
- 238000004321 preservation Methods 0.000 description 9
- 238000013500 data storage Methods 0.000 description 7
- 230000002776 aggregation Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000004220 aggregation Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000013468 resource allocation Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000012384 transportation and delivery Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000004913 activation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000006978 adaptation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000007774 longterm Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000007726 management method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000001413 cellular effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001419 dependent effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000007613 environmental effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004880 explosion Methods 0.000 description 1
- GVVPGTZRZFNKDS-JXMROGBWSA-N geranyl diphosphate Chemical compound CC(C)=CCC\C(C)=C\CO[P@](O)(=O)OP(O)(O)=O GVVPGTZRZFNKDS-JXMROGBWSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000010295 mobile communication Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002085 persistent effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002123 temporal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W12/00—Security arrangements; Authentication; Protecting privacy or anonymity
- H04W12/04—Key management, e.g. using generic bootstrapping architecture [GBA]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
- H04L5/0032—Distributed allocation, i.e. involving a plurality of allocating devices, each making partial allocation
- H04L5/0035—Resource allocation in a cooperative multipoint environment
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W48/00—Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
- H04W48/08—Access restriction or access information delivery, e.g. discovery data delivery
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
- H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
- H04B7/0413—MIMO systems
- H04B7/0417—Feedback systems
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
- H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
- H04B7/0413—MIMO systems
- H04B7/0456—Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04J—MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION
- H04J3/00—Time-division multiplex systems
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/12—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel
- H04L1/16—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel in which the return channel carries supervisory signals, e.g. repetition request signals
- H04L1/18—Automatic repetition systems, e.g. Van Duuren systems
- H04L1/1812—Hybrid protocols; Hybrid automatic repeat request [HARQ]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/12—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel
- H04L1/16—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel in which the return channel carries supervisory signals, e.g. repetition request signals
- H04L1/18—Automatic repetition systems, e.g. Van Duuren systems
- H04L1/1867—Arrangements specially adapted for the transmitter end
- H04L1/1887—Scheduling and prioritising arrangements
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L43/00—Arrangements for monitoring or testing data switching networks
- H04L43/08—Monitoring or testing based on specific metrics, e.g. QoS, energy consumption or environmental parameters
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
- H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
- H04L5/0051—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver of dedicated pilots, i.e. pilots destined for a single user or terminal
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
- H04L5/0053—Allocation of signaling, i.e. of overhead other than pilot signals
- H04L5/0055—Physical resource allocation for ACK/NACK
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
- H04L5/0053—Allocation of signaling, i.e. of overhead other than pilot signals
- H04L5/0057—Physical resource allocation for CQI
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
- H04L5/0058—Allocation criteria
- H04L5/0062—Avoidance of ingress interference, e.g. ham radio channels
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/0091—Signaling for the administration of the divided path
- H04L5/0092—Indication of how the channel is divided
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/0091—Signaling for the administration of the divided path
- H04L5/0096—Indication of changes in allocation
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/14—Two-way operation using the same type of signal, i.e. duplex
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/14—Two-way operation using the same type of signal, i.e. duplex
- H04L5/1469—Two-way operation using the same type of signal, i.e. duplex using time-sharing
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/22—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path using time-division multiplexing
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L63/00—Network architectures or network communication protocols for network security
- H04L63/04—Network architectures or network communication protocols for network security for providing a confidential data exchange among entities communicating through data packet networks
- H04L63/0428—Network architectures or network communication protocols for network security for providing a confidential data exchange among entities communicating through data packet networks wherein the data content is protected, e.g. by encrypting or encapsulating the payload
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L63/00—Network architectures or network communication protocols for network security
- H04L63/30—Network architectures or network communication protocols for network security for supporting lawful interception, monitoring or retaining of communications or communication related information
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L65/00—Network arrangements, protocols or services for supporting real-time applications in data packet communication
- H04L65/1066—Session management
- H04L65/1101—Session protocols
- H04L65/1104—Session initiation protocol [SIP]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L65/00—Network arrangements, protocols or services for supporting real-time applications in data packet communication
- H04L65/60—Network streaming of media packets
- H04L65/61—Network streaming of media packets for supporting one-way streaming services, e.g. Internet radio
- H04L65/611—Network streaming of media packets for supporting one-way streaming services, e.g. Internet radio for multicast or broadcast
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L65/00—Network arrangements, protocols or services for supporting real-time applications in data packet communication
- H04L65/60—Network streaming of media packets
- H04L65/65—Network streaming protocols, e.g. real-time transport protocol [RTP] or real-time control protocol [RTCP]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L65/00—Network arrangements, protocols or services for supporting real-time applications in data packet communication
- H04L65/60—Network streaming of media packets
- H04L65/75—Media network packet handling
- H04L65/762—Media network packet handling at the source
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L65/00—Network arrangements, protocols or services for supporting real-time applications in data packet communication
- H04L65/80—Responding to QoS
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L67/00—Network arrangements or protocols for supporting network services or applications
- H04L67/01—Protocols
- H04L67/02—Protocols based on web technology, e.g. hypertext transfer protocol [HTTP]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L9/00—Cryptographic mechanisms or cryptographic arrangements for secret or secure communications; Network security protocols
- H04L9/14—Cryptographic mechanisms or cryptographic arrangements for secret or secure communications; Network security protocols using a plurality of keys or algorithms
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W12/00—Security arrangements; Authentication; Protecting privacy or anonymity
- H04W12/02—Protecting privacy or anonymity, e.g. protecting personally identifiable information [PII]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W12/00—Security arrangements; Authentication; Protecting privacy or anonymity
- H04W12/04—Key management, e.g. using generic bootstrapping architecture [GBA]
- H04W12/043—Key management, e.g. using generic bootstrapping architecture [GBA] using a trusted network node as an anchor
- H04W12/0431—Key distribution or pre-distribution; Key agreement
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W12/00—Security arrangements; Authentication; Protecting privacy or anonymity
- H04W12/06—Authentication
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W16/00—Network planning, e.g. coverage or traffic planning tools; Network deployment, e.g. resource partitioning or cells structures
- H04W16/24—Cell structures
- H04W16/32—Hierarchical cell structures
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W24/00—Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
- H04W24/02—Arrangements for optimising operational condition
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W24/00—Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
- H04W24/10—Scheduling measurement reports ; Arrangements for measurement reports
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W28/00—Network traffic management; Network resource management
- H04W28/02—Traffic management, e.g. flow control or congestion control
- H04W28/0231—Traffic management, e.g. flow control or congestion control based on communication conditions
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
- H04W36/0005—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
- H04W36/0055—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link
- H04W36/0066—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link of control information between different types of networks in order to establish a new radio link in the target network
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
- H04W36/0005—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
- H04W36/0055—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link
- H04W36/0069—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link in case of dual connectivity, e.g. decoupled uplink/downlink
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
- H04W36/0005—Control or signalling for completing the hand-off
- H04W36/0055—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link
- H04W36/0069—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link in case of dual connectivity, e.g. decoupled uplink/downlink
- H04W36/00692—Transmission or use of information for re-establishing the radio link in case of dual connectivity, e.g. decoupled uplink/downlink using simultaneous multiple data streams, e.g. cooperative multipoint [CoMP], carrier aggregation [CA] or multiple input multiple output [MIMO]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W36/00—Hand-off or reselection arrangements
- H04W36/16—Performing reselection for specific purposes
- H04W36/22—Performing reselection for specific purposes for handling the traffic
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W4/00—Services specially adapted for wireless communication networks; Facilities therefor
- H04W4/06—Selective distribution of broadcast services, e.g. multimedia broadcast multicast service [MBMS]; Services to user groups; One-way selective calling services
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W48/00—Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
- H04W48/08—Access restriction or access information delivery, e.g. discovery data delivery
- H04W48/10—Access restriction or access information delivery, e.g. discovery data delivery using broadcasted information
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W48/00—Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
- H04W48/16—Discovering, processing access restriction or access information
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W48/00—Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
- H04W48/20—Selecting an access point
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
- H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements
- H04W52/0209—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices
- H04W52/0251—Power saving arrangements in terminal devices using monitoring of local events, e.g. events related to user activity
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W56/00—Synchronisation arrangements
- H04W56/001—Synchronization between nodes
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W68/00—User notification, e.g. alerting and paging, for incoming communication, change of service or the like
- H04W68/02—Arrangements for increasing efficiency of notification or paging channel
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/02—Selection of wireless resources by user or terminal
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
- H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
- H04W72/0446—Resources in time domain, e.g. slots or frames
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
- H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
- H04W72/046—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource the resource being in the space domain, e.g. beams
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/12—Wireless traffic scheduling
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/12—Wireless traffic scheduling
- H04W72/1263—Mapping of traffic onto schedule, e.g. scheduled allocation or multiplexing of flows
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
- H04W72/21—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the uplink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards the network
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W72/00—Local resource management
- H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
- H04W72/23—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W74/00—Wireless channel access, e.g. scheduled or random access
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W76/00—Connection management
- H04W76/10—Connection setup
- H04W76/11—Allocation or use of connection identifiers
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W76/00—Connection management
- H04W76/10—Connection setup
- H04W76/14—Direct-mode setup
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W76/00—Connection management
- H04W76/20—Manipulation of established connections
- H04W76/27—Transitions between radio resource control [RRC] states
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W8/00—Network data management
- H04W8/005—Discovery of network devices, e.g. terminals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W84/00—Network topologies
- H04W84/02—Hierarchically pre-organised networks, e.g. paging networks, cellular networks, WLAN [Wireless Local Area Network] or WLL [Wireless Local Loop]
- H04W84/10—Small scale networks; Flat hierarchical networks
- H04W84/12—WLAN [Wireless Local Area Networks]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W88/00—Devices specially adapted for wireless communication networks, e.g. terminals, base stations or access point devices
- H04W88/02—Terminal devices
- H04W88/06—Terminal devices adapted for operation in multiple networks or having at least two operational modes, e.g. multi-mode terminals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W88/00—Devices specially adapted for wireless communication networks, e.g. terminals, base stations or access point devices
- H04W88/08—Access point devices
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/12—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel
- H04L1/16—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using return channel in which the return channel carries supervisory signals, e.g. repetition request signals
- H04L1/18—Automatic repetition systems, e.g. Van Duuren systems
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L2209/00—Additional information or applications relating to cryptographic mechanisms or cryptographic arrangements for secret or secure communication H04L9/00
- H04L2209/24—Key scheduling, i.e. generating round keys or sub-keys for block encryption
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L2209/00—Additional information or applications relating to cryptographic mechanisms or cryptographic arrangements for secret or secure communication H04L9/00
- H04L2209/80—Wireless
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
- H04L5/0058—Allocation criteria
- H04L5/0076—Allocation utility-based
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/0091—Signaling for the administration of the divided path
- H04L5/0094—Indication of how sub-channels of the path are allocated
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W12/00—Security arrangements; Authentication; Protecting privacy or anonymity
- H04W12/50—Secure pairing of devices
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W76/00—Connection management
- H04W76/20—Manipulation of established connections
- H04W76/28—Discontinuous transmission [DTX]; Discontinuous reception [DRX]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W84/00—Network topologies
- H04W84/02—Hierarchically pre-organised networks, e.g. paging networks, cellular networks, WLAN [Wireless Local Area Network] or WLL [Wireless Local Loop]
- H04W84/04—Large scale networks; Deep hierarchical networks
- H04W84/042—Public Land Mobile systems, e.g. cellular systems
- H04W84/045—Public Land Mobile systems, e.g. cellular systems using private Base Stations, e.g. femto Base Stations, home Node B
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
- Y02B—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES RELATED TO BUILDINGS, e.g. HOUSING, HOUSE APPLIANCES OR RELATED END-USER APPLICATIONS
- Y02B70/00—Technologies for an efficient end-user side electric power management and consumption
- Y02B70/30—Systems integrating technologies related to power network operation and communication or information technologies for improving the carbon footprint of the management of residential or tertiary loads, i.e. smart grids as climate change mitigation technology in the buildings sector, including also the last stages of power distribution and the control, monitoring or operating management systems at local level
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
- Y02D—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
- Y02D30/00—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
- Y02D30/70—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks
Definitions
- Embodiments of the present disclosure generally relate to the field of wireless communication systems, and more particularly, to bearer management in the wireless communication systems.
- a small cell also known as a pico cell
- the small cell may provide radio coverage from several meters to several kilometers.
- 3GPP 3rd Generation Partnership Project
- LTE Long Term Evolution
- Figure 1 illustrates an embodiment of a wireless communication network having coverage from a number of macro cells and small cells.
- Figure 2 illustrates an embodiment of a wireless communication system that may operate in compliance with the 3GPP LTE project along with any amendments, updates and/or revisions.
- Figure 3 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure for the wireless communication system to add a new bearer through a secondary evolved Node B (SeNB) of the wireless communication system.
- SeNB secondary evolved Node B
- Figure 4 illustrates an embodiment of a method for a user equipment (UE) of the wireless communication system to add the new bearer.
- UE user equipment
- Figure 5 illustrates an embodiment of a method for a master evolved Node B (MeNB) of the wireless communication system to add the new bearer.
- MeNB master evolved Node B
- Figure 6 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure to switch a bearer from the MeNB to the SeNB of the wireless communication system, based on a S 1 approach.
- Figure 7 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure to switch the bearer from the MeNB to the SeNB of the wireless communication system, based on an X2 approach.
- Figure 8 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the UE of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the MeNB to the SeNB.
- Figure 9 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the MeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the MeNB to the SeNB, based on the S 1 approach.
- Figure 10 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the MeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the MeNB to the SeNB, based on the X2 approach.
- Figure 11 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the SeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the MeNB to the SeNB based on the S 1 approach.
- Figure 12 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the SeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the MeNB to the SeNB based on the X2 approach.
- Figure 13 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure for the wireless communication system to switch a bearer from the SeNB to the MeNB, based on the S 1 approach.
- Figure 14 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure for the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the SeNB to the MeNB, based on the X2 approach.
- Figure 15 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the UE of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the SeNB to the MeNB.
- Figure 16 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the MeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the SeNB to the MeNB, based on the S 1 approach.
- Figure 17 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the MeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the SeNB to the MeNB, based on the X2 approach.
- Figure 18 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the SeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the SeNB to the MeNB, based on the S 1 approach.
- Figure 19 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the SeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the SeNB to the MeNB, based on the X2 approach.
- Figure 20 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure for the wireless communication system to switch a bearer from a source SeNB to a target SeNB, based on the SI approach.
- Figure 21 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure for the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the source SeNB to the target SeNB, based on the X2 approach.
- Figure 22 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the UE of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the source SeNB to the target SeNB.
- Figure 23 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the MeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the source SeNB to the target SeNB, based on the SI approach.
- Figure 24 illustrates an embodiment of the method for the MeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the source SeNB to the target SeNB, based on the X2 approach.
- Figure 25 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the source SeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the source SeNB to the target SeNB, based on the SI approach.
- Figure 26 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the source SeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the source SeNB to the target SeNB, based on the X2 approach.
- Figure 27 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the target SeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the source SeNB to the target SeNB, based on the SI approach.
- Figure 28 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the target SeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the source SeNB to the target SeNB, based on the X2 approach.
- Figure 29 illustrates an embodiment of an example system.
- the phrase “A/B” means “A or B”.
- the phrase “A and/or B” means “(A), (B), or (A and B)”.
- the phrase “at least one of A, B and C” means "(A), (B), (C), (A and B), (A and C), (B and C) or (A, B and O”.
- the phrase “(A) B” means "(B) or (A B)", that is, A is optional.
- module may refer to, be part of, or include an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), an electronic circuit, a processor (shared, dedicated, or group) and/or memory (shared, dedicated, or group) that execute one or more software or firmware programs, a combinational logic circuit, and/or other suitable components that provide the described functionality.
- ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
- processor shared, dedicated, or group
- memory shared, dedicated, or group
- FIG. 1 illustrates an embodiment of a wireless communication network 100 that may operate in compliance with Long Term Evolution (LTE) standards of 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP).
- the wireless communication network 100 may have coverage from a number of macro cells and small cells.
- a hexagon cell may represent a macro cell
- an elliptical cell may represent a small cell.
- the small cell may be placed inside of the macro cells or on a border of the macro cell.
- the small cell also known as the pico cell, may provide radio coverage from several meters to several kilometers.
- the macro cell may have radio coverage of a few tens of kilometers.
- FIG. 2 illustrates an embodiment of a wireless communication system 200 that may operate in compliance with the 3 GPP LTE project along with any amendments, updates, and/or revisions (e.g., LTE-Advanced (LTE-A), etc.).
- the wireless communication system 200 may comprise a user equipment (UE) 201, a master evolved Node B (MeNB) 202 for the macro cell, a secondary evolved Node B (SeNB) 203 for the small cell, and a core network system 204, wherein the UE 201 may be dual-connected with the MeNB 202 and the SeNB 203 according to a S 1 approach or an X2 approach.
- Other embodiments may implement other modifications and variations on the MeNB 202 and/or the SeNB 203.
- the MeNB 202 may be designed for another small cell.
- the SeNB 203 may be designed for another macro cell.
- the UE 201 may be embodied as, without limitation, a smart phone, a cellular telephone, a tablet, a consumer electronic device, a laptop computer, a notebook computer, a mobile computing system, a processor-based system, and/or any other mobile communication device configured to communicate with the core network system 204 via the MeNB 202 and/or the SeNB 203.
- the core network system 204 may be embodied as an evolved packet core (EPC) which may comprise, a mobility management entity (MME) 214, a serving gateway (S-GW) 224, a packet data network gateway (PDN GW) 234, and others.
- EPC evolved packet core
- MME mobility management entity
- S-GW serving gateway
- PDN GW packet data network gateway
- bearers carrying data flows between the UE 201 and the core network system 204 may split between the MeNB 202 and the SeNB 203, for example, the bearers through the MeNB 202 and the bearers through the SeNB 203.
- the bearers may include evolved packet system (EPS) bearers.
- the EPS bearer may comprise a bearer between the UE 201 and the MeNB 202 such as a data radio bearer (DRB), a bearer between the MeNB 202 and the S-GW 224 such as a SI bearer, a bearer between S-GW 224 and PDN GW 234 such as S5/S8 bearer, and/or others.
- DRB data radio bearer
- S-GW 224 such as a SI bearer
- PDN GW 234 such as S5/S8 bearer
- an Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (EUTRAN) radio access bearer (E-RAB) between the UE 201 and the S-GW 224 may identify the concatenation of the corresponding DRB and the S 1 bearer.
- EUTRAN Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network
- the MeNB 202 and the SeNB 203 may connect directly with the core network system 204 via a S 1 interface and the bearers for different eNBs may be split at the core network system 204.
- the SeNB 203 may indirectly connect with the core network system 204, namely, through an X2 interface of the MeNB 202. Therefore, the bearers may be split at the MeNB 202.
- the UE 201 may include a communication module 211, and/or others.
- the communication module 211 may receive or transmit a signalling/packet from/to the MeNB 202 and/or SeNB 203 in the wireless communication system 200.
- the communication module 211 may further generate, process and/or control the signalling/packet and/or other communications from/to the UE 201. Details about functionalities of the communication module 211 may be provided in the following descriptions.
- the communication module 211 may include several layer implementations, such as a physical layer module 2110, a L2 layer module 2111, a radio resource
- RRC radio resource control
- NAS non-access stratum
- the MeNB 202 may include a communication module 212, and/or others.
- the communication module 212 may receive or transmit a signalling/packet from/to the UE 201, SeNB 203 and/or core network system 204 in the wireless communication system 200.
- the UE 201 may include a communication module 212, and/or others.
- the communication module 212 may receive or transmit a signalling/packet from/to the UE 201, SeNB 203 and/or core network system 204 in the wireless communication system 200.
- the UE 201 may include a communication module 212, and/or others.
- the communication module 212 may receive or transmit a signalling/packet from/to the UE 201, SeNB 203 and/or core network system 204 in the wireless communication system 200.
- the UE 201 may include a communication module 212, and/or others.
- the communication module 212 may receive or transmit a signalling/packet from/to the UE 201, SeNB
- the communication module 212 may further generate, process and/or control the signalling/packet and/or other communications from/to the MeNB 202. Details about functionalities of the communication module 212 may be provided in the following descriptions.
- the communication module 212 may include several layer implementations, such as a physical layer module 2120, a L2 layer module 2121, a radio resource communication (RRC) layer module 2122, a non-access stratum (NAS) layer module 2123, and/or others.
- RRC radio resource communication
- NAS non-access stratum
- the SeNB 203 may include a communication module 213, and/or others.
- the communication module 213 may receive or transmit a signalling/packet from/to the UE 201, MeNB 202 and/or core network system 204 of the wireless communication system 200. In some embodiments, the communication module 213 may further generate, process and/or control the signalling/packet and/or other communications from/to the SeNB 203. Details about functionalities of the communication module 213 may be provided in the following descriptions.
- the communication module 213 may include several layer implementations, such as a physical layer module 2130, a L2 layer module 2131, a radio resource communication (RRC) layer module 2132, a non-access stratum (NAS) layer module 2133, and/or others.
- RRC radio resource communication
- NAS non-access stratum
- Figure 3 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure for the wireless communication system 200 to add SeNB resources by adding a new bearer through the SeNB 203, such as a new EPS bearer between the UE 201 and the core network system 204 and through the SeNB 203 for the small cell.
- the UE 201 may communicate with the core network system 204 via a default bearer (e.g., a default EPS bearer) established through the MeNB 202 for the macro cell.
- a default bearer e.g., a default EPS bearer
- the UE 201 may transmit a request to the MeNB 202 to request allocation of a new bear resource for a traffic flow aggregation (signalling 301).
- the UE 201 may move into the small cell which may trigger a determination of requesting the allocation of the new bearer resource.
- the request may be embodied as, without limitation, an uplink information transfer and a non-access stratum (NAS) bearer resource allocation request, and may include a specific quality of service (QoS) demand, a guaranteed bit rate (GBR) requirement for a new traffic flow aggregate and/or other information related to a dedicated EPS bearer context.
- QoS quality of service
- GRR guaranteed bit rate
- the MeNB 202 may transport the request to the MME 214 (signalling 302), which may then transmit a bearer resource command to the S- GW 224 in response to a determination that the request is acceptable (signalling 303). However, in response to a determination that the request is not acceptable, the MME 214 may reject the request by transmitting a rejection message.
- the bearer resource command may be further forwarded to the PDN GW 234 (signalling 304).
- the PDN GW 234 may transmit a create bearer request to the S-GW 224 (signalling 305), which may then forward the request to the MME 214 (signalling 306).
- the PDN GW 234 may transmit a rejection message to the S-GW 224 and then indirectly to the MME 214.
- the MME 214 may initiate a dedicated bearer context activation procedure by transmitting a request to setup the new bearer with dedicated bearer context (signalling 307).
- the request may be embodied as E-RAB setup request and NAS activate dedicated EPS bearer context request.
- the MeNB 202 may select a small cell or a SeNB through which the new bearer can be established. In some embodiments, the MeNB 202 may select the small cell or the SeNB based on a UE measurement report related to a UE communication quality. The MeNB 202 may further transmit a request of adding the small cell or the SeNB by establishing the new bearer through the selected SeNB 203 (signalling 308).
- the request may be embodied as a SeNB addition request or a small cell addition request (not illustrated in Figure 3) and may include, without limitation, information element (IE) such as cause for the the SeNB addition or the small cell addition, a list of E-RAB s to be setup, characteristics of the new bearer (such as E-RAB parameters, transport network layer (TNL) address information, and/or others), UE security capabilities for SI approach, security context for SI approach, and/or others.
- IE information element
- the SeNB 203 may transmit a message, e.g., a SeNB addition request acknowledgement (ACK) or a small cell addition request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 3), to the MeNB 202 (signalling 309).
- ACK SeNB addition request acknowledgement
- small cell addition request ACK may include, without limitation, a list of admitted E-RABs including TNL address information for the respective E-RAB, a list of not admitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the small cell addition or the SeNB addition, and/or others.
- the transparent container may include, without limitation, a new cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) for identifying the UE 201 by the SeNB 203, secondary eNB security algorithm identifiers for selected security algorithms, a dedicated random access channel (RACH) preamble, access parameters, system information blocks (SIBs) parameters, and/or others.
- C-RNTI new cell-radio network temporary identifier
- RACH dedicated random access channel
- SIBs system information blocks
- the MeNB 202 may transmit a request to the UE 201 to request reconfiguring a radio resource control (RRC) connection to establish the new bearer through the SeNB 203 for the small cell (signalling 310).
- RRC radio resource control
- the request may be embodied as, without limitation, a RRC connection reconfiguration (i.e., RRCconnectionreconfiguration) and NAS activate dedicated EPS bearer context request, and may include information such as C- RNTI, security algorithm identifiers, dedicated RACH preamble for the small cell, and/or others.
- the C-RNTI may not be needed if the UE 201 is allocated with the same C-RNTI in the macro cell and the small cell, and the security algorithm identifiers may not be needed if X2 approach is used.
- the UE 201 may perform uplink and downlink synchronization with the SeNB 203 in order to reconfigure the RRC connection to establish the new bearer with the dedicated EPS bearer context (signalling 311). For example, the UE 201 may perform the synchronization to the SeNB 203 and access the small cell via RACH, following a contention-free or contention-based procedure depending on whether a dedicated preamble was indicated or not. In some embodiments, the UE 201 may meanwhile keep the default bearer through the MeNB 202 as well as a signalling radio bearer (SRB) through the MeNB 202.
- SRB signalling radio bearer
- the UE 201 may be dual-connected with the MeNB 202 and the SeNB 203. Then, the UE 201 may transmit a RRC connection reconfiguration complete message (i.e., RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete) to the MeNB 202 (signalling 312), and the MeNB 202 may further transmit a SeNB addition complete message or a small cell addition complete message (not illustrated in Figure 3) to the SeNB 203 (Signalling 313). Alternatively, the UE 201 may transmit the RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete message to the MeNB 202 as well as the SeNB 203. The UE 201 may be ready to communicate with the new bearer through the SeNB 203, and SeNB 203 may buffer packet data received from the UE 201 until a connection with the S-GW 224 is established.
- RRC connection reconfiguration complete message i.e., RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete
- the MeNB 202 may further transmit a SeNB addition complete message or a small cell addition complete message (not illustrated in Figure 3)
- the MeNB 202 may then transmit an E-RAB setup response to the E-RAB setup request from MME 214 (signalling 314).
- the E-RAB setup response may be embodied as, without limitation, a SI application protocol (S1AP) E-RAB setup response for the SI approach or an X2 application protocol (X2AP) E-RAB setup response for the X2 approach.
- S1AP SI application protocol
- X2AP X2 application protocol
- the E-RAB setup response may inform the MME 214 that the new bearer was created and was re-directed to the SeNB 203 and may include an indicator that the E-RAB may be handled by the SeNB, an IP addresses of the SeNB, and/or others.
- the UE 201 may further transmit a message informing the MeNB 202 that the dedicated bearer context is accepted, such as a NAS activate dedicated EPS bearer context accept message to the MeNB 202 (signalling 315). This message may be transmitted in response to the above- stated NAS activate dedicated EPS bearer context request.
- the MeNB 202 may further forward the message to the MME 214 (signalling 316).
- the MME 214 may transmit a create bearer response to the S-GW 224 (signalling 317), which may be the response to the above-stated create bearer request from the S-GW 224.
- the connection between the SeNB 203 and the S-GW 224 may be established, resulting in the establishment of the new bearer between the UE 201 and the S-GW 224.
- Figure 3 illustrates the signalling procedure of adding the new cell as initiated by the UE 201, it should be understood that a similar procedure as initiated by the network 204 can accomplish the similar result.
- Figure 4 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the UE 201 to add the SeNB resources by adding the new bearer through the SeNB 203 for the small cell.
- the communication module 211 or other device of the UE 201 may communicate with the core network system 204 on the default bearer, such as the default EPS bearer through the MeNB 202.
- the communication module 211 or other device may determine that the new bearer is needed for the traffic flow aggregation.
- the UE 201 may move into the small cell which may trigger the determination for the new bearer through the small cell.
- the communication module 211 e.g., NAS layer module 2113 or other device may transmit the NAS bearer resource allocation request to the MeNB 202.
- the communication module 211 may receive, from the MeNB 202, the request of adding the new bearer through the SeNB 203 for the small cell.
- the request may be embodied as the RRCconnectionreconfiguration and NAS activate dedicated EPS bearer context request, and may include information such as C-RNTI, security algorithm identifiers, dedicated RACH preamble for the small cell, and/or others.
- the C-RNTI may not be needed if the UE 201 is allocated with the same C-RNTI in the macro cell and the small cell, and the security algorithm identifiers may not be needed if X2 approach is used.
- the communication module 211 may synchronize with the SeNB 203 to reconfigure the RRC connection for the new bearer establishment.
- the UE 201 may perform uplink and downlink synchronization based on the information contained in the request.
- the UE 201 may meanwhile keep the default bearer through the MeNB 202 as well as a signalling radio bearer (SRB) through the MeNB 202.
- SRB signalling radio bearer
- the communication module 211 may transmit the RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete message to the MeNB 202. In some embodiments, the message may be further transmitted to the SeNB 203.
- the communication module 211 e.g., the NAS layer 2113 or other device may transmit the NAS activate dedicated EPS bearer context accept message to the MeNB 202.
- Figure 4 illustrates the method of adding the new bearer as initiated by the UE 201, it should be understood that a similar procedure as initiated by the network 204 can accomplish the similar result.
- Figure 5 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the MeNB 202 of the wireless communication network 200 to add the SeNB resources by adding the new bearer through the SeNB 203 for the small cell.
- the communication module 212 or other device of the MeNB 202 may communicate with the UE 201 on the default bearer through the macro cell, such as the EPS bearer.
- the communication module 212 e.g., NAS layer 2123 or other device may receive the NAS bearer resource allocation request from the UE 201.
- the communication module 212 e.g., NAS layer 2123 or other device may forward the NAS bearer resource allocation request to the MME 214.
- the communication module 212 e.g., NAS layer 2123 or other device may receive the E-RAB setup request and NAS activate dedicated EPS bearer context request from the MME 214, as a part of the dedicated bearer context activation procedure.
- the communication module 212 or other device may select the small cell or the SeNB through which the new bearer can be established.
- the MeNB 202 may select the small cell or the SeNB based on the UE measurement report related to the UE communication quality.
- the communication module 212 or other device may further transmit to the SeNB 203 the request of adding the new bearer.
- the request may be embodied as the SeNB addition request or the Small Cell addition request and may include, without limitation, information element (IE) such as cause for the SeNB addition, a list of E-RABs to be setup, characteristics of the new bearer, UE security capabilities for SI approach, security context for SI approach, and/or others.
- IE information element
- the communication module 212 or other device may receive, from the SeNB 203, the acknowledgement message such as the SeNB addition request ACK or the small cell addition request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 5), if the SeNB 203 determines that the SeNB addition request or the small cell addition request is acceptable.
- the SeNB addition request ACK the small cell addition request ACK may include, without limitation, a list of admitted E-RABs including TNL address information for the respective E-RAB, a list of not admitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for SeNB addition or small cell addition, and/or others.
- the transparent container may include, without limitation, a new cell- radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) for identifying the UE 201 by the SeNB 203, secondary eNB security algorithm identifiers for selected security algorithms, a dedicated random access channel (RACH) preamble, access parameters, system information blocks (SIBs) parameters, and/or others.
- C-RNTI new cell- radio network temporary identifier
- RACH dedicated random access channel
- SIBs system information blocks
- the communication module 212 may transmit the RRCconnectionreconfiguration and NAS activate dedicated EPS bearer context request to the UE 201 to request reconfiguring the RRC connection to establish the new bearer through the SeNB 203.
- the RRCconnectionreconfiguration and NAS activate dedicated EPS bearer context request may include information such as C-RNTI, security algorithm identifiers, dedicated RACH preamble for the small cell, and/or others.
- the C-RNTI may not be needed if the UE 201 is allocated with the same C-RNTI in the macro cell and the small cell, and the security algorithm identifiers may not be needed if X2 approach is used.
- the communication module 212 may receive the RRC connection reconfiguration complete message from the UE 201 in block 509, and may transmit to MME 214 an E-RAB setup response to the E-RAB setup request in block 510.
- the E-RAB setup response may be embodied as, without limitation, a SI application protocol (S1AP) E-RAB setup response for the S 1 approach or an X2 application protocol (X2AP) E-RAB setup response for the X2 approach.
- S1AP SI application protocol
- X2AP X2 application protocol
- the E-RAB setup response may inform the MME 214 that the new bearer was created and was re-directed to the SeNB 203.
- the communication module 212 e.g., NAS layer 2123 or other device may further receive the NAS activate dedicated EPS bearer context accept message from the UE 201, which may be transmitted in response to the above-stated NAS activate dedicated EPS bearer context request.
- NAS layer 2123 e.g., NAS layer 2123
- the communication module 212 may further receive the NAS activate dedicated EPS bearer context accept message from the UE 201, which may be transmitted in response to the above-stated NAS activate dedicated EPS bearer context request.
- Figure 5 illustrates the method of adding the new bearer as initiated by the UE 201, it should be understood that a similar procedure as initiated by the network 204 can accomplish the similar result.
- Figure 6 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure to adding the SeNB resources by switching a bearer from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203 of the wireless communication system 200, based on the SI approach.
- the UE 201 may communication with the core network system 204 over a DRB of an EPS bearer established through the MeNB 202 for the macro cell.
- the MeNB 202 may transmit a message related to measurement control to the UE 201 (signalling 601).
- the message may configure the UE measurement procedures according to area restriction information. Measurements provided by the MeNB 202 may assist the function controlling the UE's connection mobility.
- the UE 201 may perform the measurement procedures and transmit a measurement report to the MeNB 202 (signalling 602). Based on the measurement report, the MeNB 202 may make a decision of switching the DRB from the macro cell to the small cell.
- the decision may be called as a carrier aggregation (CA) decision.
- CA carrier aggregation
- the MeNB 202 may make a decision of not adding the small cell, for example, when the measurement report indicates that the radio quality in the small cell is not good enough.
- the MeNB 202 may send a request of adding the small cell to the SeNB 203 for the small cell (signalling 603).
- the request may be embodied as a SeNB addition request or a small cell addition request (not illustrated in Figure 6), and may include, without limitation, information element (IE) such as cause for the SeNB addition or the small cell addition, a list of E-RABs to be setup, characteristics of the DRB (such as DRB parameters, TNL address information and/or others), UE security capabilities for SI approach, security context for SI approach, and/or others.
- IE information element
- the SeNB 203 may perform an admission control to determine whether the request is acceptable or not.
- the SeNB 203 may send a message to the MeNB 202, such as a SeNB addition request ACK or a small cell addition request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 6) (signalling 604).
- the SeNB addition request ACK or the SeNB addition request or the small cell addition request ACK may include, without limitation, a list of admitted E-RABs including TNL address information for the respective E-RAB, a list of not admitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB addition or the small cell addition, and/or others.
- the transparent container may include, without limitation, a new C-RNTI for identifying the UE 201 by the SeNB 203, secondary eNB security algorithm identifiers for selected security algorithms, a dedicated random access channel (RACH) preamble, access parameters, system information blocks (SIBs) parameters, and/or others.
- a new C-RNTI for identifying the UE 201 by the SeNB 203
- secondary eNB security algorithm identifiers for selected security algorithms
- RACH dedicated random access channel
- SIBs system information blocks
- the MeNB 202 may transmit to the UE 201 a message of reconfiguring the RRC connection to switch the DRB from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203 (signalling 605).
- the message may be embodied as, without limitation, a RRCconnectionreconfiguration message, and may include information related to the small cell or the SeNB 203 such as the new C-RNTI, SeNB security algorithm identifiers and optionally dedicated RACH preamble, SeNB system information blocks (SIBs), and/or others.
- SIBs SeNB system information blocks
- the MeNB 202 may start to deliver buffered and in transit packet data to the SeNB 203. Before forwarding the packet data, the MeNB 202 may transfer serial number (SN) status to the SeNB 203 (signalling 606). In some embodiments, the MeNB 202 may convey uplink PDCP (packet data convergence protocol) SN receiver status and/or downlink PDCP SN transmitter status of E-RABs for which PDCP status preservation applies.
- the SeNB 203 may buffer the packet data received from the MeNB 202, such as a memory or a data storage of the SeNB 203.
- the UE 201 may perform uplink and/or downlink synchronization with the SeNB 203 in order to reconfigure the RRC connection to switch the DRB from the macro cell to the small cell. For example, the UE 201 may perform the synchronization to the SeNB 203 and access the small cell via RACH, following a contention-free or contention-based procedure depending on whether a dedicated preamble was indicated or not.
- the UE 201 may communication with the MeNB 202 on more than one DRBs, after switching the DRB from the macro cell to the small cell, the UE 201 may still keep remaining DRB bearer(s) (i.e., unswitched DRB(s)) with the MeNB 202 as well as a SRB with the MeNB 202. In this way, the UE 201 may be dual-connected with the MeNB 202 and the SeNB 203.
- DRB bearer(s) i.e., unswitched DRB(s)
- the UE 201 may transmit a RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete message to the MeNB 202 to inform that the RRC connection reconfiguration has been completed and the small cell has been successfully added (signalling 607).
- the MeNB 202 may then transmit a small cell addition complete message to the SeNB
- the UE 201 may transmit the
- the UE 201 may transmit an uplink packet to the SeNB 203 over the DRB through the small cell, which may be transferred by the SeNB 203 to the core network system 204.
- the SeNB 203 may further transmit a path switch request to the MME 214 to request switching a downlink path of the EPS bearer from between the MeNB 202 and the core network system 204 to between the SeNB 203 and the core network system
- the path switch request may include a list of the EPS bearer(s) whose DRB(s) have been switched.
- the path switch request may further indicate to keep other bearer(s) unreleased, wherein the other bearer(s) may include those not listed in the request, such as the DRBs related to the MeNB 202 but not switched to the SeNB 203, and/or the SRBs related to the MeNB 202.
- the UE 201 may still be connected to the MeNB 202 while communicating with the SeNB 203.
- the MeNB 202 may send a separate request of keeping the other bearer(s) unreleased to the MME 214.
- the MME 214 may transmit a modify bearer request to the S-GW 224 to request modifying the downlink path of the listed EPS bearer(s) to go through the SeNB 203 (signalling 610).
- the S-GW 224 may switch the downlink path, so that the downlink packet data can be transmitted from the core network system 204 to the UE 201 through the SeNB 203.
- the S-GW 224 may further send an End Marker to the MeNB 202 indicating an end of downlink packet data transmission on the old path to the MeNB 202 (signalling 611).
- the MeNB 202 may send another End Marker to the SeNB 203 indicating an end of data forwarding from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203 (signalling 612).
- the S-GW 224 may send with a modify bearer response to the MME 214 (signalling 613), which may trigger the MME 214 to transmit an acknowledgement message to the SeNB 203, such as a path switch request ACK (signalling 614).
- more than one DRBs may be switched from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203 in order to add the SeNB resources.
- the path switch request may be transmitted by the MeNB 202, rather than by the SeNB 203 to the MME 214.
- Figure 7 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure to add the SeNB resources by switching the bearer from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203 of the wireless communication system 200, based on the X2 approach.
- the signalling procedure of Figure 7 may be similar as that of Figure 6.
- the transmissions of the packet data over the EPS bearer(s) may have to go through the SeNB 203 and then through the MeNB 202, namely, the UE 201 may receive/transmit the packet data from/to the SeNB 203, which may further communicate the packet data from/to the core network system 204 through the MeNB 202. In this way, there may be no need to request the core network system 204 to modify the downlink path of the EPS bearer(s) from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203.
- Figure 8 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the UE 201 of the wireless communication system 200 to adding the SeNB resources by switching the bearer from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203.
- the UE 201 may communication with the core network system 204 over the DRB of the EPS bearer established through the MeNB 202 for the macro cell.
- the communication module 211 or other device of UE 201 may receive, from the MeNB 201, the message related to the measurement control which may configure the UE measurement procedures. Measurements provided by the MeNB 202 may assist the function controlling the UE's connection mobility.
- the communication module 211 or other device of the UE 201 may perform the measurement and transmit the measurement report to the MeNB 202.
- the MeNB 202 may make the decision of adding the small cell by switching the DRB from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203. This may happen under certain circumstances, such as when the UE 201 moving into the coverage of the small cell. However, it should be understood that the MeNB 202 may make a decision of not adding the small cell, for example, when the measurement report indicates that the radio quality in the small cell is not good enough.
- the communication module 211 e.g., RRC layer 2112 or other device may receive a message of reconfiguring the RRC connection to add the small cell by switching the DRB from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203.
- the message may be embodied as, without limitation, a RRCconnectionreconfiguration message, and may include information related to the small cell such as the new C-RNTI, SeNB security algorithm identifiers and optionally dedicated RACH preamble, SeNB system information blocks (SIBs), and/or others.
- SIBs SeNB system information blocks
- the communication module 211 e.g., RRC layer 2112 or other device may perform the uplink and/or downlink synchronization with the SeNB 203 in order to reconfigure the RRC connection to switch the DRB from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203.
- the communication module 211 may perform the synchronization to the SeNB 203 and access the small cell via RACH, following a contention-free or contention-based procedure depending on whether a dedicated preamble was indicated or not.
- the UE 201 may communication with the MeNB 202 on more than one DRBs, after switching the DRB from the macro cell to the small cell, the UE 201 may still keep the remaining DRB bearer(s) (i.e., the unswitched DRB(s)) with the MeNB 202 as well as the SRB with the MeNB 202. In this way, the UE 201 may be dual-connected with the MeNB 202 and the SeNB 203.
- the communication module 211 (e.g., RRC layer 2112) or other device may transmit the RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete message to the MeNB 202 and/or SeNB 203 to inform that the RRC connection reconfiguration has been completed and the small cell has been successfully added.
- the communication module 211 or other device may receive/transmit the packet data from/to the SeNB 203.
- more than one DRBs may be switched from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203 in order to add the SeNB resources.
- Figure 9 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the MeNB 202 of the wireless communication system 200 to add the SeNB resources by switching the bearer from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203, based on the SI approach.
- the communication module 212 or other device of MeNB 202 may communicate the packet data between the UE 201 and the core network system 204 over the DRB of the EPS bearer established through the macro cell.
- the communication module 212 or other device may transmit the message related to the measure control to the UE 201.
- the message may configure the UE measurement procedures according to area restriction information. Measurements provided by the MeNB 202 may assist the function controlling the UE's connection mobility.
- the communication module 212 or other device may receive the measurement report from the UE 201. In block 904, based on the measurement report, the communication module 212 or other device may make the decision of adding the SeNB resources by switching the DRB from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203. On the other hand, although not being illustrated in Figure 9, the communication module 212 or other device may make the decision of not adding the small cell.
- the communication module 212 or other device may send to the SeNB 203 the request of adding the SeNB resources by switching the DRB from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203, in block 905.
- the request may be embodied as a SeNB addition request or a small cell addition request (not illustrated in Figure 9), and may include, without limitation, information element (IE) such as cause for the SeNB addition or small cell addition, the list of E-RABs to be setup, characteristics of the DRB, UE security capabilities for SI approach, security context for SI approach, and/or others.
- IE information element
- the communication module 212 or other device may receive, from the UE 201, the acknowledgement message such as the SeNB addition request ACK or the small cell addition request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 9).
- the SeNB addition request ACK or the small cell addition request ACK may include, without limitation, the list of admitted E-RABs (such as E-RAB parameters, TNL address information, and/or others), the list of not admitted E- RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB addition or the small cell addition, and/or others.
- the transparent container may include, without limitation, the new C-RNTI for identifying the UE 201 by the SeNB 203, SeNB security algorithm identifiers for selected security algorithms, the dedicated RACH preamble, access parameters, SIBs parameters, and/or others.
- the communication module 212 may transmit to the UE 201 the message of reconfiguring the RRC connection to add the SeNB resources by switching the DRB from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203.
- the message may be embodied as, without limitation, the
- RRCconnectionreconfiguration message may include information related to the small cell or the SeNB 203 such as the new C-RNTI, SeNB security algorithm identifiers and optionally dedicated RACH preamble, SeNB system information blocks (SIBs), and/or others.
- the UE 201 may communication with the MeNB 202 on more than one DRBs, after switching the DRB from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203, the UE 201 may still keep the remaining DRB bearer (i.e., the unswitched DRB) with the MeNB 202 as well as the SRB with the MeNB 202. In this way, the UE 201 may be dual-connected with the MeNB 202 and the SeNB 203.
- the MeNB 202 may start to deliver the buffered and in transit packet data to the SeNB 203.
- the communication module 212 or other device may transfer the serial number (SN) status to the SeNB 203 in block 908.
- the MeNB 202 may convey uplink PDCP (packet data convergence protocol) SN receiver status and/or downlink PDCP SN transmitter status of E-RABs for which PDCP status preservation applies.
- the SeNB 203 may buffer the packet data received from the MeNB 202, for example, in the memory or the data storage of the SeNB 203.
- the communication module 212 e.g., RRC layer 2122 or other device may receive, from the UE 201, the
- the communication module 212 or other device may then transmit the SeNB addition complete message or small cell addition complete message (not illustrated in Figure 9) to the SeNB 203, in block 911.
- the UE 201 transmits the SeNB addition complete message or small cell addition complete message (not illustrated in Figure 9)
- the block 911 may be omitted.
- the communication module 212 or other device may send a SI or X2 message to the S-GW 224, in order to keep the bearer(s) unreleased, which bearer(s) are related to the MeNB 202 and haven't been switched to the SeNB 203.
- the bearer(s) may include DRB(s) and/or SRB(s). In this way, the UE 201 may still connect with the MeNB 202.
- the similar message may be conveyed to the S-GW 224 by the SeNB 203. In such case, block 912 may be omitted.
- the communication module 212 or other device may receive from the core network system (e.g., S-GW 224), the end marker indicating the end of downlink packet data transmissions from the core network system to the MeNB 202 over the old path.
- the communication module 212 or other device may transmit, to the SeNB 203, the end marker indicating the end of data forwarding from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203.
- the communication module 212 or other device may further transmit, to the MME 214, the path switch request to request switching the downlink path of the EPS bearer from between the MeNB 202 and the core network system 204 to between the SeNB 203 and the core network system 204, wherein the DRB of the EPS bearer has already been switched from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203.
- the path switch request may include the list of the EPS bearer(s) whose DRB(s) have been switched.
- the path switch request may further indicate to keep other bearer(s) unreleased, wherein the other bearer(s) may include those not listed in the request, such as the DRBs related to the MeNB 202 but not switched to the SeNB 203, and/or the SRBs related to the MeNB 202.
- the UE 201 may still be connected to the MeNB 202 while communicating with the SeNB 203.
- the SeNB 203 may send a separate request of keeping the other bearer(s) unreleased to the MME 214.
- Figure 10 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the MeNB 202 of the wireless communication system 200 to add the SeNB resources by switching the bearer from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203, based on the X2 approach.
- blocks 1001 to 1011 are similar to blocks 901 to 9011 and may not be reiterated for simplicity.
- the MeNB 202 may deliver the packet data received from the SeNB 203 to the core network system 204, and vice versa.
- the communication module 212 or other device may further transmit the path switch request to the MME 214 to request switching the downlink path of the EPS bearer from between the MeNB 202 and the core network system 204 to between the SeNB 203 and the core network system 204, wherein the DRB of the EPS bearer has already been switched from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203.
- the path switch request may include the list of the EPS bearer(s) whose DRB(s) have been switched.
- the path switch request may further indicate to keep other bearer(s) unreleased, wherein the other bearer(s) may include those not listed in the request, such as the DRBs related to the MeNB 202 but not switched to the SeNB 203, and/or the SRBs related to the MeNB 202.
- the UE 201 may still be connected to the MeNB 202 while communicating with the SeNB 203.
- the SeNB 203 may send a separate request of keeping the other bearer(s) unreleased to the MME 214.
- Figure 11 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the SeNB 203 of the wireless communication system 200 to add the SeNB resources by switching the bearer from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203 based on the SI approach.
- the UE 201 may communication with the core network system 204 over the DRB of the EPS bearer established through the MeNB 202 for the macro cell. Under some circumstances such as when the UE 201 moving into the small cell, the MeNB 202 may make the decision of adding the SeNB resources by switching the DRB from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203.
- the communication module 213 or other device of SeNB 203 may receive the request of adding the SeNB resources from the MeNB 202.
- the request may be embodied as the SeNB addition request or the small cell addition request (not illustrated in Figure 11), and may include, without limitation, information element (IE) such as cause for the SeNB addition or the small cell addition, a list of E-RABs to be setup, characteristics of the DRB, UE security capabilities for SI approach, security context for SI approach, and/or others.
- IE information element
- the communication module 213 or other device may perform the admission control to determine whether the request is acceptable or not.
- the communication module 213 may send the acknowledgement message to the MeNB 202, such as the SeNB addition request ACK or the small cell addition request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 11).
- the SeNB addition request ACK or the small cell addition request ACK may include, without limitation, a list of admitted E-RABs, a list of not admitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB addition or the small cell addition, and/or others.
- the transparent container may include, without limitation, a new C-RNTI for identifying the UE 201 by the SeNB 203, secondary eNB security algorithm identifiers for selected security algorithms, a dedicated random access channel (RACH) preamble, access parameters, system information blocks (SIBs) parameters, and/or others.
- a new C-RNTI for identifying the UE 201 by the SeNB 203
- secondary eNB security algorithm identifiers for selected security algorithms
- RACH dedicated random access channel
- SIBs system information blocks
- the communication module 213 or other device may receive the SN status transfer message and packet data forwarded from the MeNB 202.
- the MeNB 202 may convey uplink PDCP (packet data convergence protocol) SN receiver status and/or downlink PDCP SN transmitter status of E-RABs for which PDCP status preservation applies.
- the communication module 213 or other device may buffer the packet data received from the MeNB 202, for example, in the memory or the data storage of the SeNB 203.
- the communication module 213 may receive the RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete message from the UE 201.
- the communication module 213 may receive the SeNB addition complete message or the small cell addition complete message (not illustrated in Figure 11) from the MeNB 202, either of which may inform the SeNB 203 of the completion of adding the SeNB resources.
- the UE 201 When the UE 201 can access the small cell, it may transmit the uplink packet to the SeNB 203 over the DRB through the small cell, which may be transferred by the SeNB 203 to the core network system 204.
- the communication module 213 or other device may transmit the path switch request to the MME 214 to request switching the downlink path of the EPS bearer from between the MeNB 202 and the core network system 204 to between the SeNB 203 and the core network system 204, wherein the DRB of the EPS bearer has already been switched from between the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203.
- the path switch request may include the list of the EPS bearer(s) whose DRBs have been switched.
- the path switch request may further indicate to keep other bearer(s) unreleased, wherein the other bearer(s) may include those not listed in the request, such as the DRBs related to the MeNB 202 and not switched to the SeNB 203, and/or the SRBs related to the MeNB 202.
- the UE 201 may still be connected to the MeNB 202 while communicating with the SeNB 203.
- the MeNB 202 may send the separate request of keeping the other bearer(s) unreleased, in which case the block 1107 may be omitted.
- the communication module 213 or other device may receive the acknowledgement message from the core network system 204 (e.g., the MME 214), such as the path switch request ACK.
- the communication module 213 or other device may receive the end marker from the MeNB 202 indicating the end of data forwarding from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203.
- the UE 201 may communicate with the core network system 204 over the DRB through the SeNB 203.
- Figure 12 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the SeNB 203 of the wireless communication system 200 to add the SeNB resources by switching the bearer from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203 based on the X2 approach.
- blocks 1201 to 1206 are similar to blocks 1101 to 1106 and may not be reiterated for simplicity.
- the UE 201 may communicate with the SeNB 203 over the DRB through the small cell, which may further connect with the core network 204 via the MeNB 202.
- the communication module 213 or other device may forward the packet data, which was received from the UE 201, to the MeNB 202 for further transmission to the core network 204, and vice versa.
- Figure 13 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure for the wireless communication system 200 to release SeNB resources by switching a bearer from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202, based on the SI approach.
- the UE 201 may communicate packet data with the core network system 204 over a DRB of an EPS bearer through the SeNB 203 for the small cell. Under the dual connectivity, the UE 201 may communicate another packet data with the MeNB 202 over another DRB of another EPS bearer or communicate a signalling with the MeNB 202 over a SRB through the MeNB 202.
- the MeNB 202 may transmit a message related to measurement control to the UE 201 (signalling 1301).
- the message may configure the UE measurement procedures according to area restriction information. Measurements provided by the MeNB 202 may assist the function controlling the UE's connection mobility.
- the UE 201 may perform the measurement procedures and transmit a measurement report to the MeNB 202 (signalling 1302).
- the MeNB 202 may make a decision of releasing the SeNB resources by switching the DRB from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202. This may happen under certain circumstances, such as when the UE
- the decision may be called as a carrier aggregation (CA) decision.
- CA carrier aggregation
- the 202 may make a decision of not releasing the SeNB resources, for example, when the measurement report indicates that the radio quality in the small cell is good enough.
- the MeNB 202 may send to the SeNB 203 for the small cell a request of releasing the SeNB resources (signalling 1303).
- the request may be embodied as a SeNB release request or a small cell release request (not illustrated in Figure 13), and may include, without limitation, information necessary for preparing the DRB switch, such as elements (IE) like cause for the SeNB release or the small cell release, a list of E- RABs to be switched, characteristics of the DRB (such as DRB parameters, TNL address information, and/or others), UE C-RNTI in the small cell, UE security capabilities for SI approach, security context for SI approach, and/or others.
- IE elements
- the SeNB 203 may perform an admission control to determine whether the request is acceptable or not.
- the SeNB 203 may send an acknowledgement message to the MeNB 202, such as a small cell release request ACK (signalling 1304).
- the SeNB release request ACK or the small cell release request ACK may include, without limitation, information such as the C-RNTI, the cause for the SeNB release or the small cell release, a list of admitted E-RABs including TNL address information for the respective E-RAB, a list of not admitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB release or the small cell release, and/or others.
- the MeNB 202 may transmit to the UE 201 a message of reconfiguring the RRC connection to release the SeNB resources by switching the DRB from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202 (signalling 1305).
- the message may be embodied as, without limitation, a
- RRCconnectionreconfiguration message may include SeNB release information or small cell release information (i.e., SeNB release information) to inform the UE
- the SeNB 203 may deliver buffered and in transit packet data to the MeNB 202. Before forwarding the packet data, the SeNB 203 may transfer SN status message to the MeNB 202 (signalling 1306). In some embodiments, the SeNB 203 may convey uplink PDCP (packet data convergence protocol) SN receiver status and/or downlink PDCP SN transmitter status of E-RABs for which PDCP status preservation applies.
- the MeNB 202 may buffer the packet data received from the SeNB 203 in a memory or a data storage of the MeNB 202.
- the UE 201 may reconfigure the DRB to detach from the SeNB 203 in order to release the SeNB resources. Then, the UE 201 may transmit a RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete message to the MeNB 202 to inform that the RRC connection reconfiguration has been completed and the SeNB resources have been successfully released (signalling 1307). The MeNB 202 may then transmit a SeNB resources complete message or a SeNB release complete message or a small cell release complete message (not illustrated in Figure 13) to the SeNB 203, which may include a UE identifier, a transaction identifier, and/or others (Signalling 1308).
- the UE 201 When the UE 201 can access the macro cell over the DRB, based on the SI approach, it may transmit an uplink packet to the MeNB 202 over the DRB, which may be transferred by the MeNB 203 to the core network system 204.
- the MeNB may transmit an uplink packet to the MeNB 202 over the DRB, which may be transferred by the MeNB 203 to the core network system 204.
- the 202 may further transmit a path switch request to the MME 214 to request switching a downlink path of the EPS bearer from between the SeNB 203 and the core network system 204 to between the MeNB 202 and the core network system 204 (signalling 1309), wherein the DRB of the EPS bearer has already been switched from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202.
- the path switch request may include a list of the EPS bearer(s) whose DRB(s) have been switched.
- the path switch request may further indicate to keep other bearer(s) unreleased, wherein the other bearer(s) may include those not listed in the request, such as the DRBs and/or the SRBs related to the MeNB 202.
- the MeNB 202 may send a separate request of keeping the other bearer(s) unreleased to the MME 214.
- it may be the SeNB 203, rather than the MeNB 202, which may send the path switch request to the MME 214.
- the MME 214 may transmit a modify bearer request to the S-GW 224 to request modifying the downlink path of the listed EPS bearer(s) to go through the MeNB 202 (signalling 1310).
- the S-GW 224 may switch the downlink path, so that the downlink packet data can be transmitted from the core network system 204 to the UE 201 through the MeNB 202 for the macro cell, based on the S 1 approach.
- the S-GW 224 may further send an End Marker to the SeNB 203 indicating an end of downlink packet data transmission on the old path (signalling 1311).
- the SeNB 203 may send another End Marker to the MeNB 202 indicating an end of data forwarding from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202 (signalling 1312).
- the S-GW 224 may send with a modify bearer response to the MME 214 (signalling 1313), which may trigger the MME 214 to transmit an acknowledgement message to the MeNB 202, such as a path switch request ACK (signalling 1314).
- the SeNB 203 may be the SeNB 203 which makes the decision of releasing the SeNB resources.
- the SeNB release request or the small cell release request may be sent from the SeNB 203 to MeNB 202
- the SeNB release request ACK or the small cell release request ACK may be sent from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203.
- Figure 14 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure for the wireless communication system 200 to release the SeNB resources by switching the bearer from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202, based on the X2 approach.
- the signalling procedure of Figure 14 may be similar as that of Figure 13.
- the UE 201 may receive/transmit the packet data from/to SeNB 203 over the DRB of the EPS bearer, and the SeNB 203 may then communicate the packet data with the core network system 204 through the MeNB 202.
- the SeNB 203 may deliver the buffered and in transit packet data to the MeNB 202.
- the transmissions of the packet data between the UE 201 and the core network system 204 over the EPS bearer may only need to go through the MeNB 202. In this way, there may be no need to request the core network system 204 to modify the downlink path of the EPS bearer from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202.
- the SeNB 203 may be the SeNB 203 which makes the decision of releasing the SeNB resources.
- the SeNB release request or the small cell release request may be sent from the SeNB 203 to MeNB 202
- the SeNB release request ACK or the small cell release request ACK may be sent from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203.
- Figure 15 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the UE 201 of the wireless communication system 200 to release the SeNB resources by switching the bearer from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202.
- the communication module 211 or other device of the UE 201 may communicate with the core network system 204 over the DRB of the EPS bearer through the SeNB 203 for the small cell. Under the dual connectivity, the communication module 211 or other device may communicate another packet data with the MeNB 202 over another DRB of another EPS bearer through the MeNB 202 or communicate the signalling with the MeNB 202 over the SRB through the MeNB 202.
- the communication module 211 or other device may receive the message related to the measurement control from the MeNB 202.
- the message may configure the UE measurement procedures according to area restriction information. Measurements provided by the MeNB 202 may assist the function controlling the UE's connection mobility.
- the communication module 211 or other device may perform the measurement and may transmit the measurement report to the MeNB 202 in block
- the MeNB 202 may make the decision of releasing the SeNB resources by switching the DRB from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202. This may happen under certain circumstances, such as when the UE
- the MeNB 202 may make the decision of not releasing the SeNB resources, for example, when the measurement report indicates that the radio quality in the small cell is good enough.
- the communication module 211 e.g., RRC layer 2112
- the communication module 211 may receive, from the MeNB
- the request may be embodied as, without limitation, a
- RRCconnectionreconfiguration message may include small cell release information (i.e., SeNB release information or small cell release information) to inform the UE 201 that the small cell is going to be released.
- small cell release information i.e., SeNB release information or small cell release information
- the communication module 211 e.g., RRC layer 2112
- the communication module 211 may reconfigure the DRB to detach from the SeNB 203 in order to release the SeNB resources. After detaching from the SeNB 203, the
- the communication module 211 may transmit the RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete message to the MeNB 202 to inform that the RRC connection reconfiguration has been completed and the SeNB resources has been successfully released, in block 1506.
- the communication module 211 or other device may start to communicate the packet data with the core network system 204 over the DRB through the MeNB 202.
- Figure 16 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the MeNB 202 of the wireless communication system 200 to release the SeNB resources by switching the bearer from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202, based on the SI approach.
- the UE 201 may communication with the core network system 204 over the DRB of the EPS bearer through the SeNB 203 for the small cell. Under the dual connectivity, the UE 201 may communicate another packet data with the MeNB 202 over another DRB of another EPS bearer or communicate the signalling with the MeNB 202 over the SRB.
- the communication module 212 or other device of the MeNB 202 may transmit the message related to the measurement control to the UE 201.
- the message may configure the UE measurement procedures according to area restriction information. Measurements provided by the MeNB 202 may assist the function controlling the UE's connection mobility.
- the UE 201 may perform the measurement procedures.
- the communication module 212 or other device may receive the measurement report from the UE 201.
- the communication module 212 or other device may make the decision of releasing the SeNB resources by switching the DRB from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202.
- the MeNB 202 may make the decision of not releasing the SeNB resources, for example, when the measurement report indicates that the radio quality in the small cell is not good enough.
- the communication module 212 or other device may send the request of releasing the SeNB resources to the SeNB 203, in block 1604.
- the request may be embodied as the SeNB release request or the small cell release request (not illustrated in Figure 16), and may include, without limitation, information necessary for preparing the DRB switch, such as elements (IE) like cause for the SeNB release request or the small cell release, a list of E-RABs to be switched, characteristics of the DRB, UE C-RNTI in the small cell, UE security capabilities for SI approach, security context for SI approach, and/or others.
- IE elements
- the communication module 212 or other device may receive the acknowledgement message from the SeNB 203, if the SeNB 203 decides that the SeNB release request or the small cell release request is acceptable.
- acknowledgement message may be embodied as the SeNB release request ACK or the small cell release request ACK, and may include, without limitation, information such as the C-RNTI, the cause for the SeNB release or the small cell release, a list of admitted E-RABs, a list of not admitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for SeNB release or the small cell release, and/or others.
- the communication module 212 e.g., RRC layer 2122 or other device may transmit to the UE 201 the message of reconfiguring the RRC connection to release the SeNB resources by switching the DRB from the small cell to the macro cell, in block
- the message may be embodied as, without limitation, a
- RRCconnectionreconfiguration message may include the SeNB release information or the small cell release information (e.g., SeNB release information) to inform the UE 201 that the small cell is going to be released.
- SeNB release information e.g., SeNB release information
- the communication module 212 or other device may receive the SN status transfer message from the SeNB 203, in block
- the SeNB 203 may convey uplink PDCP (packet data convergence protocol) SN receiver status and/or downlink PDCP SN transmitter status of E-RABs for which PDCP status preservation applies.
- the communication module 212 or other device may receive the packet data forwarded from the SeNB 203 in block 1608, and may buffer the packet data in the MeNB 202 in block 1609, for example, in the memory or the data storage of the MeNB 202.
- the communication module 212 e.g., RRC layer 2122
- the communication module 212 may receive, from the UE 201, the RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete message informing that the RRC connection reconfiguration has been completed and the SeNB resources have been successfully released, in block 1610.
- the communication module 212 or other device may transmit the SeNB release request complete message or the small cell release complete message (not illustrated in Figure 16) to the SeNB 203.
- the communication module 212 or other device may receive the uplink packet data from the UE 201 and then transfer it to the core network system 204 over the uplink path of the EPS bearer in block 1612. In block 1613, the
- the communication module 212 or other device may further transmit the path switch request to the MME 214 to request switching the downlink path of the EPS bearer from between the SeNB 203 and the core network system 204 to between the MeNB 202 and the core network system 204, wherein the DRB of the EPS bearer has already been switched from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202.
- the path switch request may include the list of the EPS bearer(s) whose DRB(s) have been switched.
- the path switch request may further indicate to keep other bearer(s) unreleased, wherein the other bearer(s) may include those not listed in the request, such as the DRBs and/or the SRBs related to the MeNB 202.
- the MeNB 202 may send a separate request of keeping the other bearer(s) unreleased to the MME 214.
- it may be the SeNB 203, rather than the MeNB 202, which may send the path switch request to the MME 214.
- the communication module 212 or other device may receive the downlink packet data from the core network system 204 and then transfer it to the UE 201 over the downlink path of the EPS bearer, in block 1614.
- the communication module 212 or other device may receive the End Marker from the SeNB 203, which may indicate the end of data forwarding from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202.
- the SeNB 203 may indicate the end of data forwarding from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202.
- the communication module 212 or other device may receive from MME 224 the acknowledgement message to the patch switch request, such as the path switch request ACK.
- the SeNB 203 may make the decision of releasing the SeNB resources.
- the SeNB release request or the small cell release request may be sent from the SeNB
- the SeNB release request ACK or the small cell release ACK may be sent from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203, rather than from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202.
- Figure 17 illustrates an embodiment of the method for the MeNB 202 of the wireless communication system 200 to release the SeNB resources by switching the bearer from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202, based on the X2 approach.
- the method of Figure 17 may be similar as that of Figure 16, for example, blocks 1701 to 1706 may be similar as the blocks 1601 to 1606, and blocks 1707 to 1708 may be similar as blocks 1610 to 1611.
- the UE 201 may receive/transmit the packet data from/to SeNB 203 over the DRB of the EPS bearer, and the SeNB 203 may transmit/receive the packet data to/from the core network system 204 through the MeNB 202.
- the SeNB 203 may deliver the buffered and in transit packet data to the MeNB 202.
- the transmissions of the packet data between the UE 201 and the core network system after the completion of the RRC connection reconfiguration to switch the DRB from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202, the transmissions of the packet data between the UE 201 and the core network system
- the 204 over the EPS bearer may only need to go through the MeNB 202. In this case, there may be no need to request the core network system 204 to modify the downlink path of the EPS bearer from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202.
- the SeNB 203 may be the SeNB 203 which may make the decision of releasing the SeNB resources.
- the SeNB resources release request or the small cell release request (not illustrated in Figure 17) may be sent from the SeNB 203 to MeNB 202, rather than from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203, and the SeNB release request ACK or the small cell release ACK (not illustrated in Figure 17) may be sent from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203, rather than from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202.
- Figure 18 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the SeNB 203 of the wireless communication system 200 to release the SeNB resources by switching the bearer from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202, based on the SI approach.
- the UE 201 may communication with the core network system 204 over the DRB of the EPS bearer through the SeNB 203 for the small cell. Under the dual connectivity, the UE 201 may communicate another packet data with the MeNB 202 over another DRB of another EPS bearer or communicate a signalling with the MeNB 202 over a SRB. In certain circumstances, such as when the UE 201 moving out of the coverage of the small cell back, it may be decided to release the SeNB resources by switching the DRB from the small cell to the macro cell.
- the communication module 213 or other device of the SeNB 203 may receive from the MeNB 202 the request of releasing the SeNB resources.
- the request may be embodied as a SeNB release request or the small cell release request, and may include, without limitation, information necessary for preparing the DRB switch, such as elements (IE) like cause for the SeNB release or the small cell release, a list of E-RABs to be switched, characterisitics of the DRB, UE C- RNTI in the small cell, UE security capabilities for S 1 approach, security context for SI approach, and/or others.
- IE elements
- the communication module 213 or other device of the SeNB 203 may perform the admission control to determine that the request is acceptable. However, although not being illustrated in Figure 18, in certain circumstances, it may be determined that the request is unacceptable. In block 1803, in response to the determination that the SeNB release request or the small cell release request (not illustrated in Figure 18) is acceptable, the communication module 213 or other device may transmit the SeNB release request ACK or the small cell release request ACK to the MeNB 202.
- the SeNB release request ACK or the small cell release request ACK may include, without limitation, information such as the C-RNTI, the cause for the SeNB release or the small cell release, a list of admitted E-RABs, a list of not admitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB release or the small cell release, and/or others.
- information such as the C-RNTI, the cause for the SeNB release or the small cell release, a list of admitted E-RABs, a list of not admitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB release or the small cell release, and/or others.
- the communication module 213 or other device may transfer SN status message to the MeNB 202, in block 1804.
- the SeNB 203 may transfer uplink PDCP (packet data convergence protocol) SN receiver status and/or downlink PDCP SN transmitter status of E-RABs for which PDCP status preservation applies.
- the communication module 213 or other device may deliver the buffered and in transit packet data to the MeNB 202.
- the UE 201 after the UE 201 reconfigures the RRC connection to detach from the SeNB 203 in order to release the SeNB resources, the
- the communication module 213 or other device may receive the SeNB release complete mesage or the small cell release complete message from the MeNB 202.
- the downlink path of the EPS bearer is switched from between the SeNB 203 and the core network system 204 to between the MeNB
- the communication module 213 or other device may receive the End Marker from the S-GW 224 indicating the end of downlink packet data transmission on the old path, in block 1807.
- the communication module 213 may send the another End Marker to the MeNB 202 indicating the end of data forwarding from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202.
- the SeNB 203 may make the decision of releasing the SeNB resources.
- the SeNB release request or the small cell release request may be sent from the SeNB
- the communication module 213 or other device may further transmit to the MME 214 the path switch request of switching the downlink path of the EPS bearer from between the SeNB 203 and the core network system 204 to between the MeNB 202 and the core network system 204, wherein the DRB of the EPS bearer has already been switched from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202.
- the path switch request may include the list of the EPS bearer(s) whose DRB(s) have been switched.
- the path switch request may further indicate to keep other bearer(s) unreleased, wherein the other bearer(s) may include those not listed in the request, such as the DRBs and/or the SRBs related to the MeNB 202.
- Figure 19 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the SeNB 203 of the wireless communication system 200 to release the SeNB resources by switching the bearer from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202, based on the X2 approach.
- the method of Figure 19 may be similar as that of Figure 18.
- blocks 1902 to 1904 may be similar as the blocks 1801 to 1803, and block 1905 may be similar as block 1806.
- the communication module 213 or other device may receive/transmit the packet data from/to UE 201 over the DRB of the EPS bearer, and then may communicate the packet data with the core network system 204 through the MeNB 202, in block 1901.
- the SeNB 203 may be no need for the SeNB 203 to deliver the buffered and in transit packet data to the MeNB 202.
- the transmissions of the packet data between the UE 201 and the core network system 204 over the EPS bearer may only need to go through the MeNB 202. In this way, there may be no need to request the core network system 204 to modify the downlink path of the EPS bearer from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202.
- the SeNB 203 may be the SeNB 203 which may make the decision of releasing the SeNB resources.
- the SeNB resources release request or the small cell release request (not illustrated in Figure 19) may be sent from the SeNB 203 to MeNB 202, rather than from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203, and the SeNB resources release request ACK or the small cell release request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 19) may be sent from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203, rather than from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202.
- Figure 20 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure for the wireless communication system 200 to switch the SeNB resources by switching a bearer from a source SeNB to a target SeNB, based on the SI approach.
- the wireless communication system 200 may comprise the UE 201, the MeNB 202, a source SeNB 2030 for a source small cell, a target SeNB 2040 for a target small cell, and the core network system 204 made up by the MME 214, the S-GW 224 and others.
- the UE 201 may be dual-connected with the MeNB 202 and the source SeNB 2030.
- the source SeNB 2030 may include a communication module 2031, and/or others.
- the communication module 2031 may receive or transmit a signalling/packet from/to the UE 201, MeNB 202, target SeNB 2040 and/or the core network system 204 of the wireless communication system 200. In some embodiments, the communication module 2031 may further generate, process and/or control the signalling/packet and/or other communications from/to the source SeNB 2030. Details about functionalities of the communication module 2031 may be provided in the following descriptions. Although not being illustrated in Figure 20, the communication module 2031 may further include several layer implementations, such as a physical layer module, a L2 layer module, a radio resource communication (RRC) layer module, a non-access stratum (NAS) layer module, and/or others.
- RRC radio resource communication
- NAS non-access stratum
- the target SeNB 2040 may include a communication module 2041, and/or others.
- the communication module 2041 may receive or transmit a signalling/packet from/to the UE 201, MeNB 202, source SeNB 2030 and/or the core network system 204 of the wireless communication system 200.
- the communication module 2041 may further generate, process and/or control the signalling/packet and/or other communications from/to the source SeNB 2030. Details about functionalities of the communication module 2041 may be provided in the following descriptions.
- the communication module 2041 may further include several layer
- a physical layer module such as a physical layer module, a L2 layer module, a radio resource communication (RRC) layer module, a non-access stratum (NAS) layer module, and/or others.
- RRC radio resource communication
- NAS non-access stratum
- the UE 201 may communicate packet data from/to the source SeNB 2030 for the source small cell over a DRB of an EPS bearer. Under the dual-connectivity, the UE 201 may communicate another packet data from/to the MeNB 202 on another DRB of another EPS bearer, or communicate signalling with the MeNB 202 on a SRB.
- the MeNB 202 may transmit a message related to measurement control to the UE 201 (signalling 2001).
- the message may configure the UE measurement procedures according to area restriction information.
- Measurements provided by the MeNB 202 may assist the function controlling the UE's connection mobility.
- the UE 201 may perform the measurement procedures and transmit a measurement report to the MeNB 202 (signalling 2002).
- the MeNB 202 may make a decision of switching the SeNB resources by switching the DRB from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040. This may happen under certain circumstances, such as when the UE 201 moving from the source small cell to the target small cell. As illustrated in Figure 20, the decision may be called as a carrier aggregation (CA) decision. On the other hand, although not being illustrated in Figure 20, it should be understood that the MeNB 202 may make a decision of not switching the SeNB resources, for example, when the measurement report indicates that the radio quality in the source small cell is good enough.
- CA carrier aggregation
- the MeNB 202 may send a request of switching the SeNB resources to the target SeNB 2040 for the target small cell (signalling 2003), as well as to the source SeNB 2040 for the source small cell (signalling 2005).
- the request may be embodied as a SeNB switch request or a small cell switch request (not illustrated in Figure 20), and may include, without limitation, information necessary for preparing the DRB switch, such as elements (IE) like TYPE field indicating whether the SeNB receiving the message may add the DRB (i.e., the target SeNB) or release the DRB (i.e., the source SeNB), cause for the SeNB switch or the small cell switch, a list of E-RABs to be setup or released, characteristics of the DRB (such as DRB parameters, TNL address information, and/or others), a UE C-RNTI in the source small cell or the target small cell, UE security capabilities for S 1 approach, security context for S 1 approach, and/or others.
- IE elements
- the target SeNB 2040 may perform an admission control to determine whether the request is acceptable or not, namely, whether it is admittable to add the DRB into the target small cell. In response to a determination that the request is acceptable, the target SeNB 2040 may send a message to the MeNB 202, such as a SeNB switch request ACK or a small cell switch request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 20) (signalling 2004).
- the MeNB 202 such as a SeNB switch request ACK or a small cell switch request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 20) (signalling 2004).
- the SeNB switch request ACK or the small cell switch request ACK may include, without limitation, information such as the C-RNTI, the cause for the SeNB switch or the small cell switch, a list of admitted E-RABs including TNL address information for the respective E-RAB, a list of not admitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for SeNB release or the small cell release, and/or others.
- the source SeNB 2030 may perform another admission control to determine whether the SeNB switch request or the small cell switch request is acceptable or not, namely, whether it is admittable to release the DRB from the source small cell.
- the source SeNB 2030 may send a message to the MeNB 202, such as a SeNB switch request ACK or a small cell switch request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 20) (signalling 2006).
- the SeNB switch request ACK or the small cell switch request ACK may include, without limitation, information such as the C-RNTI, the cause for the SeNB switch or the small cell switch, a list of admitted E-RABs including TNL address information for the respective E-RAB, a list of unadmitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB release or the small cell release, and/or others.
- the MeNB 202 may transmit to the UE 201 a message of reconfiguring the RRC connection to switch the SeNB resources by switching the DRB from the source small cell to the target small cell (signalling 2007).
- the request may be embodied as, without limitation, a RRCconnectionreconfiguration message and may include information necessary for switching the small cell, such as the sources SeNB information, the source small cell information, the target SeNB information, target small cell information and/or others.
- the MeNB 202 may transmit a SeNB SN status transfer message or a small cell SN status transfer message (not illustrated in Figure 20) to the source SeNB 2030 to request it to transfer the buffered and in-transit packet data to the target SeNB 2040
- the SeNB SN status transfer message or the small cell SN status transfer message may include, without limitation, the UE RNTI in the target small cell, the target SeNB information such as a target SeNB identifier, the target small cell information such as a target small cell identifier, and others.
- the source SeNB 2030 may start to deliver the buffered and in-transit packet data to the target SeNB 2040. Before forwarding the packet data, the source SeNB 2030 may transfer a SN status message to the target SeNB 2040 (signalling 2009).
- the source SeNB 2030 may convey uplink PDCP (packet data convergence protocol) SN receiver status and/or downlink PDCP SN transmitter status of E-RABs for which PDCP status preservation applies.
- the target SeNB 2040 may buffer the packet data received from the SeNB 203, for example, in a memory or data storage of the target SeNB 2040.
- the UE 201 may reconfigure the RRC connection to detach from the source SeNB 2030 and synchronize to the target SeNB 2040 in order to switch from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040. For example, the UE 201 may perform the synchronization to the target SeNB 2040 and access the target small cell via RACH, following a contention-free or contention-based procedure depending on whether a dedicated preamble was indicated or not.
- the UE 201 may transmit a RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the MeNB 202 to inform that the RRC connection
- the MeNB 202 may then transmit a SeNB switch complete message or a small cell switch complete message (not illustrated in Figure 20) to the source SeNB 2030 (signalling 2011) and the target SeNB 2040 (signalling 2012).
- the UE 201 may send the
- the UE 201 When the UE 201 can access the target small cell, based on the SI approach, it may transmit an uplink packet to the target SeNB 2040 over the DRB, which may be transferred by the target SeNB 2040 to the core network system 204.
- the target SeNB 2040 may further transmit a path switch request to the MME 214 to request switching a downlink path of the EPS bearer from between the source SeNB 2030 and the core network system 204 to between the target SeNB 2040 and the core network system 204 (signalling 2013), wherein the DRB of the EPS bearer has already been switched from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040.
- the path switch request may include a list of the EPS bearer(s) whose DRB(s) have been switched.
- the path switch request may further indicate to keep other bearer(s) unreleased, wherein the other bearer(s) may include those not listed in the request, such as the DRBs and/or the SRBs related to the MeNB 202.
- the MeNB 202 may send a separate request of keeping the other bearer(s) unreleased to the MME 214.
- it may be the MeNB 202 rather than the target SeNB 2040 which may send the path switch request to the MME 214.
- the MME 214 may transmit a modify bearer request to the S-GW 224 to request modifying the downlink path of the listed EPS bearer(s) to go through the target SeNB 2040(signalling 2014).
- the S-GW 224 may switch the downlink path, so that the downlink packet data can be transmitted from the core network system 204 to the UE 201 through the target SeNB 2040, based on the SI approach.
- the S-GW 224 may further send an End Marker to the source SeNB 2030 indicating an end of downlink packet data transmission on the old path (signalling 2015).
- the source SeNB 2030 may send an End Marker to the target SeNB 2040 indicating an end of data forwarding from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040 (signalling 2016).
- the S-GW 224 may send with a modify bearer response to the MME 214 (signalling 2017), which may trigger the MME 214 to transmit an acknowledgement message to the target SeNB 2040, such as a path switch request ACK (signalling 2018).
- the SeNB switch request or the small cell switch request may be sent from the source SeNB 2030 to MeNB 202 as well as the target SeNB 2040, and the SeNB switch request ACK or the small cell switch request ACK may be sent from the MeNB 202 and the target SeNB 2040 to the source SeNB 2030.
- Figure 21 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure for the wireless communication system 200 to switch the SeNB resources by switching the bearer from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040, based on the X2 approach.
- the signalling procedure of Figure 21 may be similar as that of Figure 20.
- signalling 2101 to 2107 may be similar as signalling 2001 to 2007, and signalling 2109 to 2111 may be similar as signalling 2010 to 2012.
- the source SeNB 2030 may communicate the packet data with the core network system 204 through the MeNB 202.
- the transmissions of the packet data between the target SeNB 2040 and the core network system 204 over the EPS bearer may still need to go through the MeNB 202.
- the SeNB release request or the small cell release request may be sent from the source SeNB 2030 to MeNB 202 as well as the target SeNB 2040, and the SeNB release request ACK or the small cell release request ACK may be sent from the MeNB 202 and the target SeNB 2040 to the source SeNB 2030.
- Figure 22 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the UE 201 of the wireless communication system 200 to switch the SeNB resources or the small cell by switching the bearer from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040.
- the communication module 211 or other device of the UE 201 may communicate packet data from/to the source SeNB 2030 of the source small cell over the DRB of the EPS bearer. Under the dual connectivity, the communication module 211 or other device may communicate another packet data from/to the MeNB 202 over another DRB of another EPS bearer or communicate the signalling with the MeNB 202 over the SRB.
- the communication module 211 or other device may receive a message related to the measurement control from the MeNB 202.
- the message may configure the UE measurement procedures according to area restriction information. Measurements provided by the MeNB 202 may assist the function controlling the UE's connection mobility.
- the communication module 211 or other device of UE 201 may perform the measurement and may transmit the measurement report to the MeNB 202 in block 2203. Based on the measurement report, the MeNB 202 or source SeNB 2030 may make the decision of switching the SeNB resources or the small cell by switching the DRB from the source SeNB 2030 for the source small cell to the target SeNB 2040 for the target small cell.
- the MeNB 202 may make a decision of not switching the SeNB resources or the small cell, for example, when the measurement report indicates that the radio quality in the source small cell is good enough.
- the communication module 211 e.g., RRC layer
- the communication module 211 may receive, from the MeNB 202, the message of reconfiguring the RRC connection to switch the SeNB resources or the small cell by switching the DRB from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040, in block 2204.
- the request may be embodied as, without limitation, a RRCconnectionreconfiguration message and may include information necessary for switching the SeNB resources or the small cell, such as the source SeNB inforamtion, source small cell information, the target SeNB information, the target small cell information, and/or others.
- the communication module 211 or other device may reconfigure the RRC connection to detach from the source SeNB 2030 and synchronize with the target SeNB 2040 in order to switch the small cell, in block 2205.
- the UE 201 may perform the synchronization to the target SeNB 2040 and access the target small cell via RACH, following a contention-free or contention-based procedure depending on whether a dedicated preamble was indicated or not.
- the communication module 211 (e.g., RRC layer) or other device may transmit the RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete message to the MeNB 202 and/or the target SeNB 2040 to inform that the RRC connection reconfiguration has been completed and the SeNB resources or the small cell has been successfully switched, in block 2206.
- the communication module 211 or other device may communicate the packet data with the core network system 204 over the DRB through the target SeNB 2040.
- Figure 23 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the MeNB 202 of the wireless communication system 200 to switch the SeNB resources or the small cell by switching the bearer from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040, based on the S 1 approach.
- the UE 201 may communicate packet data with the core network system 204 over the DRB of the EPS bearer through the source SeNB 2030 of the source small cell. Under the dual connectivity, the UE 201 may communicate another packet data with the MeNB 202 over another DRB of another EPS bearer or communicate the signalling with the MeNB 202 over the SRB.
- the communication module 212 or other device of the MeNB 202 may transmit the message related to measurement control to the UE 201, in block 2301.
- the message may configure the UE measurement procedures according to area restriction information. Measurements provided by the MeNB 202 may assist the function controlling the UE's connection mobility.
- the communication module 212 or other device of the MeNB 202 may transmit the message related to measurement control to the UE 201, in block 2301.
- the message may configure the UE measurement procedures according to area restriction information. Measurements provided by the MeNB 202 may assist the function controlling the UE's connection mobility.
- the communication module 212 or other device of the MeNB 202 may transmit the message related to measurement control to the UE 201, in block 2301.
- the message may configure the UE measurement procedures according to area restriction information. Measurements provided by the MeNB 202 may assist the function controlling the UE's connection mobility.
- the communication module 212 or other device may receive the measurement report from the UE 201.
- the control module 222 of the MeNB 202 may make the decision of switching the SeNB resources or the small cell by switching the DRB from the source small cell to the target small cell. This may happen under certain circumstances, such as when the UE 201 moving from the source small cell to the target small cell.
- the MeNB 202 may make a different decision, i.e., not switching the small cell.
- the communication module 212 or other device may send the request of switching the SeNB resources or the small cell to the target SeNB 2040, in block 2304.
- the request may be embodied as the SeNB switch request or the small cell switch request (not illustrated in Figure 23), and may include, without limitation, information necessary for preparing the DRB switch, such as elements (IE) like TYPE field indicating whether the SeNB receiving the message may add the DRB (i.e., the target SeNB) or release the DRB (i.e., the source SeNB), cause for the SeNB switch or the small cell switch, a list of E-RABs to be setup or released, characteristics of the E-RABs (such as E-RAB parameters, TNL address information, and/or others), a UE C-RNTI in the source small cell or the target small cell, UE security capabilities for S 1 approach, security context for SI approach, and/or others.
- IE elements
- the communication module 212 or other device may receive the message from the target SeNB 2040, if the target SeNB 2040 decides that the SeNB switch request or the small cell switch request (not illustrated in Figure 23) is acceptable.
- the message may be embodied as the SeNB switch request ACK or the small cell switch request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 23), and may include, without limitation, information such as the C-RNTI, the cause for the SeNB switch or the small cell switch, a list of admitted E-RABs including TNL address information for the respective E-RAB, a list of not admitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB release or the small cell release, and/or others.
- the communication module 212 or other device may send the SeNB switch request or the small cell switch request (not illustrated in Figure 23) to the source SeNB 2030 in block 2306, and may receive the SeNB switch request ACK or the small cell switch request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 23) from the source SeNB 2030 in block 2307.
- the communication module 212 e.g., RRC layer
- the communication module 212 may transmit to the UE 201 the message of reconfiguring the RRC connection to switch the small cell by switching the DRB from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040, in block 2308.
- the request may be embodied as, without limitation, a RRCconnectionreconfiguration message and may include information necessary for switching the SeNB resources or the small cell, such as the source SeNB information, the source small cell information, the target SeNB information, the target small cell information and/or others.
- the communication module 212 or other device may transmit the SeNB SN status transfer message or the small cell SN status transfer message (not illustrated in Figure 23) to the source SeNB 2030 to request the transfer of the buffered and in- transit packet data to the target SeNB 2040, in block 2309.
- the SeNB SN status transfer message or the small cell SN status transfer message may include, without limitation, the UE RNTI in the target small cell, the target small cell information such as the target small cell identifier, the target SeNB information such as the target SeNB identifier, and/or others.
- the communication module 212 e.g., RRC layer
- the communication module 212 may receive the RRCconnectionreconfiguration complete message from the UE 201 that may inform that the RRC connection reconfiguration has been completed and the SeNB resources or the small cell have been successfully switched, in block 2310.
- the communication module 212 or other device may then transmit the SeNB switch complete message or the small cell switch complete message (not illustrated in Figure 23) to the source SeNB 2030 and the target SeNB 2040, in block 2311.
- the SeNB switch complete message or the small cell switch complete message from the MeNB 202 to the target SeNB 2040 can be omitted.
- it may be the source SeNB 2030 rather than the MeNB 202 which makes the decision of switching the SeNB resources or the small cell.
- the SeNB release request or the small cell release request may be sent from the source SeNB 2030 to MeNB 202 as well as the target SeNB 2040, and the SeNB release ACK or the small cell release ACK may be sent from the MeNB
- the communication module 212 or other device may further transmit the path switch request to the MME 214 to request switching the downlink path of the EPS bearer from between the source SeNB 2030 and the core network system 204 to between the target SeNB 2040 and the core network system 204, wherein the DRB of the EPS bearer has already been switched from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040.
- the path switch request may include the list of the EPS bearer(s) whose DRB(s) have been switched.
- the path switch request may further indicate to keep other bearer(s) unreleased, wherein the other bearer(s) may include those not listed in the request, such as the DRBs and/or the SRBs related to the MeNB 202.
- Figure 24 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the MeNB 202 of the wireless communication system 200 to switch the SeNB resources or the small cell by switching the bearer from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040, based on the X2 approach.
- the method of Figure 24 may be similar as that of Figure 23.
- blocks 2401 to 2408 may be similar as blocks 2301 to 2308
- blocks 2411-2412 may be similar as blocks 2310-2311.
- the source SeNB 2030 may communicate the packet data with the core network system 204 through the MeNB 202.
- the SeNB switch complete message or the small cell switch complete message (not illustrated in Figure 24) from the MeNB 202 to the target SeNB 2040 can be omitted.
- it may be the source SeNB 2030 rather than the MeNB 202 which makes the decision of switching the SeNB resources or the small cell.
- the SeNB release request or the small cell release request (not illustrated in Figure 24) may be sent from the source SeNB 2030 to the MeNB 202 as well as to the target SeNB 2040.
- the SeNB release request ACK or the small cell release ACK (not illustrated in Figure 24) may be sent from the MeNB 202 and the target SeNB 2040 to the source SeNB 2030.
- Figure 25 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the source SeNB 2030 of the wireless communication system 200 to switch the SeNB resources or the small cell by switching the bearer from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB, based on the S 1 approach.
- the UE 201 may communicate the packet data with the core network system 204 over the DRB of the EPS bearer through the source SeNB 2030 of the source small cell. Under the dual connectivity, the UE 201 may communicate another packet data with the MeNB 202 over another DRB of another EPS bearer or communicate the signalling with the MeNB 202 over the SRB.
- the MeNB 202 may make the decision of switching the SeNB resources or the small cell by switching the DRB from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040. This may happen under certain circumstances, such as when the UE 201 moving from the source small cell to the target small cell.
- the communication module 2031 or other device of the source SeNB 2030 may receive, from the MeNB 202, the request of switching the SeNB resources or the small cell, in block 2501.
- the request may be embodied as the SeNB switch request or the small cell switch request (not illustrated in Figure 25), and may include, without limitation, information necessary for preparing the DRB switch, such as elements (IE) like TYPE field indicating whether the SeNB receiving the message may add the DRB (i.e., the target SeNB) or release the DRB (i.e., the source SeNB), cause for the SeNB switch or the small cell switch, a list of E-RABs to be setup or released, characteristics of E-RAB (such as E-RAB parameters, TNL address information, and/or others), a UE C-RNTI in the source small cell or the target small cell, UE security capabilities for SI approach, security context for SI approach, and/or others.
- IE elements
- the communication module 2031 or other device may perform the admission control and determine that the request is acceptable. Moreover, in bock 2502, the communication module 2031 or other device may send the message to the MeNB 202, such as the SeNB switch request ACK or the small cell switch request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 25).
- the SeNB switch request ACK or the small cell switch request ACK may include, without limitation, information such as the C-RNTI, the cause for the SeNB switch or the small cell switch, a list of admitted E-RABs including TNL address information for the respective E-RAB, a list of unadmitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB release or the small cell release, and/or others.
- the source SeNB 2030 may make a decision of not admitting the SeNB switch request or the small cell switch request, for example, when the measurement report indicates that the radio quality in the small cell is good enough
- the communication module 2031 or other device may receive, from the MeNB 202, the SeNB SN status transfer message or the small cell SN status transfer message (not illustrated in Figure 25) which may trigger the delivery of buffered and in-transmit packet data from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040.
- the communication module 2031 or other device may send the SN status message to the target SeNB 2040.
- the communication module 2031 or other device may convey uplink PDCP (packet data convergence protocol) SN receiver status and/or downlink PDCP SN transmitter status of E-RABs for which PDCP status preservation applies.
- the communication module 2031 or other device may forward the buffered and in- transit packet data to the target SeNB 2040.
- the communication module 2031 or other device may receive, from the MeNB 202, the SeNB switch complete message or the small cell switch complete message (not illustrated in Figure 25) in block 2506, which may inform that the SeNB switch or the small cell switch has been completed.
- the communication module 2031 or other device may receive, from the core network system 204 (e.g., S-GW 224), the End Marker indicating the end of downlink packet data transmission from the core network system 204 to the source SeNB 2030 on the old path.
- the communication module 2031 or other device may send, to the target SeNB 2040, the End Marker indicating the end of data forwarding from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040.
- the SeNB release request or the small cell release request may be sent from the source SeNB 2030 to MeNB 202 as well as to the target SeNB 2040, and the SeNB release ACK or the small cell release ACK may be sent from the MeNB 202 and the target SeNB 2040 to the source SeNB 2030.
- Figure 26 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the source SeNB 2030 of the wireless communication system 200 to switch the bearer from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040, based on the X2 approach.
- the source SeNB 2030 may communicate the packet data between the UE 201 and the core network system 204 through the MeNB 202.
- the source SeNB 2030 may receive the packet data from the UE 201 and transmit it to the core network system 204 through the MeNB 202, and/or receive the packet data from the core network system through the MeNB 202 and transmit it to the UE 201.
- the UE 201 may communicate another packet data with the MeNB 202 over another DRB of another EPS bearer or communicate the signalling with the MeNB 202 over the SRB.
- the communication module 2031 or other device of the source SeNB 2030 may receive, from the MeNB 202, the request of switching the SeNB resources or the small cell in block 2601.
- the request may be embodied as the SeNB switch request or the small cell switch request (not illustrated in Figure 26), and may include, without limitation, information necessary for preparing the DRB switch, such as elements (IE) like TYPE field indicating whether the SeNB receiving the message may add the DRB (i.e., the target SeNB) or release the DRB (i.e., the source SeNB), cause for the SeNB switch or the small cell switch, a list of E-RABs to be setup or released, characteristics of E-RAB (such as E-RAB parameters, TNL address information, and/or others), a UE C-RNTI in the source small cell or the target small cell, UE security capabilities for SI approach, security context for SI approach, and/or others.
- IE elements
- the communication module 2031 or other device may perform the admission control and determine that the request is acceptable. Moreover, in bock 2602, the communication module 2031 may send the message to the MeNB 202, such as the SeNB switch request ACK or the small cell switch request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 26).
- the SeNB switch request ACK or the small cell switch request ACK may include, without limitation, information such as the C- RNTI, the cause for the SeNB switch or the small cell switch, a list of admitted E- RABs including TNL address information for the respective E-RABs, a list of unadmitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB release or the small cell release, and/or others.
- the source SeNB 2030 may make the decision of not admitting the SeNB switch reqesut or the small cell switch request.
- the communication module 2031 or other device may receive, from the MeNB 202, the SeNB switch complete message or the small cell switch complete message (not illustrated in Figure 26) in block 2603, which may inform that the SeNB resources switch or the small cell switch has been completed.
- the SeNB release request or the small cell release request may be sent from the source SeNB 2030 to MeNB 202 as well as to the target SeNB 2040.
- the SeNB release request ACK or the small cell release request ACK may be sent from the MeNB 202 and the target SeNB 2040 to the source SeNB 2030.
- Figure 27 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the target SeNB 2040 of the wireless communication system 200 to switch the bearer from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040, based on the SI approach.
- the UE 201 may communicate the packet data with the core network system 204 over the DRB of the EPS bearer through the source SeNB 2030 of the source small cell. Under the dual connectivity, the UE 201 may communicate another packet data with the MeNB 202 over another DRB of another EPS bearer or communicate the signalling with the MeNB 202 over the SRB.
- the communication module 2041 or other device of the target SeNB 2040 may receive the request of switching the DRB from the MeNB 202 or the source SeNB 2030 in block 2701.
- the request may be embodied as the SeNB switch request or the small cell switch request (not illustrated in Figure 27), and may include, without limitation, information necessary for preparing the DRB switch, such as elements (IE) like TYPE field indicating whether the SeNB receiving the message may add the DRB (i.e., the target SeNB) or release the DRB (i.e., the source SeNB), cause for the SeNB switch or the small cell switch, a list of E-RABs to be setup or released, characteristics of E-RAB (such as E-RAB parameters, TNL address information, and/or others), a UE C-RNTI in the source small cell or the target small cell, UE security capabilities for SI approach, security context for SI approach, and/or others.
- IE elements
- TYPE field indicating whether the SeNB receiving the message may add the DRB (i.e., the target SeNB) or release the DRB (i.e., the source SeNB), cause for the SeNB switch or the small cell switch
- IE elements
- the communication device 2041 or other device may perform the admission control and determine that the request is acceptable.
- the communication module 2041 or other device may send the message to the MeNB 202 or the source SeNB 2030, such as the SeNB switch request or the small cell switch request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 27).
- the SeNB switch request ACK or the small cell switch request ACK may include, without limitation, information such as the C-RNTI, the cause for the SeNB switch or the small cell switch, a list of admitted E-RABs (such as E-RAB parameters, TNL address information, and/or others), a list of unadmitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB release or the small cell release, and/or others.
- the target SeNB 2040 may make the decision of not admitting the SeNB switch request or the small cell switch request.
- the communication module 2041 or other device may receive the SeNB SN status transfer message or the small cell SN status transfer message (not illustrated in Figure 27) from the source SeNB 2030.
- the source SeNB 2030 may convey uplink PDCP (packet data convergence protocol) SN receiver status and/or downlink PDCP SN transmitter status of E-RABs for which PDCP status preservation applies.
- the communication module 2041 or other device may receive the buffered and in- transit packet data from the source SeNB 2040, and in block 2706, the target SeNB 2040 may buffer the packet data, for example, in the memory or the data storage of the target SeNB 2040.
- the UE 201 may reconfigure the RRC connection to detach from the source SeNB 2030 and synchronize with the target SeNB 2040 in order to switch the DRB from the source small cell to the target small cell, in block 2707. For example, the UE 201 may perform the synchronization to the target SeNB 2040 and access the target small cell via RACH, following a contention-free or contention- based procedure depending on whether a dedicated preamble was indicated or not.
- the communication module 2041 may receive the RRC connection reconfiguration complete message from the UE 201.
- the communication module 2041 e.g., RRC layer
- the communication module 2041 or other device may receive, from the MeNB 202, the SeNB switch complete message or the small cell switch complete message (not illustrated in Figure 27), either of which may inform that the DRB has been successfully switched from the source small cell to the target small cell.
- the communication module 2041 or other device may receive/transmit packet data from/to the UE 201, in block 2709.
- the communication module 2041 or other device may further transmit the path switch request to the MME 214 to request switching the downlink path of the EPS bearer from between the source SeNB 2030 and the core network system 204 to between the target SeNB 2040 and the core network system 204, wherein the DRB of the EPS bearer has already been switched from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040.
- the path switch request may include a list of the EPS bearer(s) whose DRB(s) has been switched.
- the path switch request may further indicate to keep other bearer(s) unreleased, wherein the other bearer(s) may include those not listed in the request, such as the DRBs and/or the SRBs related to the MeNB 202.
- the target SeNB 2040 or the MeNB 202 may send a separate request of keeping the other bearer(s) unreleased to the MME 214.
- it may be the MeNB 202 rather than the target SeNB 2040 which may send the path switch request to the MME 214.
- the target SeNB 2040 may be able to receive the packet data from the core network system 204, such as the S-GW 224. In this way, the communication path between the UE 201 and the core network system 204 through the target SeNB 2040 has been completed. Further, the communication module 2041 or other device may receive the acknowledgement message, such as the patch switch request ACK from the MME 214, in block 2711. In block 2712, the communication module 2041 or other device may receive the End Marker from the source SeNB 2030 indicating the end of data forwarding from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040.
- the acknowledgement message such as the patch switch request ACK
- the SeNB release request or the small cell release request may be sent from the source SeNB 2030 to MeNB 202 as well as to the target SeNB 2040.
- the SeNB release ACK or the small cell release ACK may be sent from the MeNB 202 and the target SeNB 2040 to the source SeNB 2030.
- Figure 28 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the target SeNB 2040 of the wireless communication system 200 to switch the SeNB resources or the small cell by switching the bearer from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040, based on the X2 approach.
- the method of Figure 28 may be similar as that of Figure 27.
- blocks 2801 to 2803 and blocks 2804-2805 may be similar as blocks 2701 to 2703, and blocks 2707 to 2708.
- the source SeNB 2030 may communicate the packet data with the core network system 204 through the MeNB 202.
- the transmissions of the packet data between the target SeNB 2040 and the core network system 204 over the EPS bearer may still need to go through the MeNB 202.
- the SeNB release request or the small cell release request may be sent from the source SeNB 2030 to MeNB 202 as well as to the target SeNB 2040, and the SeNB release ACK or the small cell release ACK may be sent from the MeNB 202 and the target SeNB 2040 to the source SeNB 2030.
- FIG. 29 schematically illustrates an example system 2900 in accordance with various embodiments.
- the system 2900 may comprise one or more processor(s) 2904, system control logic 2908 coupled with at least one of the processor(s) 2904, system memory 2912 coupled with system control logic 2908, non- volatile memory (NVM)/storage 2916 coupled with system control logic 2908, and a network interface 2920 coupled with system control logic 2908.
- processor(s) 2904 system control logic 2908 coupled with at least one of the processor(s) 2904
- system memory 2912 coupled with system control logic 2908
- NVM non- volatile memory
- Storage 2916 coupled with system control logic 2908
- a network interface 2920 coupled with system control logic 2908.
- Processor(s) 2904 may include one or more single-core or multi-core processors.
- Processor(s) 2904 may include any combination of general-purpose processors and dedicated processors (e.g., graphics processors, application processors, baseband processors, etc.).
- processors(s) 2904 may be configured to execute one or more embodiment(s) as illustrated in Figures 2-4, 6-8, 13-15, or 20-22 in accordance with various embodiments.
- processor(s) 2904 may be configured to execute one or more embodiment(s) as illustrated in Figures 2-3, 5-7, 9-10, 13-14, 16-17, 20-21, or 23-24 in accordance with various embodiments.
- processor(s) 2904 may be configured to execute one or more embodiment(s) as illustrated in Figures 2, 6-7, 11-14, orl8-19 in accordance with various embodiments.
- processor(s) 2904 may be configured to execute one or more embodiment(s) as illustrated in Figures 2, 20-21 or 25-26 in accordance with various embodiments.
- processor(s) 2904 may be configured to execute one or more embodiment(s) as illustrated in Figures 2, 20-21 or 27-28 in accordance with various embodiments.
- System control logic 2908 may include any suitable interface controllers to provide for any suitable interface to at least one of the processor(s) 2904 and/or to any suitable device or component in communication with system control logic 2908.
- System control logic 2908 for one embodiment may include one or more memory controller(s) to provide an interface to system memory 2912.
- System memory 2912 may be used to load and store data and/or instructions, for example, for system 2900.
- System memory 2912 for one embodiment may include any suitable volatile memory, such as suitable dynamic random access memory
- NVM/storage 2916 may include one or more tangible, non-transitory computer-readable media used to store data and/or instructions, for example.
- NVM/storage 2916 may include any suitable non-volatile memory, such as flash memory, for example, and/or may include any suitable non-volatile storage device(s), such as one or more hard disk drive(s) (HDD(s)), one or more compact disk (CD) drive(s), and/or one or more digital versatile disk (DVD) drive(s), for example.
- suitable non-volatile storage device(s) such as one or more hard disk drive(s) (HDD(s)), one or more compact disk (CD) drive(s), and/or one or more digital versatile disk (DVD) drive(s), for example.
- the NVM/storage 2916 may include a storage resource physically part of a device on which the system 2900 is installed or it may be accessible by, but not necessarily a part of, the device.
- the NVM/storage 2916 may be accessed over a network via the network interface 2920.
- System memory 2912 and NVM/storage 2916 may respectively include, in particular, temporal and persistent copies of instructions 2924.
- Instructions 2924 may include instructions that when executed by at least one of the processor(s) 2904 result in the system 2900 implementing one or more of method(s) as described with reference to Figs. 4-5, 8-12, 15-19, and 22-28.
- instructions 2924, or hardware, firmware, and/or software components thereof may
- Network interface 2920 may have a transceiver (e.g., the communication module 211, 212 or 213 in Figure 2, and the communication module 2031 or 2041 in Figures 20-21) to provide a radio interface for system 2900 to communicate over one or more network(s) and/or with any other suitable device.
- the communication module 211, 212 or 213 may be integrated with other components of system 2900.
- the communication module 211, 212, 213, 2031 or 2041 may include a processor of the processor(s) 2904, memory of the system memory 2912, NVM/Storage of NVM/Storage 2916, and/or a firmware device (not being illustrated) having instructions that when executed by at least one of the processor(s) 2904 result in the system 2900 implementing one or more of method(s) as described with reference to Figs. 4-5, 8-12, 15-19, and 22-28.
- Network interface 2920 may include any suitable hardware and/or firmware.
- Network interface 2920 may include a plurality of antennas to provide a multiple input, multiple output radio interface.
- Network interface 2920 for one embodiment may include, for example, a network adapter, a wireless network adapter, a telephone modem, and/or a wireless modem.
- At least one of the processor(s) 2904 may be packaged together with logic for one or more controller(s) of system control logic 2908.
- at least one of the processor(s) 2904 may be packaged together with logic for one or more controllers of system control logic 2908 to form a System in Package (SiP).
- SiP System in Package
- at least one of the processor(s) 2904 may be integrated on the same die with logic for one or more controller(s) of system control logic 2908.
- at least one of the processor(s) 2904 may be integrated on the same die with logic for one or more controller(s) of system control logic 2908 to form a System on Chip (SoC).
- SoC System on Chip
- the system 2900 may further include input/output (I/O) devices 2932.
- the I/O devices 2932 may include user interfaces designed to enable user interaction with the system 2900, peripheral component interfaces designed to enable peripheral component interaction with the system 2900, and/or sensors designed to determine environmental conditions and/or location information related to the system 2900.
- the user interfaces could include, but are not limited to, a display (e.g., a liquid crystal display, a touch screen display, etc.), a speaker, a microphone, one or more cameras (e.g., a still camera and/or a video camera), a flashlight (e.g., a light emitting diode flash), and a keyboard.
- the peripheral component interfaces may include, but are not limited to, a non- volatile memory port, an audio jack, and a power supply interface.
- the sensors may include, but are not limited to, a gyro sensor, an accelerometer, a proximity sensor, an ambient light sensor, and a positioning unit.
- the positioning unit may also be part of, or interact with, the network interface 2920 to communicate with components of a positioning network, e.g., a global positioning system (GPS) satellite.
- GPS global positioning system
- the system 2900 may be a mobile computing device such as, but not limited to, a laptop computing device, a tablet computing device, a netbook, a mobile phone, etc.
- the system 2900 may be an eNB, such as, but not limited to, a master eNB, a secondary eNB, etc.
- system 2900 may have more or less components, and/or different architectures.
- the disclosure may include various example embodiments disclosed below.
- a method, apparatus or system to be employed by a user equipment may comprise a communication module to communicate with a core network on a first bearer through a first evolved Node B (eNB), receive, from the first eNB, a first message of reconfiguring a radio resource control (RRC) connection to establish a second bearer between the UE and the core network through a second eNB; synchronize, in response to the message, with the second eNB in order to establish the second bearer; and communicate with the core network on the second bearer, and continue communicating other with the core network on the first bearer.
- eNB evolved Node B
- RRC radio resource control
- the first eNB according to the example embodiment 1 may be a master eNB (MeNB).
- MeNB master eNB
- the second eNB according to any of the example embodiments 1-2 may be a secondary eNB (SeNB).
- the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 1-3 may further transmit, to the first eNB, a second message informing that the RRC connection reconfiguration has been completed.
- the first message according to any of the example embodiments 1-4 may comprise bearer context information related to the second bearer and eNB information related to the second eNB information.
- the first message according to any of the example embodiments 1-5 may comprise a new cell-radio network temporary identifier (C- RNTI), security algorithm identifiers, dedicated RACH preamble for a second cell associated to the second eNB, and/or others.
- C- RNTI new cell-radio network temporary identifier
- security algorithm identifiers dedicated RACH preamble for a second cell associated to the second eNB, and/or others.
- a method, apparatus or system to be employed by a first evolved Node B may comprise a communication module to communicate with a user equipment (UE) and a core network on a first bearer through the first eNB; receive, from the UE or the core network, a first request of establishing a second bearer between the UE and the core network; transmit, to a second eNB, a second request of adding the second eNB for the second bearer; and receive, from the second eNB, a response to the second request to acknowledge that the second eNB can be added for the second bearer.
- UE user equipment
- the first eNB according to the example embodiment 7 may be a master eNB (MeNB).
- MeNB master eNB
- the second eNB according to any of the example embodiments 7-8 may be a secondary eNB (SeNB).
- SeNB secondary eNB
- the second request according to any of the example embodiments 7-9 may be a SeNB addition request comprising a cause for the SeNB addition, a list of bearers to be setup, UE security capabilities, security context, and/or others.
- the response according to any of the example embodiments 7-10 may be a SeNB addition acknowledgment message comprising a list of admitted bearers, a list of not admitted bearers, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB addition, and/or others.
- the communication module may further transmit, to or from the UE, a message of reconfiguring a radio resource control (RRC) connection to establish the second bearer, wherein the message includes bearer context information related to the second bearer and eNB information related to the second eNB.
- RRC radio resource control
- the message according to any of the example embodiments 7-12 may comprise a new cell-radio network temporary identifier (C- RNTI), security algorithm identifiers, dedicated random access channel (RACH) preamble for a second cell associated with the second eNB, and/or others.
- C- RNTI new cell-radio network temporary identifier
- RACH dedicated random access channel
- the communication module may further receive, from the UE, another message informing that the RRC connection reconfiguration has been completed; and transmit, to the core network, another response to the first request to inform that the second bearer has been redirected to the second eNB.
- the first eNB may continue communicating with the UE and the core network on the first bearer through the first cell, while the UE further communicates with the core network on the second bearer through the second eNB.
- a method, apparatus or system to be employed by a first evolved Node B may comprise a communication module to receive, from a second eNB for a second cell, a request of adding the first eNB for a first bearer to be established between a user equipment (UE) and a core network; transmit, to the second eNB, a response to the first request to acknowledge that the first eNB can be added for the first bearer; synchronize with the UE in order to establish the first bearer; and communicate with the UE and the core network on the first bearer through the first eNB, wherein, the UE communicates with the core network on a second bearer through the second eNB.
- UE user equipment
- the first eNB according to the example embodiment 16 may be a secondary eNB (SeNB).
- SeNB secondary eNB
- the second eNB according to any of the example embodiments 16-17 may be a macro eNB (MeNB).
- MeNB macro eNB
- the first request according to any of the example embodiments 16-18 may be a SeNB addition request comprising a cause for the SeNB addition, a list of bearers to be setup, UE security capabilities, security context, and/or others.
- the response according to any of the example embodiments 16-19 may be a SeNB addition acknowledgement message comprising a list of admitted bearers, a list of not admitted bearers, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for SeNB addition, and/or others.
- a method, apparatus or system to be employed by a user equipment may comprise a communication module to communicate with a core network on one or more data bearers through a first evolved Node B (eNB); receive, from the first eNB, a message of reconfiguring a radio resource control (RRC) connection to switch at least one of the one or more data bearers from the first eNB to a second eNB; synchronize with the second eNB, in response to the message; and communicate with the core network on the at least one of the data bearers through the second eNB, while communicating with the first eNB on a signaling bearer through the first eNB.
- RRC radio resource control
- the first eNB according to the example embodiment 21 may be a master eNB (MeNB).
- MeNB master eNB
- the second eNB according to any of the example embodiments 21-22 may be a secondary eNB (SeNB).
- SeNB secondary eNB
- the message according to any of the example embodiments 21-23 may be a RRCconnectionreconfiguration message comprising a new cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI), second eNB security algorithm identifiers and optionally dedicated random access channel (RACH) preamble, second eNB system information blocks, and/or others.
- C-RNTI cell-radio network temporary identifier
- RACH random access channel
- the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 21-24 may further continue communicating with the core network on a remaining data bearer of the data bearers which hasn't been switched from the first eNB to the second eNB.
- the communication module may further transmit, to the first eNB or the second eNB, another message informing that the RRC connection reconfiguration has been completed.
- a method, apparatus or system to be employed by a first evolved Node B (eNB) may comprise a communication module to communicate with a user equipment (UE) and a core network on one or more data bearers through the first eNB; transmit, to a second eNB, a first request of adding a second SeNB by switching at least one of the data bears from the first eNB to the second eNB; receive, from the second eNB, a first message to acknowledge that the second eNB can be added; transmit, to the UE, a second message of reconfiguring a radio resource control (RRC) connection to switch the at least one data bearer; and communicate with the UE on a signaling bearer through the first eNB, while the UE communicates with the core network on the at least one data bearer through the second
- RRC radio resource control
- the first eNB according to the example embodiment 27 may be a master eNB (MeNB).
- MeNB master eNB
- the second eNB according to any of the example embodiments 27-28 may be a secondary eNB (SeNB).
- SeNB secondary eNB
- the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 27-29 may further continue communicating with the UE and the core network on a remaining data bear of the data bears which hasn't been switched from the first eNB to the second eNB.
- the communication module may further receive, from the UE, a third message informing that the RRC connection reconfiguration has been completed.
- the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 27-31 may further transmit, to the second eNB, a fourth message informing that the second SeNB has been added.
- the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 27-32 may further transmit, to the core network, a second request of switching a downlink path of an evolved packet system (EPS) bearer from between the first eNB and the core network to between the second eNB and the core network, wherein a data bearer of the EPS bearer has been switched from the first eNB to the second eNB.
- the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 27-33 may further transmit, to the core network, an indication to keep at least one EPB bearer not listed in the second request unreleased.
- EPS evolved packet system
- the first request according to any of the example embodiments 27-34 may be a SeNB addition request comprising cause for a list of bearers to be setup, UE security capabilities, security context, and/or others.
- the first message according to any of the example embodiments 27-35 may be a SeNB addition acknowledgement message comprising a list of admitted bearers, a list of not admitted bearers, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB addition, and/or others.
- the communication module may further receive, from the UE, a measurement report about UE connection mobility; and determine, based on the measurement report, to add the second SeNB.
- a method, apparatus or system to be employed by a first evolved Node B may comprise a communication module to receive, from a second eNB, a first request of adding the first eNB by switching at least one of one or more data bearers from the second eNB to the first eNB, wherein a user equipment (UE) communicated with a core network on the data bears through the second eNB; transmit, to the second eNB, a first message to acknowledge that the first eNB can be added; synchronize with the UE in order to establishing the at least one data bearer between the UE and the second eNB; communicate with the UE and the core network on the at least one data bearer through the first eNB, while the UE communicates with the second eNB on a signalling bearer through second eNB.
- UE user equipment
- the first eNB according to the example embodiment 38 may be a secondary eNB (MeNB).
- MeNB secondary eNB
- the second eNB according to any of the example embodiments 38-39 may be a master eNB (SeNB).
- the UE according to any of the example embodiments 38-40 may continue communicating with the core network on a remaining data bear of the data bearers which hasn't been switched from the second eNB to the first eNB.
- the communication module may further transmit, to the core network, a second request of switching a downlink data path of the at least one data bearer from between the second eNB and the core network to between the first eNB and the core network; receive, from the core network, a second message to acknowledge that the downlink data path of the at least one data bearer has been switched.
- the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 38-42 may further transmit, to the core network, an indication of keeping a remaining data bearer of the data bearers, which hasn't been switched from the second eNB to the first eNB, unreleased.
- the first request according to any of the example embodiments 38-43 may be a SeNB addition request comprising cause for a list of bearers to be setup, UE security capabilities, security context, and/or others.
- the first message according to any of the example embodiments 38-44 may be a SeNB addition acknowledgement message comprising a list of admitted bearers, a list of not admitted bearers, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB addition, and/or others.
- a method, apparatus, or system to be employed by a user equipment may comprise a communication module to communicate with a first evolved Node B (eNB) on a first bearer through the first eNB;
- eNB evolved Node B
- RRC radio resource control
- the first eNB according to the example embodiment 46 may be a secondary eNB (MeNB).
- MeNB secondary eNB
- the second eNB according to any of the example embodiments 46-47 may be a master eNB (SeNB).
- the first message according to any of the example embodiments 46-48 may be a RRCconnectionreconfiguration message comprising a SeNB release information to inform the UE that the second SeNB is going to be released.
- the communication module may further transmit, to the second eNB, a second message informing that the RRC connection reconfiguration is completed.
- a method, apparatus or system to be employed by a first evolved node B may comprise a communication module to communicate with a user equipment (UE) on a first bearer through the first eNB, while the UE communicates with a second eNB on a second bearer through the second eNB; transmit or receive, to or from a second eNB, a first request of releasing the second eNB; receive or transmit, from or to the second eNB, a first message to acknowledge that the second eNB can be released; and transmit, to the UE, a second message of reconfiguring a radio resource control (RRC) connection to switch the second bearer from the second eNB to the first eNB.
- RRC radio resource control
- the first eNB according to the example embodiment 51 may be a macro eNB (MeNB).
- MeNB macro eNB
- the second eNB according to any of the example embodiments 51-52 may be a secondary eNB (SeNB).
- the first request according to any of the example embodiments 51-53 may be a SeNB release request including at least one of a cause for the SeNB release, a list of bearers to be switched, a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) in a second cell associated with the second eNB, UE security capabilities, security context, and/or others.
- a SeNB release request including at least one of a cause for the SeNB release, a list of bearers to be switched, a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) in a second cell associated with the second eNB, UE security capabilities, security context, and/or others.
- C-RNTI UE cell-radio network temporary identifier
- the first message according to any of the example embodiments 51-54 may be a SeNB release acknowledgment message including at least one of a UE cell -radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI), a cause for the SeNB release, a list of admitted bearers, a list of not admitted bearers, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the cell release, and/or others.
- the first bearer according to any of the example embodiments 51-55 may be a signalling bearer and/or a data bearer, and the second bearer is a data bearer.
- the communication module may further receive, from the UE, a third message informing that the RRC connection reconfiguration is completed; and transmit, to the second eNB, a fourth message informing that the second bearer has been released.
- the communication module may further transmit, to a core network, a second request of switching a downlink path of the second bearer from between the second eNB and the core network to between the first eNB and the core network, wherein the second request further indicates not to release a bearer associated with the UE and not listed in the second request.
- the communication module may further receive, from the core network, a fifth message to acknowledge that the downlink data path of the second bearer is switched.
- a method, apparatus or system to be employed by a first evolved Node B may comprise a communication module to communicate with a user equipment (UE) on a first bearer through the first eNB, wherein the UE further communicates on a second bearer through a second eNB ; receive or transmit, from or to a second eNB, a first request of releasing the first SeNB by switching the first bearer from the first eNB to the second eNB; transmit or receive, to or from the second eNB, a first message to acknowledge that the first SeNB can be released in response to a determination that the first request is acceptable; and detach from the UE in order to release the first bearer.
- UE user equipment
- the first eNB according to the example embodiment 60 may be a secondary eNB (MeNB).
- MeNB secondary eNB
- the second eNB according to any of the example embodiments 60-61 may be a master eNB (SeNB).
- the first request according to any of the example embodiments 60-62 may be a SeNB release request including at least one of a cause for the SeNB release or the small cell release, a list of bearers to be switched, a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) in a second cell associated with the second eNB, UE security capabilities, security context, and/or others.
- C-RNTI UE cell-radio network temporary identifier
- the first message according to any of the example embodiments 60-62 may be a SeNB release acknowledgment message including at least one of a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI), a cause for the SeNB release, a list of admitted bearers, a list of not admitted bearers, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB release, and/or others.
- C-RNTI UE cell-radio network temporary identifier
- the communication module may further transmit, to a core network, a second request of switching a downlink path of the first bearer from between the first eNB and the core network to between the second eNB and the core network, wherein the second request further indicates not to release a bearer associated with the UE and not listed in the second request.
- the communication module may further receive, from the core network, a second message to acknowledge that the downlink data path of the first bearer is switched.
- a method, apparatus, or system to be employed by a user equipment may comprise a communication module to communicate with a first evolved Node B (eNB) on a first bearer through a first eNB;
- eNB evolved Node B
- RRC radio resource control
- the first eNB according to the example embodiments 66 may be a master eNB (MeNB).
- the second eNB according to any of the example embodiments 66-67 may be a source secondary eNB (SeNB).
- the third eNB according to any of the example embodiments 66-68 may be a target secondary eNB (SeNB).
- SeNB target secondary eNB
- the first message according to any of the example embodiments 66-69 may be a RRCconnectionreconfiguration message comprising at least one of second eNB information, third eNB information and others.
- the communication module may further transmit, to the first eNB or the third eNB, a second message informing that the RRC connection reconfiguration is completed.
- the first bearer according to any of the example embodiments 66-71 may be a data bearer and/or a signalling bearer, and the second bearer is another data bearer.
- a method, apparatus or system to be employed by a first evolved Node B may comprise a communication module to communicate with a user equipment (UE) on a first bearer through the first eNB, wherein the UE further communicates with a second eNB on a second bearer through the second eNB; transmit or receive, to or from a second eNB, a first request of switching the second eNB by switching the second bearer from the second eNB to a third eNB; and receive or transmit, from or to the second eNB, a first message to acknowledge that the second eNB can be switched.
- UE user equipment
- the first eNB according to the example embodiment 73 may be a master eNB (MeNB).
- MeNB master eNB
- the second eNB according to any of the example embodiments 73-74 may be a source secondary eNB (SeNB).
- SeNB source secondary eNB
- the third eNB may be a target secondary eNB (SeNB).
- SeNB target secondary eNB
- the first request according to any of the example embodiments 73-76 may be a SeNB switch request including at least one of a TYPE field indicating whether an eNB receiving the first request adds the second bearer or release the second bearer, a cause for the SeNB switch, a list of bearers to be setup or released, a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C- RNTI) in a second cell associated with the second eNB or a third cell associated with the third eNB, UE security capabilities, security context, and/or others.
- a SeNB switch request including at least one of a TYPE field indicating whether an eNB receiving the first request adds the second bearer or release the second bearer, a cause for the SeNB switch, a list of bearers to be setup or released, a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C- RNTI) in a second cell associated with the second eNB or a third cell associated with the third eNB, UE security capabilities, security context,
- the first message according to any of the example embodiments 73-77 may be a SeNB switch request acknowledgement message comprising at least one of cell-radio network temporary identifier (C- RNTI), a cause for the SeNB switch, a list of admitted bearers, a list of not admitted bearers, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB switch, and/or others.
- C- RNTI cell-radio network temporary identifier
- the communication module may further transmit, to the third eNB, a second request of switching the second eNB by switching the second bearer from the second cell to the third cell; and receive, from the third eNB, a second message to acknowledge that the second eNB can be switched.
- the second request according to any of the example embodiments 73-79 may be a SeNB switch request comprising at least one of a TYPE field indicating whether an eNB receiving the message adds the second bearer or release the second bearer, a cause for the small cell switch, a list of bearers to be setup or released, a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) in a second cell associated with the second eNB or a third cell associated with the third eNB, UE security capabilities, security context, and/or others.
- C-RNTI UE cell-radio network temporary identifier
- the second message according to any of the example embodiments 73-80 may be a SeNB switch acknowledgement message comprising at least one of a cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI), a cause for the SeNB switch, a list of admitted bearers, a list of unadmitted bearers, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for SeNB switch, and/or others.
- C-RNTI cell-radio network temporary identifier
- the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 73-81 may further transmit, to the UE, a third message of reconfiguring a radio resource control (RRC) connection by switching the second bearer from the second eNB to the third eNB.
- RRC radio resource control
- the third message according to any of the example embodiments 73-82 may be a RRCconnectionreconfiguration message comprising at least one of second Enb information, third eNB information and/or others.
- the communication module may further receive, from the UE, a fourth message informing that the RRC connection reconfiguration is completed; and transmit, to the second eNB and/or the third eNB, a fifth message informing that the second eNB switch is completed.
- the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 73-84 may further transmit, to the second eNB, a third request of transferring a sequence number (SN) status from the second eNB to the third eNB.
- SN sequence number
- the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 73-85 may further transmit, to a core network, a fourth request of switching a downlink path of the second bearer from between the second eNB and the core network to between the third eNB and the core network.
- the fourth request according to any of the example embodiments 73-86 may further indicate not to release a bearer associated with the UE and not listed in the second request.
- the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 73-87 may further continue communicating with the UE on the first bearer through the first eNB, while the UE further communicates with the third eNB on the second bearer through the second eNB.
- a method, apparatus or sytem to be employed by a first evolved Node B may comprise a communication module to communicate with a user equipment on a first bearer through the first eNB, wherein the UE further communicates with a second eNB on a second bearer through the second eNB; receive or transmit, from or to the second eNB, a first request of switching the first eNB by switching the first bearer from the first eNB to a third eNB; and transmit or receive, to or from the second eNB, a first message to acknowledge that the first eNB can be switched.
- the first eNB according to the example embodiments 89 may be a source secondary eNB (SeNB).
- the second eNB according to any of the example embodiments 89-90 may be a master eNB (MeNB).
- MeNB master eNB
- the third eNB according to any of the example embodiments 89-91 may be a target secondary eNB (SeNB).
- SeNB target secondary eNB
- the first request according to any of the example embodiments 89-92 may be a SeNB switch request comprising at least one of a TYPE field indicating whether an eNB receiving the message adds the first bearer or release the first bearer, a cause for the SeNB switch, a list of bearers to be setup or released, a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) in a first cell associated with the first eNB or a third cell associate with the third eNB, UE security capabilities, security context, and/or others.
- C-RNTI UE cell-radio network temporary identifier
- the first message according to any of the example embodiments 89-93 may be a SeNB switch request acknowledgement message comprising at least one of cell-radio network temporary identifier (C- RNTI), a cause for the SeNB switch, a list of admitted bearers, a list of not admitted bearers, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB switch, and/or others.
- C- RNTI cell-radio network temporary identifier
- the communication module may further receive, from the second eNB, a second message of transferring a sequence number (SN) status from the first eNB to the third eNB; and forward, in response to the second message, a buffered and in transit data to the third eNB.
- SN sequence number
- the communication module may further transmit, to a core network, a third request of switching a downlink path of the first bearer from between the first eNB and the core network to between the third eNB and the core network.
- the third request according to any of the example embodiments 89-96 may further indicate not to release a bearer associated with the UE and not listed in the third request.
- a method, apparatus or system to be employed by a first evolved Node B (eNB) may comprise a communication module to communicate with a user equipment on a first bearer through the first eNB, wherein the UE further communicates with a second eNB on a second bearer through the second eNB; transmit, to a third eNB, a first request of switching the first eNB by switching the first bearer from the first eNB to the third eNB ; and receive, from the third eNB, a first message to acknowledge that the first eNB can be switched.
- the first eNB according to the example embodiments 98 may be a source secondary eNB (SeNB).
- SeNB source secondary eNB
- the second eNB may be a master eNB (MeNB).
- MeNB master eNB
- the third eNB may be a target secondary eNB (SeNB).
- SeNB target secondary eNB
- the first request according to any of the example embodiments 98-101 may be a SeNB switch request comprising at least one of a TYPE field indicating whether an eNB receiving the message adds the first bearer or release the first bearer, a cause for the SeNB switch, a list of bearers to be setup or released, a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) in a first cell associated with the first eNB or a third cell associated with the third eNB, UE security capabilities, security context, and/or others.
- C-RNTI UE cell-radio network temporary identifier
- the first message according to any of the example embodiments 98-102 may be a SeNB switch request acknowledgement message comprising at least one of cell-radio network temporary identifier (C- RNTI), a cause for the SeNB switch, a list of admitted bearers, a list of not admitted bearers, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB switch, and/or others.
- C- RNTI cell-radio network temporary identifier
- the communication module may further transmit, to the second eNB, a second request of switching the first eNB by switching the first bearer from the first eNB to the third eNB; and receive, from the second eNB, a second message to acknowledge that the first eNB can be switched.
- the second request according to any of the example embodiments 98-104 may be a SeNB switch request comprising at least one of a TYPE field indicating whether an eNB receiving the message adds the first bearer or release the first bearer, a cause for the SeNB switch, a list of bearers to be setup or released, a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) in the second cell or the third cell, UE security capabilities, security context, and/or others.
- a SeNB switch request comprising at least one of a TYPE field indicating whether an eNB receiving the message adds the first bearer or release the first bearer, a cause for the SeNB switch, a list of bearers to be setup or released, a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) in the second cell or the third cell, UE security capabilities, security context, and/or others.
- C-RNTI UE cell-radio network temporary identifier
- the second message according to any of the example embodiments 98-105 may be a small cell switch request acknowledgement message comprising at least one of cell-radio network temporary identifier (C- RNTI), a cause for the cell switch, a list of admitted bearers, a list of not admitted bearers, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the small cell switch, and/or others.
- C- RNTI cell-radio network temporary identifier
- the communication module may further receive, from the second eNB, a third mesage of transferring a sequence number (SN) status from the first eNB to the third eNB; and forward, in response to the third message, a buffered and in transit data to the third eNB.
- SN sequence number
- the communication module may further transmit, to a core network, a third request of switching a downlink path of the first bearer from between the first eNB and the core network to between the third eNB and the core network.
- the third request according to any of the example embodiments 98-108 may further indicate not to release a bearer associated with the UE and not listed in the third request.
- a method, apparatus or system to be employed by a first eNB may comprise a communication module to receive, from a second eNB or a third eNB, a first request of switching a third eNB by switching a first bearer from the third eNB to the first eNB, wherein a user equipment (UE) communicates with the third eNB on the first bearer through the third eNB and communicates with the second eNB on a second bearer through the second eNB; transmit, to the second eNB or the third eNB, a first message to acknowledge that the third eNB can be switched; synchronize with the user equipment (UE) to establish the first bearer through the first eNB; and communicate with the UE on the first bearer through the first eNB.
- UE user equipment
- the first eNB according to the example embodiment 110 may be a target secondary eNB (SeNB).
- SeNB target secondary eNB
- the second eNB may be a master eNB (MeNB).
- MeNB master eNB
- the third eNB may be a source secondary eNB (SeNB).
- SeNB source secondary eNB
- the first request according to any of the example embodiments 110-113 may be a SeNB switch request comprising at least one of a TYPE field indicating whether an eNB receiving the message adds the first bearer or release the first bearer, a cause for the SeNB switch, a list of bearers to be setup or released, a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) in a first cell associated with the first eNB or a third cell associated with the third eNB, UE security capabilities, security context, and/or others.
- C-RNTI UE cell-radio network temporary identifier
- the first message according to any of the example embodiments 110-114 may be a SeNB switch request acknowledgement message comprising at least one of cell-radio network temporary identifier (C- RNTI), a cause for the SeNB switch, a list of admitted bearers, a list of not admitted bearers, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB switch, and/or others.
- C- RNTI cell-radio network temporary identifier
- the communication module may further transmit, to a core network, a second request of switching a downlink path of the first bearer from between the third eNB and the core network to between the first eNB and the core network.
- the third request according to any of the example embodiments 110-116 may furtherindicate not to release a bearer associated with the UE and not listed in the second request.
Abstract
Embodiments of the present disclosure describe methods, apparatuses, and systems for managing bearers in a wireless communication system. In some embodiments, an apparatus, to be employed by a user equipment (UE), may comprise a communication module to: communicate with a core network on a first bearer through a master evolved Node B (MeNB); receive, from the MeNB, a first message of reconfiguring a radio resource control (RRC) connection to establish a second bearer between the UE and the core network and through a secondary eNB (SeNB); synchronize, in response to the message, with the SeNB in order to establish the second bearer; and communicate with the core network on the second bearer through the SeNB, and continue communicating with the core network on the first bearer through the MeNB.
Description
METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING BEARERS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
Cross Reference to Related Applications
The present application claims priority to U.S. Provisional Patent
Application No. 61/753,914, filed January 17, 2013, the entire disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference.
Field
Embodiments of the present disclosure generally relate to the field of wireless communication systems, and more particularly, to bearer management in the wireless communication systems.
Background
With explosion of mobile broadband data, advent of a small cell, also known as a pico cell, may help to increase service coverage and/or mobile network capacities. The small cell may provide radio coverage from several meters to several kilometers. However, coexistence of macro cells and small cells in the network and frequent handovers between the macro cell and the small cell when a user equipment (UE) moves into or out of the small cell, may create a big challenge to current wireless standard technologies, such as 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) Long Term Evolution (LTE) project.
Brief Description of the Drawings
Embodiments will be readily understood by the following detailed description in conjunction with the accompanying drawings. To facilitate this description, like reference numerals designate like structural elements.
Embodiments are illustrated by way of example and not by way of limitation in the figures of the accompanying drawings.
Figure 1 illustrates an embodiment of a wireless communication network having coverage from a number of macro cells and small cells.
Figure 2 illustrates an embodiment of a wireless communication system that may operate in compliance with the 3GPP LTE project along with any amendments, updates and/or revisions.
Figure 3 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure for the wireless communication system to add a new bearer through a secondary evolved Node B (SeNB) of the wireless communication system.
Figure 4 illustrates an embodiment of a method for a user equipment (UE) of the wireless communication system to add the new bearer.
Figure 5 illustrates an embodiment of a method for a master evolved Node B (MeNB) of the wireless communication system to add the new bearer.
Figure 6 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure to switch a bearer from the MeNB to the SeNB of the wireless communication system, based on a S 1 approach.
Figure 7 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure to switch the bearer from the MeNB to the SeNB of the wireless communication system, based on an X2 approach.
Figure 8 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the UE of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the MeNB to the SeNB.
Figure 9 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the MeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the MeNB to the SeNB, based on the S 1 approach.
Figure 10 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the MeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the MeNB to the SeNB, based on the X2 approach.
Figure 11 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the SeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the MeNB to the SeNB based on the S 1 approach.
Figure 12 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the SeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the MeNB to the SeNB based on the X2 approach.
Figure 13 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure for the wireless communication system to switch a bearer from the SeNB to the MeNB, based on the S 1 approach.
Figure 14 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure for the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the SeNB to the MeNB, based on the X2 approach.
Figure 15 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the UE of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the SeNB to the MeNB.
Figure 16 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the MeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the SeNB to the MeNB, based on the S 1 approach.
Figure 17 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the MeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the SeNB to the MeNB, based on the X2 approach.
Figure 18 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the SeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the SeNB to the MeNB, based on the S 1 approach.
Figure 19 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the SeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the SeNB to the MeNB, based on the X2 approach.
Figure 20 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure for the wireless communication system to switch a bearer from a source SeNB to a target SeNB, based on the SI approach.
Figure 21 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure for the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the source SeNB to the target SeNB, based on the X2 approach.
Figure 22 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the UE of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the source SeNB to the target SeNB.
Figure 23 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the MeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the source SeNB to the target SeNB, based on the SI approach.
Figure 24 illustrates an embodiment of the method for the MeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the source SeNB to the target SeNB, based on the X2 approach.
Figure 25 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the source SeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the source SeNB to the target SeNB, based on the SI approach.
Figure 26 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the source SeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the source SeNB to the target SeNB, based on the X2 approach.
Figure 27 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the target SeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the source SeNB to the target SeNB, based on the SI approach.
Figure 28 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the target SeNB of the wireless communication system to switch the bearer from the source SeNB to the target SeNB, based on the X2 approach.
Figure 29 illustrates an embodiment of an example system.
Detailed Description
In the following detailed description, reference is made to the accompanying drawings which form a part hereof, wherein like numerals designate like parts throughout, and in which is shown by way of illustration embodiments in which the subject matter of the present disclosure may be practiced. It is to be understood that other embodiments may be utilized and structural or logical changes may be made without departing from the scope of the present disclosure. Therefore, the following detailed description is not to be taken in a limiting sense, and the scope of embodiments is defined by the appended claims and their equivalents.
Various operations are described as multiple discrete operations in turn, in a manner that is most helpful in understanding the claimed subject matter. However, the order of description should not be construed as to imply that these operations are necessarily order dependent. In particular, these operations may not be performed in the order of presentation. Operations described may be performed in a different
order than the described embodiment. Various additional operations may be performed and/or described operations may be omitted in additional embodiments.
For the purposes of the present disclosure, the phrase "A/B" means "A or B". The phrase "A and/or B" means "(A), (B), or (A and B)". The phrase "at least one of A, B and C" means "(A), (B), (C), (A and B), (A and C), (B and C) or (A, B and O". The phrase "(A) B" means "(B) or (A B)", that is, A is optional.
The description may use the phrases "in an embodiment," or "in
embodiments," which may each refer to one or more of the same or different embodiments. Furthermore, the terms "comprising," "including," "having," and the like, as used with respect to embodiments of the present disclosure, are
synonymous.
As used herein, the term "module" may refer to, be part of, or include an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), an electronic circuit, a processor (shared, dedicated, or group) and/or memory (shared, dedicated, or group) that execute one or more software or firmware programs, a combinational logic circuit, and/or other suitable components that provide the described functionality.
Although specific embodiments have been illustrated and described herein, it will be appreciated by those of ordinary skill in the art that a wide variety of alternate and/or equivalent implementations may be substituted for the specific embodiments shown and described, without departing from the scope of the embodiments of the present disclosure. This application is intended to cover any adaptations or variations of the embodiments discussed herein. Therefore, it is manifestly intended that the embodiments of the present disclosure be limited only by the claims and the equivalents thereof.
Figure 1 illustrates an embodiment of a wireless communication network 100 that may operate in compliance with Long Term Evolution (LTE) standards of 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP). The wireless communication network 100 may have coverage from a number of macro cells and small cells. As illustrated in the Figure 1 , a hexagon cell may represent a macro cell, and an elliptical cell may represent a small cell. In various embodiments, the small cell may be placed inside of the macro cells or on a border of the macro cell. The small cell, also known as the pico cell, may provide radio coverage from several meters to several kilometers. On
the contrary, in some cases, the macro cell may have radio coverage of a few tens of kilometers.
Figure 2 illustrates an embodiment of a wireless communication system 200 that may operate in compliance with the 3 GPP LTE project along with any amendments, updates, and/or revisions (e.g., LTE-Advanced (LTE-A), etc.). The wireless communication system 200 may comprise a user equipment (UE) 201, a master evolved Node B (MeNB) 202 for the macro cell, a secondary evolved Node B (SeNB) 203 for the small cell, and a core network system 204, wherein the UE 201 may be dual-connected with the MeNB 202 and the SeNB 203 according to a S 1 approach or an X2 approach. Other embodiments may implement other modifications and variations on the MeNB 202 and/or the SeNB 203. For example, the MeNB 202 may be designed for another small cell. Similarly, the SeNB 203 may be designed for another macro cell.
The UE 201 may be embodied as, without limitation, a smart phone, a cellular telephone, a tablet, a consumer electronic device, a laptop computer, a notebook computer, a mobile computing system, a processor-based system, and/or any other mobile communication device configured to communicate with the core network system 204 via the MeNB 202 and/or the SeNB 203. The core network system 204 may be embodied as an evolved packet core (EPC) which may comprise, a mobility management entity (MME) 214, a serving gateway (S-GW) 224, a packet data network gateway (PDN GW) 234, and others.
Under the dual connectivity, bearers carrying data flows between the UE 201 and the core network system 204 may split between the MeNB 202 and the SeNB 203, for example, the bearers through the MeNB 202 and the bearers through the SeNB 203. Examples for the bearers may include evolved packet system (EPS) bearers. In some embodiments, the EPS bearer may comprise a bearer between the UE 201 and the MeNB 202 such as a data radio bearer (DRB), a bearer between the MeNB 202 and the S-GW 224 such as a SI bearer, a bearer between S-GW 224 and PDN GW 234 such as S5/S8 bearer, and/or others. In some embodiments, an Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (EUTRAN) radio access bearer (E-RAB) between the UE 201 and the S-GW 224 may identify the concatenation of the corresponding DRB and the S 1 bearer.
According to the SI approach, the MeNB 202 and the SeNB 203 may connect directly with the core network system 204 via a S 1 interface and the bearers for different eNBs may be split at the core network system 204. According to the X2 approach, the SeNB 203 may indirectly connect with the core network system 204, namely, through an X2 interface of the MeNB 202. Therefore, the bearers may be split at the MeNB 202.
As illustrate in Figure 2, in various embodiments, the UE 201 may include a communication module 211, and/or others. The communication module 211 may receive or transmit a signalling/packet from/to the MeNB 202 and/or SeNB 203 in the wireless communication system 200. In some embodiments, the communication module 211 may further generate, process and/or control the signalling/packet and/or other communications from/to the UE 201. Details about functionalities of the communication module 211 may be provided in the following descriptions. The communication module 211 may include several layer implementations, such as a physical layer module 2110, a L2 layer module 2111, a radio resource
communication (RRC) layer module 2112, a non-access stratum (NAS) layer module 2113, and/or others.
In various embodiments, the MeNB 202 may include a communication module 212, and/or others. The communication module 212 may receive or transmit a signalling/packet from/to the UE 201, SeNB 203 and/or core network system 204 in the wireless communication system 200. In some embodiments, the
communication module 212 may further generate, process and/or control the signalling/packet and/or other communications from/to the MeNB 202. Details about functionalities of the communication module 212 may be provided in the following descriptions. The communication module 212 may include several layer implementations, such as a physical layer module 2120, a L2 layer module 2121, a radio resource communication (RRC) layer module 2122, a non-access stratum (NAS) layer module 2123, and/or others.
In various embodiments, the SeNB 203 may include a communication module 213, and/or others. The communication module 213 may receive or transmit a signalling/packet from/to the UE 201, MeNB 202 and/or core network system 204 of the wireless communication system 200. In some embodiments, the
communication module 213 may further generate, process and/or control the signalling/packet and/or other communications from/to the SeNB 203. Details about functionalities of the communication module 213 may be provided in the following descriptions. The communication module 213 may include several layer implementations, such as a physical layer module 2130, a L2 layer module 2131, a radio resource communication (RRC) layer module 2132, a non-access stratum (NAS) layer module 2133, and/or others.
Figure 3 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure for the wireless communication system 200 to add SeNB resources by adding a new bearer through the SeNB 203, such as a new EPS bearer between the UE 201 and the core network system 204 and through the SeNB 203 for the small cell. In various embodiments, the UE 201 may communicate with the core network system 204 via a default bearer (e.g., a default EPS bearer) established through the MeNB 202 for the macro cell. In order to create the new bearer through the SeNB 203, during the signalling procedure as depicted in Figure 3, the UE 201 may transmit a request to the MeNB 202 to request allocation of a new bear resource for a traffic flow aggregation (signalling 301). In some embodiments, the UE 201 may move into the small cell which may trigger a determination of requesting the allocation of the new bearer resource.
The request may be embodied as, without limitation, an uplink information transfer and a non-access stratum (NAS) bearer resource allocation request, and may include a specific quality of service (QoS) demand, a guaranteed bit rate (GBR) requirement for a new traffic flow aggregate and/or other information related to a dedicated EPS bearer context.
In some embodiments, the MeNB 202 may transport the request to the MME 214 (signalling 302), which may then transmit a bearer resource command to the S- GW 224 in response to a determination that the request is acceptable (signalling 303). However, in response to a determination that the request is not acceptable, the MME 214 may reject the request by transmitting a rejection message. In some embodiments, the bearer resource command may be further forwarded to the PDN GW 234 (signalling 304). In response to a determination that the bearer resource command may be acceptable, the PDN GW 234 may transmit a create bearer
request to the S-GW 224 (signalling 305), which may then forward the request to the MME 214 (signalling 306). However, in response to a determination that the bearer resource command may be unacceptable, the PDN GW 234 may transmit a rejection message to the S-GW 224 and then indirectly to the MME 214.
Upon receiving the create bearer request, the MME 214 may initiate a dedicated bearer context activation procedure by transmitting a request to setup the new bearer with dedicated bearer context (signalling 307). The request may be embodied as E-RAB setup request and NAS activate dedicated EPS bearer context request.
Upon receipt of the request from MME 214, the MeNB 202 may select a small cell or a SeNB through which the new bearer can be established. In some embodiments, the MeNB 202 may select the small cell or the SeNB based on a UE measurement report related to a UE communication quality. The MeNB 202 may further transmit a request of adding the small cell or the SeNB by establishing the new bearer through the selected SeNB 203 (signalling 308). The request may be embodied as a SeNB addition request or a small cell addition request (not illustrated in Figure 3) and may include, without limitation, information element (IE) such as cause for the the SeNB addition or the small cell addition, a list of E-RAB s to be setup, characteristics of the new bearer (such as E-RAB parameters, transport network layer (TNL) address information, and/or others), UE security capabilities for SI approach, security context for SI approach, and/or others.
In response to a determination that the request from MeNB 202 is acceptable, such as when the QoS requirement of the new bearer can be satisfied, the SeNB 203 may transmit a message, e.g., a SeNB addition request acknowledgement (ACK) or a small cell addition request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 3), to the MeNB 202 (signalling 309). The SeNB addition request ACK or the small cell addition request ACK may include, without limitation, a list of admitted E-RABs including TNL address information for the respective E-RAB, a list of not admitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the small cell addition or the SeNB addition, and/or others. The transparent container may include, without limitation, a new cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) for identifying the UE 201 by the SeNB 203, secondary eNB security algorithm identifiers for selected security
algorithms, a dedicated random access channel (RACH) preamble, access parameters, system information blocks (SIBs) parameters, and/or others. However, in response to a determination that the request from MeNB 202 is unacceptable, the SeNB 203 may transmit a rejection message to the MeNB 202.
Upon receipt of the acknowledgement message, the MeNB 202 may transmit a request to the UE 201 to request reconfiguring a radio resource control (RRC) connection to establish the new bearer through the SeNB 203 for the small cell (signalling 310). The request may be embodied as, without limitation, a RRC connection reconfiguration (i.e., RRCconnectionreconfiguration) and NAS activate dedicated EPS bearer context request, and may include information such as C- RNTI, security algorithm identifiers, dedicated RACH preamble for the small cell, and/or others. In some embodiments, the C-RNTI may not be needed if the UE 201 is allocated with the same C-RNTI in the macro cell and the small cell, and the security algorithm identifiers may not be needed if X2 approach is used.
Based on the information in the RRCconnectionreconfiguration and NAS activate dedicated EPS bearer request, the UE 201 may perform uplink and downlink synchronization with the SeNB 203 in order to reconfigure the RRC connection to establish the new bearer with the dedicated EPS bearer context (signalling 311). For example, the UE 201 may perform the synchronization to the SeNB 203 and access the small cell via RACH, following a contention-free or contention-based procedure depending on whether a dedicated preamble was indicated or not. In some embodiments, the UE 201 may meanwhile keep the default bearer through the MeNB 202 as well as a signalling radio bearer (SRB) through the MeNB 202. In this way, the UE 201 may be dual-connected with the MeNB 202 and the SeNB 203. Then, the UE 201 may transmit a RRC connection reconfiguration complete message (i.e., RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete) to the MeNB 202 (signalling 312), and the MeNB 202 may further transmit a SeNB addition complete message or a small cell addition complete message (not illustrated in Figure 3) to the SeNB 203 (Signalling 313). Alternatively, the UE 201 may transmit the RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete message to the MeNB 202 as well as the SeNB 203. The UE 201 may be ready to communicate with the
new bearer through the SeNB 203, and SeNB 203 may buffer packet data received from the UE 201 until a connection with the S-GW 224 is established.
In some embodiments, the MeNB 202 may then transmit an E-RAB setup response to the E-RAB setup request from MME 214 (signalling 314). The E-RAB setup response may be embodied as, without limitation, a SI application protocol (S1AP) E-RAB setup response for the SI approach or an X2 application protocol (X2AP) E-RAB setup response for the X2 approach. The E-RAB setup response may inform the MME 214 that the new bearer was created and was re-directed to the SeNB 203 and may include an indicator that the E-RAB may be handled by the SeNB, an IP addresses of the SeNB, and/or others.
The UE 201 may further transmit a message informing the MeNB 202 that the dedicated bearer context is accepted, such as a NAS activate dedicated EPS bearer context accept message to the MeNB 202 (signalling 315). This message may be transmitted in response to the above- stated NAS activate dedicated EPS bearer context request. The MeNB 202 may further forward the message to the MME 214 (signalling 316).
Upon receipt of the E-RAB setup response and the NAS activate dedicated EPS bearer context accept message, the MME 214 may transmit a create bearer response to the S-GW 224 (signalling 317), which may be the response to the above-stated create bearer request from the S-GW 224. In this way, the connection between the SeNB 203 and the S-GW 224 may be established, resulting in the establishment of the new bearer between the UE 201 and the S-GW 224.
Other embodiments may implement other modifications and variations to on the signalling procedure as depicted in Figure 3. For example, although Figure 3 illustrates the signalling procedure of adding the new cell as initiated by the UE 201, it should be understood that a similar procedure as initiated by the network 204 can accomplish the similar result.
Figure 4 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the UE 201 to add the SeNB resources by adding the new bearer through the SeNB 203 for the small cell. In block 401, the communication module 211 or other device of the UE 201 may communicate with the core network system 204 on the default bearer, such as the default EPS bearer through the MeNB 202. In block 402, the communication
module 211 or other device may determine that the new bearer is needed for the traffic flow aggregation. In some embodiments, the UE 201 may move into the small cell which may trigger the determination for the new bearer through the small cell. In block 403, the communication module 211 (e.g., NAS layer module 2113) or other device may transmit the NAS bearer resource allocation request to the MeNB 202. In block 404, the communication module 211 (e.g., RRC layer module 2112) or other device may receive, from the MeNB 202, the request of adding the new bearer through the SeNB 203 for the small cell. The request may be embodied as the RRCconnectionreconfiguration and NAS activate dedicated EPS bearer context request, and may include information such as C-RNTI, security algorithm identifiers, dedicated RACH preamble for the small cell, and/or others. In some embodiments, the C-RNTI may not be needed if the UE 201 is allocated with the same C-RNTI in the macro cell and the small cell, and the security algorithm identifiers may not be needed if X2 approach is used.
In block 405, the communication module 211 (e.g., the RRC layer 2112) or other device may synchronize with the SeNB 203 to reconfigure the RRC connection for the new bearer establishment. In some embodiments, the UE 201 may perform uplink and downlink synchronization based on the information contained in the request. In some embodiments, the UE 201 may meanwhile keep the default bearer through the MeNB 202 as well as a signalling radio bearer (SRB) through the MeNB 202. Thus, the UE 201 may be dual-connected with the MeNB 202 and the SeNB 203.
In block 406, the communication module 211 (e.g., the RRC layer 2112) or other device may transmit the RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete message to the MeNB 202. In some embodiments, the message may be further transmitted to the SeNB 203. In block 407, the communication module 211 (e.g., the NAS layer 2113) or other device may transmit the NAS activate dedicated EPS bearer context accept message to the MeNB 202.
Other embodiments may implement other modifications and variations to on the method as depicted in Figure 4. For example, although Figure 4 illustrates the method of adding the new bearer as initiated by the UE 201, it should be understood
that a similar procedure as initiated by the network 204 can accomplish the similar result.
Figure 5 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the MeNB 202 of the wireless communication network 200 to add the SeNB resources by adding the new bearer through the SeNB 203 for the small cell. In block 501, the communication module 212 or other device of the MeNB 202 may communicate with the UE 201 on the default bearer through the macro cell, such as the EPS bearer. In block 502, the communication module 212 (e.g., NAS layer 2123) or other device may receive the NAS bearer resource allocation request from the UE 201. In block 503, the communication module 212 (e.g., NAS layer 2123) or other device may forward the NAS bearer resource allocation request to the MME 214. In block 504, the communication module 212 (e.g., NAS layer 2123) or other device may receive the E-RAB setup request and NAS activate dedicated EPS bearer context request from the MME 214, as a part of the dedicated bearer context activation procedure. In block 505, the communication module 212 or other device may select the small cell or the SeNB through which the new bearer can be established. In some
embodiments, the MeNB 202 may select the small cell or the SeNB based on the UE measurement report related to the UE communication quality.
In block 506, the communication module 212 or other device may further transmit to the SeNB 203 the request of adding the new bearer. The request may be embodied as the SeNB addition request or the Small Cell addition request and may include, without limitation, information element (IE) such as cause for the SeNB addition, a list of E-RABs to be setup, characteristics of the new bearer, UE security capabilities for SI approach, security context for SI approach, and/or others.
In block 507, the communication module 212 or other device may receive, from the SeNB 203, the acknowledgement message such as the SeNB addition request ACK or the small cell addition request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 5), if the SeNB 203 determines that the SeNB addition request or the small cell addition request is acceptable. The SeNB addition request ACK the small cell addition request ACK may include, without limitation, a list of admitted E-RABs including TNL address information for the respective E-RAB, a list of not admitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for SeNB addition or small cell addition,
and/or others. The transparent container may include, without limitation, a new cell- radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) for identifying the UE 201 by the SeNB 203, secondary eNB security algorithm identifiers for selected security algorithms, a dedicated random access channel (RACH) preamble, access parameters, system information blocks (SIBs) parameters, and/or others. However, the communication module 212 or other device may receive the rejection message, if the SeNB 203 determines that the SeNB addition request or the small cell addition request is unacceptable.
In block 508, the communication module 212 (e.g., RRC layer 2122) or other device may transmit the RRCconnectionreconfiguration and NAS activate dedicated EPS bearer context request to the UE 201 to request reconfiguring the RRC connection to establish the new bearer through the SeNB 203. In some embodiments, the RRCconnectionreconfiguration and NAS activate dedicated EPS bearer context request may include information such as C-RNTI, security algorithm identifiers, dedicated RACH preamble for the small cell, and/or others. In some embodiments, the C-RNTI may not be needed if the UE 201 is allocated with the same C-RNTI in the macro cell and the small cell, and the security algorithm identifiers may not be needed if X2 approach is used.
In some embodiments, the communication module 212 (e.g., RRC layer 2122) or other device may receive the RRC connection reconfiguration complete message from the UE 201 in block 509, and may transmit to MME 214 an E-RAB setup response to the E-RAB setup request in block 510. The E-RAB setup response may be embodied as, without limitation, a SI application protocol (S1AP) E-RAB setup response for the S 1 approach or an X2 application protocol (X2AP) E-RAB setup response for the X2 approach. The E-RAB setup response may inform the MME 214 that the new bearer was created and was re-directed to the SeNB 203.
In block 511, the communication module 212 (e.g., NAS layer 2123) or other device may further receive the NAS activate dedicated EPS bearer context accept message from the UE 201, which may be transmitted in response to the above-stated NAS activate dedicated EPS bearer context request. The
communication module 212 (e.g., NAS layer 2123) or other device may further forwarded the message to the MME 214.
Other embodiments may implement other modifications and variations to on the method as depicted in Figure 5. For example, although Figure 5 illustrates the method of adding the new bearer as initiated by the UE 201, it should be understood that a similar procedure as initiated by the network 204 can accomplish the similar result.
Figure 6 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure to adding the SeNB resources by switching a bearer from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203 of the wireless communication system 200, based on the SI approach.
As illustrated in Figure 6, based on the SI approach, the UE 201 may communication with the core network system 204 over a DRB of an EPS bearer established through the MeNB 202 for the macro cell. The MeNB 202 may transmit a message related to measurement control to the UE 201 (signalling 601). In some embodiments, the message may configure the UE measurement procedures according to area restriction information. Measurements provided by the MeNB 202 may assist the function controlling the UE's connection mobility. In response to the message, the UE 201 may perform the measurement procedures and transmit a measurement report to the MeNB 202 (signalling 602). Based on the measurement report, the MeNB 202 may make a decision of switching the DRB from the macro cell to the small cell. This may happen under certain circumstances, such as when the UE 201 moving into the coverage of the small cell. As illustrated in Figure 6, the decision may be called as a carrier aggregation (CA) decision. On the other hand, although not being illustrated in Figure 6, it should be understood that the MeNB 202 may make a decision of not adding the small cell, for example, when the measurement report indicates that the radio quality in the small cell is not good enough.
The MeNB 202 may send a request of adding the small cell to the SeNB 203 for the small cell (signalling 603). The request may be embodied as a SeNB addition request or a small cell addition request (not illustrated in Figure 6), and may include, without limitation, information element (IE) such as cause for the SeNB addition or the small cell addition, a list of E-RABs to be setup, characteristics of the DRB (such as DRB parameters, TNL address information and/or others), UE security capabilities for SI approach, security context for SI approach, and/or others.
Then, the SeNB 203 may perform an admission control to determine whether the request is acceptable or not. In response to a determination that the request is acceptable, the SeNB 203 may send a message to the MeNB 202, such as a SeNB addition request ACK or a small cell addition request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 6) (signalling 604). The SeNB addition request ACK or the SeNB addition request or the small cell addition request ACK may include, without limitation, a list of admitted E-RABs including TNL address information for the respective E-RAB, a list of not admitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB addition or the small cell addition, and/or others. The transparent container may include, without limitation, a new C-RNTI for identifying the UE 201 by the SeNB 203, secondary eNB security algorithm identifiers for selected security algorithms, a dedicated random access channel (RACH) preamble, access parameters, system information blocks (SIBs) parameters, and/or others.
Upon receipt of the acknowledgment message, the MeNB 202 may transmit to the UE 201 a message of reconfiguring the RRC connection to switch the DRB from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203 (signalling 605). The message may be embodied as, without limitation, a RRCconnectionreconfiguration message, and may include information related to the small cell or the SeNB 203 such as the new C-RNTI, SeNB security algorithm identifiers and optionally dedicated RACH preamble, SeNB system information blocks (SIBs), and/or others.
In some embodiments, the MeNB 202 may start to deliver buffered and in transit packet data to the SeNB 203. Before forwarding the packet data, the MeNB 202 may transfer serial number (SN) status to the SeNB 203 (signalling 606). In some embodiments, the MeNB 202 may convey uplink PDCP (packet data convergence protocol) SN receiver status and/or downlink PDCP SN transmitter status of E-RABs for which PDCP status preservation applies. The SeNB 203 may buffer the packet data received from the MeNB 202, such as a memory or a data storage of the SeNB 203.
Based on the information in the RRCconnectionreconfiguration message, the UE 201 may perform uplink and/or downlink synchronization with the SeNB 203 in order to reconfigure the RRC connection to switch the DRB from the macro cell to the small cell. For example, the UE 201 may perform the synchronization to the
SeNB 203 and access the small cell via RACH, following a contention-free or contention-based procedure depending on whether a dedicated preamble was indicated or not. In some embodiments that the UE 201 may communication with the MeNB 202 on more than one DRBs, after switching the DRB from the macro cell to the small cell, the UE 201 may still keep remaining DRB bearer(s) (i.e., unswitched DRB(s)) with the MeNB 202 as well as a SRB with the MeNB 202. In this way, the UE 201 may be dual-connected with the MeNB 202 and the SeNB 203.
After synchronizing with the SeNB 203 and being able to access the small cell, the UE 201 may transmit a RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete message to the MeNB 202 to inform that the RRC connection reconfiguration has been completed and the small cell has been successfully added (signalling 607). The MeNB 202 may then transmit a small cell addition complete message to the SeNB
203 (Signalling 608). Alternatively, the UE 201 may transmit the
RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete message to the MeNB 202 as well as the SeNB 203.
In some embodiments, after the UE 201 can access the small cell, it may transmit an uplink packet to the SeNB 203 over the DRB through the small cell, which may be transferred by the SeNB 203 to the core network system 204. The SeNB 203 may further transmit a path switch request to the MME 214 to request switching a downlink path of the EPS bearer from between the MeNB 202 and the core network system 204 to between the SeNB 203 and the core network system
204 (signalling 609), wherein the DRB of the EPS bearer has already been switched from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203. The path switch request may include a list of the EPS bearer(s) whose DRB(s) have been switched. In some embodiments, the path switch request may further indicate to keep other bearer(s) unreleased, wherein the other bearer(s) may include those not listed in the request, such as the DRBs related to the MeNB 202 but not switched to the SeNB 203, and/or the SRBs related to the MeNB 202. In this way, the UE 201 may still be connected to the MeNB 202 while communicating with the SeNB 203. Alternatively, the MeNB 202 may send a separate request of keeping the other bearer(s) unreleased to the MME 214.
Upon receipt of the path switch request, the MME 214 may transmit a modify bearer request to the S-GW 224 to request modifying the downlink path of
the listed EPS bearer(s) to go through the SeNB 203 (signalling 610). In response to the request, the S-GW 224 may switch the downlink path, so that the downlink packet data can be transmitted from the core network system 204 to the UE 201 through the SeNB 203. In some embodiments, the S-GW 224 may further send an End Marker to the MeNB 202 indicating an end of downlink packet data transmission on the old path to the MeNB 202 (signalling 611). The MeNB 202 may send another End Marker to the SeNB 203 indicating an end of data forwarding from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203 (signalling 612).
After the completion of the bearer modification, the S-GW 224 may send with a modify bearer response to the MME 214 (signalling 613), which may trigger the MME 214 to transmit an acknowledgement message to the SeNB 203, such as a path switch request ACK (signalling 614).
Other embodiments may implement other modifications and variations to on the method as depicted in Figure 6. For example, more than one DRBs may be switched from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203 in order to add the SeNB resources. For another example, the path switch request may be transmitted by the MeNB 202, rather than by the SeNB 203 to the MME 214.
Figure 7 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure to add the SeNB resources by switching the bearer from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203 of the wireless communication system 200, based on the X2 approach. In some embodiments, the signalling procedure of Figure 7 may be similar as that of Figure 6. However, due to the X2 approach, after the completion of RRC connection reconfiguration to switch the DRB(s) of the EPS bearer(s) from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203 (signalling 708), the transmissions of the packet data over the EPS bearer(s) may have to go through the SeNB 203 and then through the MeNB 202, namely, the UE 201 may receive/transmit the packet data from/to the SeNB 203, which may further communicate the packet data from/to the core network system 204 through the MeNB 202. In this way, there may be no need to request the core network system 204 to modify the downlink path of the EPS bearer(s) from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203.
Figure 8 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the UE 201 of the wireless communication system 200 to adding the SeNB resources by switching the
bearer from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203. In some embodiments, the UE 201 may communication with the core network system 204 over the DRB of the EPS bearer established through the MeNB 202 for the macro cell. In block 801, the communication module 211 or other device of UE 201 may receive, from the MeNB 201, the message related to the measurement control which may configure the UE measurement procedures. Measurements provided by the MeNB 202 may assist the function controlling the UE's connection mobility. In response to the message, in block 802, the communication module 211 or other device of the UE 201 may perform the measurement and transmit the measurement report to the MeNB 202. Based on the measurement report, the MeNB 202 may make the decision of adding the small cell by switching the DRB from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203. This may happen under certain circumstances, such as when the UE 201 moving into the coverage of the small cell. However, it should be understood that the MeNB 202 may make a decision of not adding the small cell, for example, when the measurement report indicates that the radio quality in the small cell is not good enough.
In response to the decision of adding the small cell, in block 803, the communication module 211 (e.g., RRC layer 2112) or other device may receive a message of reconfiguring the RRC connection to add the small cell by switching the DRB from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203. The message may be embodied as, without limitation, a RRCconnectionreconfiguration message, and may include information related to the small cell such as the new C-RNTI, SeNB security algorithm identifiers and optionally dedicated RACH preamble, SeNB system information blocks (SIBs), and/or others.
In block 804, based on the information in the RRCconnectionreconfiguration message, the communication module 211 (e.g., RRC layer 2112) or other device may perform the uplink and/or downlink synchronization with the SeNB 203 in order to reconfigure the RRC connection to switch the DRB from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203. For example, the communication module 211 may perform the synchronization to the SeNB 203 and access the small cell via RACH, following a contention-free or contention-based procedure depending on whether a dedicated preamble was indicated or not. In some embodiments that the UE 201 may
communication with the MeNB 202 on more than one DRBs, after switching the DRB from the macro cell to the small cell, the UE 201 may still keep the remaining DRB bearer(s) (i.e., the unswitched DRB(s)) with the MeNB 202 as well as the SRB with the MeNB 202. In this way, the UE 201 may be dual-connected with the MeNB 202 and the SeNB 203.
In block 805, after synchronizing with the SeNB 203 and being able to access the small cell, the communication module 211 (e.g., RRC layer 2112) or other device may transmit the RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete message to the MeNB 202 and/or SeNB 203 to inform that the RRC connection reconfiguration has been completed and the small cell has been successfully added. In block 806, the communication module 211 or other device may receive/transmit the packet data from/to the SeNB 203.
Other embodiments may implement other modifications and variations to on the method as depicted in Figure 8. For example, more than one DRBs may be switched from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203 in order to add the SeNB resources.
Figure 9 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the MeNB 202 of the wireless communication system 200 to add the SeNB resources by switching the bearer from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203, based on the SI approach. According to the SI approach, in block 901, the communication module 212 or other device of MeNB 202 may communicate the packet data between the UE 201 and the core network system 204 over the DRB of the EPS bearer established through the macro cell. In block 902, the communication module 212 or other device may transmit the message related to the measure control to the UE 201. In some embodiments, the message may configure the UE measurement procedures according to area restriction information. Measurements provided by the MeNB 202 may assist the function controlling the UE's connection mobility.
In block 903, the communication module 212 or other device may receive the measurement report from the UE 201. In block 904, based on the measurement report, the communication module 212 or other device may make the decision of adding the SeNB resources by switching the DRB from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203. On the other hand, although not being illustrated in Figure 9, the
communication module 212 or other device may make the decision of not adding the small cell.
In response to the decision of adding the SeNB resources, the
communication module 212 or other device may send to the SeNB 203 the request of adding the SeNB resources by switching the DRB from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203, in block 905. In some embodiments, the request may be embodied as a SeNB addition request or a small cell addition request (not illustrated in Figure 9), and may include, without limitation, information element (IE) such as cause for the SeNB addition or small cell addition, the list of E-RABs to be setup, characteristics of the DRB, UE security capabilities for SI approach, security context for SI approach, and/or others.
In block 906, the communication module 212 or other device may receive, from the UE 201, the acknowledgement message such as the SeNB addition request ACK or the small cell addition request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 9). In some embodiments, the SeNB addition request ACK or the small cell addition request ACK may include, without limitation, the list of admitted E-RABs (such as E-RAB parameters, TNL address information, and/or others), the list of not admitted E- RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB addition or the small cell addition, and/or others. The transparent container may include, without limitation, the new C-RNTI for identifying the UE 201 by the SeNB 203, SeNB security algorithm identifiers for selected security algorithms, the dedicated RACH preamble, access parameters, SIBs parameters, and/or others.
Upon receipt of the acknowledgment message, in block 907, the
communication module 212 (e.g., RRC layer 2122) or other device may transmit to the UE 201 the message of reconfiguring the RRC connection to add the SeNB resources by switching the DRB from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203. The message may be embodied as, without limitation, the
RRCconnectionreconfiguration message, and may include information related to the small cell or the SeNB 203 such as the new C-RNTI, SeNB security algorithm identifiers and optionally dedicated RACH preamble, SeNB system information blocks (SIBs), and/or others. In some embodiments that the UE 201 may communication with the MeNB 202 on more than one DRBs, after switching the
DRB from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203, the UE 201 may still keep the remaining DRB bearer (i.e., the unswitched DRB) with the MeNB 202 as well as the SRB with the MeNB 202. In this way, the UE 201 may be dual-connected with the MeNB 202 and the SeNB 203.
Then, the MeNB 202 may start to deliver the buffered and in transit packet data to the SeNB 203. Before forwarding the packet data in block 909, the communication module 212 or other device may transfer the serial number (SN) status to the SeNB 203 in block 908. In some embodiments, the MeNB 202 may convey uplink PDCP (packet data convergence protocol) SN receiver status and/or downlink PDCP SN transmitter status of E-RABs for which PDCP status preservation applies. The SeNB 203 may buffer the packet data received from the MeNB 202, for example, in the memory or the data storage of the SeNB 203.
After the UE 201 synchronizing with the SeNB 203 and being able to access the small cell, in block 910, the communication module 212 (e.g., RRC layer 2122) or other device may receive, from the UE 201, the
RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete message which may inform that the RRC connection reconfiguration has been completed and the SeNB resources has been successfully added. In some embodiments, the communication module 212 or other device may then transmit the SeNB addition complete message or small cell addition complete message (not illustrated in Figure 9) to the SeNB 203, in block 911. However, in other embodiments that the UE 201 transmits the
RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete message to the MeNB 202 and the SeNB 203, the block 911 may be omitted.
In block 912, the communication module 212 or other device may send a SI or X2 message to the S-GW 224, in order to keep the bearer(s) unreleased, which bearer(s) are related to the MeNB 202 and haven't been switched to the SeNB 203. The bearer(s) may include DRB(s) and/or SRB(s). In this way, the UE 201 may still connect with the MeNB 202. In some embodiments, the similar message may be conveyed to the S-GW 224 by the SeNB 203. In such case, block 912 may be omitted.
In block 912, the communication module 212 or other device may receive from the core network system (e.g., S-GW 224), the end marker indicating the end
of downlink packet data transmissions from the core network system to the MeNB 202 over the old path. In block 913, the communication module 212 or other device may transmit, to the SeNB 203, the end marker indicating the end of data forwarding from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203.
Other embodiments may implement other modifications and variations to on the method as depicted in Figure 9. For example, the communication module 212 or other device may further transmit, to the MME 214, the path switch request to request switching the downlink path of the EPS bearer from between the MeNB 202 and the core network system 204 to between the SeNB 203 and the core network system 204, wherein the DRB of the EPS bearer has already been switched from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203. The path switch request may include the list of the EPS bearer(s) whose DRB(s) have been switched. In some embodiments, the path switch request may further indicate to keep other bearer(s) unreleased, wherein the other bearer(s) may include those not listed in the request, such as the DRBs related to the MeNB 202 but not switched to the SeNB 203, and/or the SRBs related to the MeNB 202. In this way, the UE 201 may still be connected to the MeNB 202 while communicating with the SeNB 203. Alternatively, the SeNB 203 may send a separate request of keeping the other bearer(s) unreleased to the MME 214.
Figure 10 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the MeNB 202 of the wireless communication system 200 to add the SeNB resources by switching the bearer from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203, based on the X2 approach.
In some embodiments, blocks 1001 to 1011 are similar to blocks 901 to 9011 and may not be reiterated for simplicity. In block 1012, based on X2 approach, the MeNB 202 may deliver the packet data received from the SeNB 203 to the core network system 204, and vice versa.
Other embodiments may implement other modifications and variations to on the method as depicted in Figure 10. For example, the communication module 212 or other device may further transmit the path switch request to the MME 214 to request switching the downlink path of the EPS bearer from between the MeNB 202 and the core network system 204 to between the SeNB 203 and the core network system 204, wherein the DRB of the EPS bearer has already been switched from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203. The path switch request may include the list of the
EPS bearer(s) whose DRB(s) have been switched. In some embodiments, the path switch request may further indicate to keep other bearer(s) unreleased, wherein the other bearer(s) may include those not listed in the request, such as the DRBs related to the MeNB 202 but not switched to the SeNB 203, and/or the SRBs related to the MeNB 202. In this way, the UE 201 may still be connected to the MeNB 202 while communicating with the SeNB 203. Alternatively, the SeNB 203 may send a separate request of keeping the other bearer(s) unreleased to the MME 214.
Figure 11 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the SeNB 203 of the wireless communication system 200 to add the SeNB resources by switching the bearer from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203 based on the SI approach.
In some embodiments, according to the SI approach, the UE 201 may communication with the core network system 204 over the DRB of the EPS bearer established through the MeNB 202 for the macro cell. Under some circumstances such as when the UE 201 moving into the small cell, the MeNB 202 may make the decision of adding the SeNB resources by switching the DRB from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203.
In block 1101, the communication module 213 or other device of SeNB 203 may receive the request of adding the SeNB resources from the MeNB 202. The request may be embodied as the SeNB addition request or the small cell addition request (not illustrated in Figure 11), and may include, without limitation, information element (IE) such as cause for the SeNB addition or the small cell addition, a list of E-RABs to be setup, characteristics of the DRB, UE security capabilities for SI approach, security context for SI approach, and/or others. In block 1102, the communication module 213 or other device may perform the admission control to determine whether the request is acceptable or not. In response to the determination that the request is acceptable and relevant E-RAB bearer recourses can be granted, in block 1103, the communication module 213 may send the acknowledgement message to the MeNB 202, such as the SeNB addition request ACK or the small cell addition request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 11). The SeNB addition request ACK or the small cell addition request ACK may include, without limitation, a list of admitted E-RABs, a list of not admitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB addition or the small cell
addition, and/or others. The transparent container may include, without limitation, a new C-RNTI for identifying the UE 201 by the SeNB 203, secondary eNB security algorithm identifiers for selected security algorithms, a dedicated random access channel (RACH) preamble, access parameters, system information blocks (SIBs) parameters, and/or others.
In block 1104, the communication module 213 or other device may receive the SN status transfer message and packet data forwarded from the MeNB 202. In some embodiments, the MeNB 202 may convey uplink PDCP (packet data convergence protocol) SN receiver status and/or downlink PDCP SN transmitter status of E-RABs for which PDCP status preservation applies. In block 1105, the communication module 213 or other device may buffer the packet data received from the MeNB 202, for example, in the memory or the data storage of the SeNB 203.
After UE 201 synchronizing with the SeNB 203 and being able to access the small cell, in block 1106, the communication module 213 (e.g., RRC layer 2132) or other device may receive the RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete message from the UE 201. Alternatively, the communication module 213 (e.g., RRC layer 2132) may receive the SeNB addition complete message or the small cell addition complete message (not illustrated in Figure 11) from the MeNB 202, either of which may inform the SeNB 203 of the completion of adding the SeNB resources.
When the UE 201 can access the small cell, it may transmit the uplink packet to the SeNB 203 over the DRB through the small cell, which may be transferred by the SeNB 203 to the core network system 204. In block 1107, the communication module 213 or other device may transmit the path switch request to the MME 214 to request switching the downlink path of the EPS bearer from between the MeNB 202 and the core network system 204 to between the SeNB 203 and the core network system 204, wherein the DRB of the EPS bearer has already been switched from between the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203. The path switch request may include the list of the EPS bearer(s) whose DRBs have been switched. In some embodiments, the path switch request may further indicate to keep other bearer(s) unreleased, wherein the other bearer(s) may include those not listed in the request, such as the DRBs related to the MeNB 202 and not switched to the SeNB 203, and/or the SRBs
related to the MeNB 202. In this way, the UE 201 may still be connected to the MeNB 202 while communicating with the SeNB 203. Alternatively, the MeNB 202 may send the separate request of keeping the other bearer(s) unreleased, in which case the block 1107 may be omitted.
After the core network system 204 switches the downlink path of the EPS bearer from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203, in block 1108, the communication module 213 or other device may receive the acknowledgement message from the core network system 204 (e.g., the MME 214), such as the path switch request ACK. In block 1109, the communication module 213 or other device may receive the end marker from the MeNB 202 indicating the end of data forwarding from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203.
After completion of switching the DRB and adding the SeNB resources, based on the SI approach, the UE 201 may communicate with the core network system 204 over the DRB through the SeNB 203.
Figure 12 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the SeNB 203 of the wireless communication system 200 to add the SeNB resources by switching the bearer from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203 based on the X2 approach.
In some embodiments, blocks 1201 to 1206 are similar to blocks 1101 to 1106 and may not be reiterated for simplicity. In block 1207, after completion of switching the DRB and adding the SeNB resources, based on the X2 approach, the UE 201 may communicate with the SeNB 203 over the DRB through the small cell, which may further connect with the core network 204 via the MeNB 202. In other words, based on the X2 approach, the communication module 213 or other device may forward the packet data, which was received from the UE 201, to the MeNB 202 for further transmission to the core network 204, and vice versa.
Figure 13 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure for the wireless communication system 200 to release SeNB resources by switching a bearer from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202, based on the SI approach.
As illustrated in Figure 13, based on the SI approach, the UE 201 may communicate packet data with the core network system 204 over a DRB of an EPS bearer through the SeNB 203 for the small cell. Under the dual connectivity, the UE 201 may communicate another packet data with the MeNB 202 over another DRB
of another EPS bearer or communicate a signalling with the MeNB 202 over a SRB through the MeNB 202.
In some embodiments, the MeNB 202 may transmit a message related to measurement control to the UE 201 (signalling 1301). In some embodiments, the message may configure the UE measurement procedures according to area restriction information. Measurements provided by the MeNB 202 may assist the function controlling the UE's connection mobility. In response to the message, the UE 201 may perform the measurement procedures and transmit a measurement report to the MeNB 202 (signalling 1302).
Based on the measurement report, the MeNB 202 may make a decision of releasing the SeNB resources by switching the DRB from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202. This may happen under certain circumstances, such as when the UE
201 moving out of the coverage of the small cell. As illustrated in Figure 13, the decision may be called as a carrier aggregation (CA) decision. On the other hand, although not being illustrated in Figure 13, it should be understood that the MeNB
202 may make a decision of not releasing the SeNB resources, for example, when the measurement report indicates that the radio quality in the small cell is good enough.
In response to the decision of releasing the SeNB resources, the MeNB 202 may send to the SeNB 203 for the small cell a request of releasing the SeNB resources (signalling 1303). The request may be embodied as a SeNB release request or a small cell release request (not illustrated in Figure 13), and may include, without limitation, information necessary for preparing the DRB switch, such as elements (IE) like cause for the SeNB release or the small cell release, a list of E- RABs to be switched, characteristics of the DRB (such as DRB parameters, TNL address information, and/or others), UE C-RNTI in the small cell, UE security capabilities for SI approach, security context for SI approach, and/or others. Then, the SeNB 203 may perform an admission control to determine whether the request is acceptable or not. In response to a determination that the request is acceptable, the SeNB 203 may send an acknowledgement message to the MeNB 202, such as a small cell release request ACK (signalling 1304). The SeNB release request ACK or the small cell release request ACK may include, without limitation, information
such as the C-RNTI, the cause for the SeNB release or the small cell release, a list of admitted E-RABs including TNL address information for the respective E-RAB, a list of not admitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB release or the small cell release, and/or others.
Upon receipt of the acknowledgment message, the MeNB 202 may transmit to the UE 201 a message of reconfiguring the RRC connection to release the SeNB resources by switching the DRB from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202 (signalling 1305). The message may be embodied as, without limitation, a
RRCconnectionreconfiguration message and may include SeNB release information or small cell release information (i.e., SeNB release information) to inform the UE
201 that the SeNB resources are going to be released.
The SeNB 203 may deliver buffered and in transit packet data to the MeNB 202. Before forwarding the packet data, the SeNB 203 may transfer SN status message to the MeNB 202 (signalling 1306). In some embodiments, the SeNB 203 may convey uplink PDCP (packet data convergence protocol) SN receiver status and/or downlink PDCP SN transmitter status of E-RABs for which PDCP status preservation applies. The MeNB 202 may buffer the packet data received from the SeNB 203 in a memory or a data storage of the MeNB 202.
In some embodiments, based on the information in the
RRCconnectionreconfiguration message, the UE 201 may reconfigure the DRB to detach from the SeNB 203 in order to release the SeNB resources. Then, the UE 201 may transmit a RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete message to the MeNB 202 to inform that the RRC connection reconfiguration has been completed and the SeNB resources have been successfully released (signalling 1307). The MeNB 202 may then transmit a SeNB resources complete message or a SeNB release complete message or a small cell release complete message (not illustrated in Figure 13) to the SeNB 203, which may include a UE identifier, a transaction identifier, and/or others (Signalling 1308).
When the UE 201 can access the macro cell over the DRB, based on the SI approach, it may transmit an uplink packet to the MeNB 202 over the DRB, which may be transferred by the MeNB 203 to the core network system 204. The MeNB
202 may further transmit a path switch request to the MME 214 to request switching
a downlink path of the EPS bearer from between the SeNB 203 and the core network system 204 to between the MeNB 202 and the core network system 204 (signalling 1309), wherein the DRB of the EPS bearer has already been switched from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202. The path switch request may include a list of the EPS bearer(s) whose DRB(s) have been switched. In some embodiments, the path switch request may further indicate to keep other bearer(s) unreleased, wherein the other bearer(s) may include those not listed in the request, such as the DRBs and/or the SRBs related to the MeNB 202. Alternatively, the MeNB 202 may send a separate request of keeping the other bearer(s) unreleased to the MME 214. In other embodiments, it may be the SeNB 203, rather than the MeNB 202, which may send the path switch request to the MME 214.
Upon receipt of the path switch request, the MME 214 may transmit a modify bearer request to the S-GW 224 to request modifying the downlink path of the listed EPS bearer(s) to go through the MeNB 202 (signalling 1310). In response to the request, the S-GW 224 may switch the downlink path, so that the downlink packet data can be transmitted from the core network system 204 to the UE 201 through the MeNB 202 for the macro cell, based on the S 1 approach. In some embodiments, the S-GW 224 may further send an End Marker to the SeNB 203 indicating an end of downlink packet data transmission on the old path (signalling 1311). The SeNB 203 may send another End Marker to the MeNB 202 indicating an end of data forwarding from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202 (signalling 1312).
After the completion of the bearer modification, the S-GW 224 may send with a modify bearer response to the MME 214 (signalling 1313), which may trigger the MME 214 to transmit an acknowledgement message to the MeNB 202, such as a path switch request ACK (signalling 1314).
Other embodiments may implement other modifications and variations to on the method as depicted in Figure 13. In some embodiments, it may be the SeNB 203 which makes the decision of releasing the SeNB resources. In such case, the SeNB release request or the small cell release request may be sent from the SeNB 203 to MeNB 202, and the SeNB release request ACK or the small cell release request ACK may be sent from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203.
Figure 14 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure for the wireless communication system 200 to release the SeNB resources by switching the bearer from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202, based on the X2 approach.
In some embodiments, the signalling procedure of Figure 14 may be similar as that of Figure 13. However, due to the X2 approach, before releasing the SeNB resources, the UE 201 may receive/transmit the packet data from/to SeNB 203 over the DRB of the EPS bearer, and the SeNB 203 may then communicate the packet data with the core network system 204 through the MeNB 202. In view of this, based on the X2 approach, there may be no need for the SeNB 203 to deliver the buffered and in transit packet data to the MeNB 202.
Moreover, in some embodiments, after the completion of the RRC connection reconfiguration to switch the DRB from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202 (signalling 1406), the transmissions of the packet data between the UE 201 and the core network system 204 over the EPS bearer may only need to go through the MeNB 202. In this way, there may be no need to request the core network system 204 to modify the downlink path of the EPS bearer from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202.
Other embodiments may implement other modifications and variations to on the method as depicted in Figure 14. In some embodiments, it may be the SeNB 203 which makes the decision of releasing the SeNB resources. In such case, the SeNB release request or the small cell release request may be sent from the SeNB 203 to MeNB 202, and the SeNB release request ACK or the small cell release request ACK may be sent from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203.
Figure 15 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the UE 201 of the wireless communication system 200 to release the SeNB resources by switching the bearer from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202.
In block 1501, the communication module 211 or other device of the UE 201 may communicate with the core network system 204 over the DRB of the EPS bearer through the SeNB 203 for the small cell. Under the dual connectivity, the communication module 211 or other device may communicate another packet data with the MeNB 202 over another DRB of another EPS bearer through the MeNB
202 or communicate the signalling with the MeNB 202 over the SRB through the MeNB 202.
In block 1502, the communication module 211 or other device may receive the message related to the measurement control from the MeNB 202. In some embodiments, the message may configure the UE measurement procedures according to area restriction information. Measurements provided by the MeNB 202 may assist the function controlling the UE's connection mobility. In response to the message, the communication module 211 or other device may perform the measurement and may transmit the measurement report to the MeNB 202 in block
1503. Based on the measurement report, the MeNB 202 may make the decision of releasing the SeNB resources by switching the DRB from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202. This may happen under certain circumstances, such as when the UE
201 moving out of the coverage of the small cell. On the other hand, although not being illustrated in Figure 15, it should be understood that the MeNB 202 may make the decision of not releasing the SeNB resources, for example, when the measurement report indicates that the radio quality in the small cell is good enough.
In response to the decision of releasing the small cell, the communication module 211 (e.g., RRC layer 2112) or other device may receive, from the MeNB
202 or SeNB 203, the message of reconfiguring the RRC connection to release the small cell by switching the DRB from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202, in block
1504. The request may be embodied as, without limitation, a
RRCconnectionreconfiguration message and may include small cell release information (i.e., SeNB release information or small cell release information) to inform the UE 201 that the small cell is going to be released.
In some embodiments, based on the information in the RRC connection reconfiguration message, the communication module 211 (e.g., RRC layer 2112) or other device may reconfigure the DRB to detach from the SeNB 203 in order to release the SeNB resources. After detaching from the SeNB 203, the
communication module 211 (e.g., RRC layer 2112) or other device may transmit the RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete message to the MeNB 202 to inform that the RRC connection reconfiguration has been completed and the SeNB resources has been successfully released, in block 1506. In block 1507, the communication
module 211 or other device may start to communicate the packet data with the core network system 204 over the DRB through the MeNB 202.
Figure 16 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the MeNB 202 of the wireless communication system 200 to release the SeNB resources by switching the bearer from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202, based on the SI approach.
In some embodiments, based on the SI approach, the UE 201 may communication with the core network system 204 over the DRB of the EPS bearer through the SeNB 203 for the small cell. Under the dual connectivity, the UE 201 may communicate another packet data with the MeNB 202 over another DRB of another EPS bearer or communicate the signalling with the MeNB 202 over the SRB.
As illustrated in Figure 16, in some embodiments, the communication module 212 or other device of the MeNB 202 may transmit the message related to the measurement control to the UE 201. In some embodiments, the message may configure the UE measurement procedures according to area restriction information. Measurements provided by the MeNB 202 may assist the function controlling the UE's connection mobility. In response to the message, the UE 201 may perform the measurement procedures. In block 1602, the communication module 212 or other device may receive the measurement report from the UE 201. In block 1603, based on the measurement report, the communication module 212 or other device may make the decision of releasing the SeNB resources by switching the DRB from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202. This may happen under certain circumstances, such as when the UE 201 moving out of the coverage of the small cell. On the other hand, although not being illustrated in Figure 16, it should be understood that the MeNB 202 may make the decision of not releasing the SeNB resources, for example, when the measurement report indicates that the radio quality in the small cell is not good enough.
In some embodiments, in response to the decision of releasing the SeNB resources, the communication module 212 or other device may send the request of releasing the SeNB resources to the SeNB 203, in block 1604. The request may be embodied as the SeNB release request or the small cell release request (not illustrated in Figure 16), and may include, without limitation, information necessary
for preparing the DRB switch, such as elements (IE) like cause for the SeNB release request or the small cell release, a list of E-RABs to be switched, characteristics of the DRB, UE C-RNTI in the small cell, UE security capabilities for SI approach, security context for SI approach, and/or others.
In block 1605, the communication module 212 or other device may receive the acknowledgement message from the SeNB 203, if the SeNB 203 decides that the SeNB release request or the small cell release request is acceptable. The
acknowledgement message may be embodied as the SeNB release request ACK or the small cell release request ACK, and may include, without limitation, information such as the C-RNTI, the cause for the SeNB release or the small cell release, a list of admitted E-RABs, a list of not admitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for SeNB release or the small cell release, and/or others.
In some embodiments, upon receipt of the acknowledgment message, the communication module 212 (e.g., RRC layer 2122) or other device may transmit to the UE 201 the message of reconfiguring the RRC connection to release the SeNB resources by switching the DRB from the small cell to the macro cell, in block
1606. The message may be embodied as, without limitation, a
RRCconnectionreconfiguration message and may include the SeNB release information or the small cell release information (e.g., SeNB release information) to inform the UE 201 that the small cell is going to be released.
In some embodiments, before the SeNB 203 begins to deliver the buffered and in-transit packet data to the MeNB 202, the communication module 212 or other device may receive the SN status transfer message from the SeNB 203, in block
1607. In some embodiments, the SeNB 203 may convey uplink PDCP (packet data convergence protocol) SN receiver status and/or downlink PDCP SN transmitter status of E-RABs for which PDCP status preservation applies. The communication module 212 or other device may receive the packet data forwarded from the SeNB 203 in block 1608, and may buffer the packet data in the MeNB 202 in block 1609, for example, in the memory or the data storage of the MeNB 202.
After the UE 201 detaches from the SeNB 203, the communication module 212 (e.g., RRC layer 2122) or other device may receive, from the UE 201, the RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete message informing that the RRC
connection reconfiguration has been completed and the SeNB resources have been successfully released, in block 1610. In block 1611, the communication module 212 or other device may transmit the SeNB release request complete message or the small cell release complete message (not illustrated in Figure 16) to the SeNB 203.
When the UE 201 can access the macro cell over the DRB, based on the SI approach, the communication module 212 or other device may receive the uplink packet data from the UE 201 and then transfer it to the core network system 204 over the uplink path of the EPS bearer in block 1612. In block 1613, the
communication module 212 or other device may further transmit the path switch request to the MME 214 to request switching the downlink path of the EPS bearer from between the SeNB 203 and the core network system 204 to between the MeNB 202 and the core network system 204, wherein the DRB of the EPS bearer has already been switched from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202. The path switch request may include the list of the EPS bearer(s) whose DRB(s) have been switched. In some embodiments, the path switch request may further indicate to keep other bearer(s) unreleased, wherein the other bearer(s) may include those not listed in the request, such as the DRBs and/or the SRBs related to the MeNB 202. Alternatively, the MeNB 202 may send a separate request of keeping the other bearer(s) unreleased to the MME 214. In other embodiments, it may be the SeNB 203, rather than the MeNB 202, which may send the path switch request to the MME 214.
After the S-GW 224 modifies the downlink path of the EPS bearer to go through the MeNB 202, based on the SI approach, the communication module 212 or other device may receive the downlink packet data from the core network system 204 and then transfer it to the UE 201 over the downlink path of the EPS bearer, in block 1614. In block 1615, the communication module 212 or other device may receive the End Marker from the SeNB 203, which may indicate the end of data forwarding from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202. In block 1616, the
communication module 212 or other device may receive from MME 224 the acknowledgement message to the patch switch request, such as the path switch request ACK.
Other embodiments may implement other modifications and variations to on the method as depicted in Figure 16. In some embodiments, it may be the SeNB 203
which may make the decision of releasing the SeNB resources. In such case, the SeNB release request or the small cell release request may be sent from the SeNB
203 to MeNB 202, rather than from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203, and the SeNB release request ACK or the small cell release ACK may be sent from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203, rather than from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202.
Figure 17 illustrates an embodiment of the method for the MeNB 202 of the wireless communication system 200 to release the SeNB resources by switching the bearer from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202, based on the X2 approach.
In some embodiments, the method of Figure 17 may be similar as that of Figure 16, for example, blocks 1701 to 1706 may be similar as the blocks 1601 to 1606, and blocks 1707 to 1708 may be similar as blocks 1610 to 1611. However, due to the X2 approach, before releasing the SeNB resources, the UE 201 may receive/transmit the packet data from/to SeNB 203 over the DRB of the EPS bearer, and the SeNB 203 may transmit/receive the packet data to/from the core network system 204 through the MeNB 202. In view of this, based on the X2 approach, there may be no need for the SeNB 203 to deliver the buffered and in transit packet data to the MeNB 202.
In some embodiments, after the completion of the RRC connection reconfiguration to switch the DRB from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202, the transmissions of the packet data between the UE 201 and the core network system
204 over the EPS bearer may only need to go through the MeNB 202. In this case, there may be no need to request the core network system 204 to modify the downlink path of the EPS bearer from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202.
Other embodiments may implement other modifications and variations to on the method as depicted in Figure 17. In some embodiments, it may be the SeNB 203 which may make the decision of releasing the SeNB resources. In such case, the SeNB resources release request or the small cell release request (not illustrated in Figure 17) may be sent from the SeNB 203 to MeNB 202, rather than from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203, and the SeNB release request ACK or the small cell release ACK (not illustrated in Figure 17) may be sent from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203, rather than from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202.
Figure 18 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the SeNB 203 of the wireless communication system 200 to release the SeNB resources by switching the bearer from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202, based on the SI approach.
In some embodiments, based on the SI approach, the UE 201 may communication with the core network system 204 over the DRB of the EPS bearer through the SeNB 203 for the small cell. Under the dual connectivity, the UE 201 may communicate another packet data with the MeNB 202 over another DRB of another EPS bearer or communicate a signalling with the MeNB 202 over a SRB. In certain circumstances, such as when the UE 201 moving out of the coverage of the small cell back, it may be decided to release the SeNB resources by switching the DRB from the small cell to the macro cell.
In block 1801, the communication module 213 or other device of the SeNB 203 may receive from the MeNB 202 the request of releasing the SeNB resources. The request may be embodied as a SeNB release request or the small cell release request, and may include, without limitation, information necessary for preparing the DRB switch, such as elements (IE) like cause for the SeNB release or the small cell release, a list of E-RABs to be switched, characterisitics of the DRB, UE C- RNTI in the small cell, UE security capabilities for S 1 approach, security context for SI approach, and/or others.
In block 1802, the communication module 213 or other device of the SeNB 203 may perform the admission control to determine that the request is acceptable. However, although not being illustrated in Figure 18, in certain circumstances, it may be determined that the request is unacceptable. In block 1803, in response to the determination that the SeNB release request or the small cell release request (not illustrated in Figure 18) is acceptable, the communication module 213 or other device may transmit the SeNB release request ACK or the small cell release request ACK to the MeNB 202. The SeNB release request ACK or the small cell release request ACK may include, without limitation, information such as the C-RNTI, the cause for the SeNB release or the small cell release, a list of admitted E-RABs, a list of not admitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB release or the small cell release, and/or others.
Before delivering the buffered and in-transmit packet data, the
communication module 213 or other device may transfer SN status message to the MeNB 202, in block 1804. In some embodiments, the SeNB 203 may transfer uplink PDCP (packet data convergence protocol) SN receiver status and/or downlink PDCP SN transmitter status of E-RABs for which PDCP status preservation applies. In block 1805, the communication module 213 or other device may deliver the buffered and in transit packet data to the MeNB 202.
In some embodiments, after the UE 201 reconfigures the RRC connection to detach from the SeNB 203 in order to release the SeNB resources, the
communication module 213 or other device may receive the SeNB release complete mesage or the small cell release complete message from the MeNB 202.
In some embodiments, after the downlink path of the EPS bearer is switched from between the SeNB 203 and the core network system 204 to between the MeNB
202 and the core network system 204, the communication module 213 or other device may receive the End Marker from the S-GW 224 indicating the end of downlink packet data transmission on the old path, in block 1807. In block 1808, the communication module 213 may send the another End Marker to the MeNB 202 indicating the end of data forwarding from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202.
Other embodiments may implement other modifications and variations to on the method as depicted in Figure 18. In some embodiments, it may be the SeNB 203 which may make the decision of releasing the SeNB resources. In such case, the SeNB release request or the small cell release request may be sent from the SeNB
203 to MeNB 202, rather than from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203, and the SeNB release request ACK or the small cell release ACK may be sent from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203, rather than from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202. In some embodiments, the communication module 213 or other device may further transmit to the MME 214 the path switch request of switching the downlink path of the EPS bearer from between the SeNB 203 and the core network system 204 to between the MeNB 202 and the core network system 204, wherein the DRB of the EPS bearer has already been switched from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202. The path switch request may include the list of the EPS bearer(s) whose DRB(s) have been switched. In some embodiments, the path switch request may further indicate to keep other
bearer(s) unreleased, wherein the other bearer(s) may include those not listed in the request, such as the DRBs and/or the SRBs related to the MeNB 202.
Figure 19 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the SeNB 203 of the wireless communication system 200 to release the SeNB resources by switching the bearer from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202, based on the X2 approach.
In some embodiments, the method of Figure 19 may be similar as that of Figure 18. For example, blocks 1902 to 1904 may be similar as the blocks 1801 to 1803, and block 1905 may be similar as block 1806. However, due to the X2 approach, before releasing the SeNB resources, the communication module 213 or other device may receive/transmit the packet data from/to UE 201 over the DRB of the EPS bearer, and then may communicate the packet data with the core network system 204 through the MeNB 202, in block 1901. In view of this, based on the X2 approach, there may be no need for the SeNB 203 to deliver the buffered and in transit packet data to the MeNB 202.
Moreover, in some embodiments, after the completion of the RRC connection reconfiguration to switch the DRB from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202, the transmissions of the packet data between the UE 201 and the core network system 204 over the EPS bearer may only need to go through the MeNB 202. In this way, there may be no need to request the core network system 204 to modify the downlink path of the EPS bearer from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202.
Other embodiments may implement other modifications and variations to on the method as depicted in Figure 19. In some embodiments, it may be the SeNB 203 which may make the decision of releasing the SeNB resources. In such case, the SeNB resources release request or the small cell release request (not illustrated in Figure 19) may be sent from the SeNB 203 to MeNB 202, rather than from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203, and the SeNB resources release request ACK or the small cell release request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 19) may be sent from the MeNB 202 to the SeNB 203, rather than from the SeNB 203 to the MeNB 202.
Figure 20 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure for the wireless communication system 200 to switch the SeNB resources by switching a bearer from a source SeNB to a target SeNB, based on the SI approach.
As illustrated in Figure 20, the wireless communication system 200 may comprise the UE 201, the MeNB 202, a source SeNB 2030 for a source small cell, a target SeNB 2040 for a target small cell, and the core network system 204 made up by the MME 214, the S-GW 224 and others. In some embodiments, based on the SI approach, the UE 201 may be dual-connected with the MeNB 202 and the source SeNB 2030. Similarly as the SeNB 203, the source SeNB 2030 may include a communication module 2031, and/or others. The communication module 2031 may receive or transmit a signalling/packet from/to the UE 201, MeNB 202, target SeNB 2040 and/or the core network system 204 of the wireless communication system 200. In some embodiments, the communication module 2031 may further generate, process and/or control the signalling/packet and/or other communications from/to the source SeNB 2030. Details about functionalities of the communication module 2031 may be provided in the following descriptions. Although not being illustrated in Figure 20, the communication module 2031 may further include several layer implementations, such as a physical layer module, a L2 layer module, a radio resource communication (RRC) layer module, a non-access stratum (NAS) layer module, and/or others.
Similarly, the target SeNB 2040 may include a communication module 2041, and/or others. The communication module 2041 may receive or transmit a signalling/packet from/to the UE 201, MeNB 202, source SeNB 2030 and/or the core network system 204 of the wireless communication system 200. In some embodiments, the communication module 2041 may further generate, process and/or control the signalling/packet and/or other communications from/to the source SeNB 2030. Details about functionalities of the communication module 2041 may be provided in the following descriptions. Although not being illustrated in Figure 20, the communication module 2041 may further include several layer
implementations, such as a physical layer module, a L2 layer module, a radio resource communication (RRC) layer module, a non-access stratum (NAS) layer module, and/or others.
In some embodiments, based on the SI approach, the UE 201 may communicate packet data from/to the source SeNB 2030 for the source small cell over a DRB of an EPS bearer. Under the dual-connectivity, the UE 201 may
communicate another packet data from/to the MeNB 202 on another DRB of another EPS bearer, or communicate signalling with the MeNB 202 on a SRB.
The MeNB 202 may transmit a message related to measurement control to the UE 201 (signalling 2001). In some embodiments, the message may configure the UE measurement procedures according to area restriction information.
Measurements provided by the MeNB 202 may assist the function controlling the UE's connection mobility. In response to the message, the UE 201 may perform the measurement procedures and transmit a measurement report to the MeNB 202 (signalling 2002).
Based on the measurement report, the MeNB 202 may make a decision of switching the SeNB resources by switching the DRB from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040. This may happen under certain circumstances, such as when the UE 201 moving from the source small cell to the target small cell. As illustrated in Figure 20, the decision may be called as a carrier aggregation (CA) decision. On the other hand, although not being illustrated in Figure 20, it should be understood that the MeNB 202 may make a decision of not switching the SeNB resources, for example, when the measurement report indicates that the radio quality in the source small cell is good enough.
In response to the decision of switching the SeNB resources, the MeNB 202 may send a request of switching the SeNB resources to the target SeNB 2040 for the target small cell (signalling 2003), as well as to the source SeNB 2040 for the source small cell (signalling 2005). The request may be embodied as a SeNB switch request or a small cell switch request (not illustrated in Figure 20), and may include, without limitation, information necessary for preparing the DRB switch, such as elements (IE) like TYPE field indicating whether the SeNB receiving the message may add the DRB (i.e., the target SeNB) or release the DRB (i.e., the source SeNB), cause for the SeNB switch or the small cell switch, a list of E-RABs to be setup or released, characteristics of the DRB (such as DRB parameters, TNL address information, and/or others), a UE C-RNTI in the source small cell or the target small cell, UE security capabilities for S 1 approach, security context for S 1 approach, and/or others.
In response to the SeNB switch request or the small cell switch request, the target SeNB 2040 may perform an admission control to determine whether the request is acceptable or not, namely, whether it is admittable to add the DRB into the target small cell. In response to a determination that the request is acceptable, the target SeNB 2040 may send a message to the MeNB 202, such as a SeNB switch request ACK or a small cell switch request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 20) (signalling 2004). The SeNB switch request ACK or the small cell switch request ACK may include, without limitation, information such as the C-RNTI, the cause for the SeNB switch or the small cell switch, a list of admitted E-RABs including TNL address information for the respective E-RAB, a list of not admitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for SeNB release or the small cell release, and/or others.
On the other hand, the source SeNB 2030 may perform another admission control to determine whether the SeNB switch request or the small cell switch request is acceptable or not, namely, whether it is admittable to release the DRB from the source small cell. In response to a determination that the request is acceptable, the source SeNB 2030 may send a message to the MeNB 202, such as a SeNB switch request ACK or a small cell switch request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 20) (signalling 2006). The SeNB switch request ACK or the small cell switch request ACK may include, without limitation, information such as the C-RNTI, the cause for the SeNB switch or the small cell switch, a list of admitted E-RABs including TNL address information for the respective E-RAB, a list of unadmitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB release or the small cell release, and/or others.
Upon receipt of the acknowledgment messages from the source SeNB 2030 and the target SeNB 2040, the MeNB 202 may transmit to the UE 201 a message of reconfiguring the RRC connection to switch the SeNB resources by switching the DRB from the source small cell to the target small cell (signalling 2007). The request may be embodied as, without limitation, a RRCconnectionreconfiguration message and may include information necessary for switching the small cell, such as the sources SeNB information, the source small cell information, the target SeNB information, target small cell information and/or others.
In some embodiments, in order to trigger the delivery of buffered and in- transit packet data from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040, the MeNB 202 may transmit a SeNB SN status transfer message or a small cell SN status transfer message (not illustrated in Figure 20) to the source SeNB 2030 to request it to transfer the buffered and in-transit packet data to the target SeNB 2040
(signalling 2008). The SeNB SN status transfer message or the small cell SN status transfer message may include, without limitation, the UE RNTI in the target small cell, the target SeNB information such as a target SeNB identifier, the target small cell information such as a target small cell identifier, and others. Then, the source SeNB 2030 may start to deliver the buffered and in-transit packet data to the target SeNB 2040. Before forwarding the packet data, the source SeNB 2030 may transfer a SN status message to the target SeNB 2040 (signalling 2009). In some embodiments, the source SeNB 2030 may convey uplink PDCP (packet data convergence protocol) SN receiver status and/or downlink PDCP SN transmitter status of E-RABs for which PDCP status preservation applies. The target SeNB 2040 may buffer the packet data received from the SeNB 203, for example, in a memory or data storage of the target SeNB 2040.
In some embodiments, based on the information in the
RRCconnectionreconfiguration message, the UE 201 may reconfigure the RRC connection to detach from the source SeNB 2030 and synchronize to the target SeNB 2040 in order to switch from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040. For example, the UE 201 may perform the synchronization to the target SeNB 2040 and access the target small cell via RACH, following a contention-free or contention-based procedure depending on whether a dedicated preamble was indicated or not.
After synchronizing with the target SeNB 2040 and being able to access the target small cell, the UE 201 may transmit a RRC connection reconfiguration complete message to the MeNB 202 to inform that the RRC connection
reconfiguration has been completed and the SeNB resources or the small cell have been successfully switched (signalling 2010). The MeNB 202 may then transmit a SeNB switch complete message or a small cell switch complete message (not illustrated in Figure 20) to the source SeNB 2030 (signalling 2011) and the target
SeNB 2040 (signalling 2012). Alternatively, the UE 201 may send the
RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete message to the MeNB 202 as well as the target SeNB 2040, so that the SeNB switch complete message or the small cell switch complete message from the MeNB 202 to the target SeNB 2040 can be omitted.
When the UE 201 can access the target small cell, based on the SI approach, it may transmit an uplink packet to the target SeNB 2040 over the DRB, which may be transferred by the target SeNB 2040 to the core network system 204. The target SeNB 2040 may further transmit a path switch request to the MME 214 to request switching a downlink path of the EPS bearer from between the source SeNB 2030 and the core network system 204 to between the target SeNB 2040 and the core network system 204 (signalling 2013), wherein the DRB of the EPS bearer has already been switched from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040. The path switch request may include a list of the EPS bearer(s) whose DRB(s) have been switched. In some embodiments, the path switch request may further indicate to keep other bearer(s) unreleased, wherein the other bearer(s) may include those not listed in the request, such as the DRBs and/or the SRBs related to the MeNB 202. Alternatively, the MeNB 202 may send a separate request of keeping the other bearer(s) unreleased to the MME 214. In other embodiments, it may be the MeNB 202 rather than the target SeNB 2040 which may send the path switch request to the MME 214.
Upon receipt of the path switch request, the MME 214 may transmit a modify bearer request to the S-GW 224 to request modifying the downlink path of the listed EPS bearer(s) to go through the target SeNB 2040(signalling 2014). In response to the request, the S-GW 224 may switch the downlink path, so that the downlink packet data can be transmitted from the core network system 204 to the UE 201 through the target SeNB 2040, based on the SI approach. In some embodiments, the S-GW 224 may further send an End Marker to the source SeNB 2030 indicating an end of downlink packet data transmission on the old path (signalling 2015). The source SeNB 2030 may send an End Marker to the target SeNB 2040 indicating an end of data forwarding from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040 (signalling 2016).
After the completion of the bearer modification, the S-GW 224 may send with a modify bearer response to the MME 214 (signalling 2017), which may trigger the MME 214 to transmit an acknowledgement message to the target SeNB 2040, such as a path switch request ACK (signalling 2018).
Other embodiments may implement other modifications and variations to on the method as depicted in Figure 20. In some embodiments, it may be the source SeNB 2030 rather than the MeNB 202 which makes the decision of switching the SeNB resources or the small cell. In such case, the SeNB switch request or the small cell switch request may be sent from the source SeNB 2030 to MeNB 202 as well as the target SeNB 2040, and the SeNB switch request ACK or the small cell switch request ACK may be sent from the MeNB 202 and the target SeNB 2040 to the source SeNB 2030.
Figure 21 illustrates an embodiment of a signalling procedure for the wireless communication system 200 to switch the SeNB resources by switching the bearer from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040, based on the X2 approach.
In some embodiments, the signalling procedure of Figure 21 may be similar as that of Figure 20. For example, signalling 2101 to 2107 may be similar as signalling 2001 to 2007, and signalling 2109 to 2111 may be similar as signalling 2010 to 2012. However, due to the X2 approach, before switching the DRB of the EPS bearer from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040, the source SeNB 2030 may communicate the packet data with the core network system 204 through the MeNB 202. Moreover, in some embodiments, after the completion of the RRC connection reconfiguration to switch the DRB from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040, the transmissions of the packet data between the target SeNB 2040 and the core network system 204 over the EPS bearer may still need to go through the MeNB 202. In this way, there may be no need to request the core network system 204 to modify the downlink path of the EPS bearer from the SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040. In other words, the signalling 2013 to 2018 in Figure 20 may be omitted from the Figure 21.
Other embodiments may implement other modifications and variations to on the method as depicted in Figure 21. In some embodiments, it may be the source
SeNB 2030 rather than the MeNB 202 which makes the decision of switching the SeNB resources or the small cell. In such case, the SeNB release request or the small cell release request may be sent from the source SeNB 2030 to MeNB 202 as well as the target SeNB 2040, and the the SeNB release request ACK or the small cell release request ACK may be sent from the MeNB 202 and the target SeNB 2040 to the source SeNB 2030.
Figure 22 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the UE 201 of the wireless communication system 200 to switch the SeNB resources or the small cell by switching the bearer from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040.
In some embodiments, in block 2201, the communication module 211 or other device of the UE 201 may communicate packet data from/to the source SeNB 2030 of the source small cell over the DRB of the EPS bearer. Under the dual connectivity, the communication module 211 or other device may communicate another packet data from/to the MeNB 202 over another DRB of another EPS bearer or communicate the signalling with the MeNB 202 over the SRB.
In block 2202, the communication module 211 or other device may receive a message related to the measurement control from the MeNB 202. In some embodiments, the message may configure the UE measurement procedures according to area restriction information. Measurements provided by the MeNB 202 may assist the function controlling the UE's connection mobility. In response to the message, the communication module 211 or other device of UE 201 may perform the measurement and may transmit the measurement report to the MeNB 202 in block 2203. Based on the measurement report, the MeNB 202 or source SeNB 2030 may make the decision of switching the SeNB resources or the small cell by switching the DRB from the source SeNB 2030 for the source small cell to the target SeNB 2040 for the target small cell. This may happen under certain circumstances, such as when the UE 201 moving from the source small cell to the target small cell. On the other hand, although not being illustrated in Figure 22, it should be understood that the MeNB 202 may make a decision of not switching the SeNB resources or the small cell, for example, when the measurement report indicates that the radio quality in the source small cell is good enough.
In response to the decision of switching the SeNB resources or the small cell, the communication module 211 (e.g., RRC layer) or other device may receive, from the MeNB 202, the message of reconfiguring the RRC connection to switch the SeNB resources or the small cell by switching the DRB from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040, in block 2204. The request may be embodied as, without limitation, a RRCconnectionreconfiguration message and may include information necessary for switching the SeNB resources or the small cell, such as the source SeNB inforamtion, source small cell information, the target SeNB information, the target small cell information, and/or others.
In some embodiments, based on the information in the
RRCconnectionreconfiguration message, the communication module 211 or other device may reconfigure the RRC connection to detach from the source SeNB 2030 and synchronize with the target SeNB 2040 in order to switch the small cell, in block 2205. For example, the UE 201 may perform the synchronization to the target SeNB 2040 and access the target small cell via RACH, following a contention-free or contention-based procedure depending on whether a dedicated preamble was indicated or not.
After synchronizing with the target SeNB 2040 and being able to access the target small cell, the communication module 211 (e.g., RRC layer) or other device may transmit the RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete message to the MeNB 202 and/or the target SeNB 2040 to inform that the RRC connection reconfiguration has been completed and the SeNB resources or the small cell has been successfully switched, in block 2206. In block 2207, the communication module 211 or other device may communicate the packet data with the core network system 204 over the DRB through the target SeNB 2040.
Figure 23 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the MeNB 202 of the wireless communication system 200 to switch the SeNB resources or the small cell by switching the bearer from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040, based on the S 1 approach.
In some embodiments, based on the SI approach, the UE 201 may communicate packet data with the core network system 204 over the DRB of the EPS bearer through the source SeNB 2030 of the source small cell. Under the dual
connectivity, the UE 201 may communicate another packet data with the MeNB 202 over another DRB of another EPS bearer or communicate the signalling with the MeNB 202 over the SRB.
As illustrated in Figure 23, in some embodiments, the communication module 212 or other device of the MeNB 202 may transmit the message related to measurement control to the UE 201, in block 2301. In some embodiments, the message may configure the UE measurement procedures according to area restriction information. Measurements provided by the MeNB 202 may assist the function controlling the UE's connection mobility. In block 2302, the
communication module 212 or other device may receive the measurement report from the UE 201. In block 2303, based on the measurement report, the control module 222 of the MeNB 202 may make the decision of switching the SeNB resources or the small cell by switching the DRB from the source small cell to the target small cell. This may happen under certain circumstances, such as when the UE 201 moving from the source small cell to the target small cell. Although not being illustrated in Figure 23, based on the measurement report, the MeNB 202 may make a different decision, i.e., not switching the small cell.
In some embodiments, in response to the decision of switching the SeNB resources or the small cell, the communication module 212 or other device may send the request of switching the SeNB resources or the small cell to the target SeNB 2040, in block 2304. The request may be embodied as the SeNB switch request or the small cell switch request (not illustrated in Figure 23), and may include, without limitation, information necessary for preparing the DRB switch, such as elements (IE) like TYPE field indicating whether the SeNB receiving the message may add the DRB (i.e., the target SeNB) or release the DRB (i.e., the source SeNB), cause for the SeNB switch or the small cell switch, a list of E-RABs to be setup or released, characteristics of the E-RABs (such as E-RAB parameters, TNL address information, and/or others), a UE C-RNTI in the source small cell or the target small cell, UE security capabilities for S 1 approach, security context for SI approach, and/or others.
In some embodiments, in block 2305, the communication module 212 or other device may receive the message from the target SeNB 2040, if the target
SeNB 2040 decides that the SeNB switch request or the small cell switch request (not illustrated in Figure 23) is acceptable. The message may be embodied as the SeNB switch request ACK or the small cell switch request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 23), and may include, without limitation, information such as the C-RNTI, the cause for the SeNB switch or the small cell switch, a list of admitted E-RABs including TNL address information for the respective E-RAB, a list of not admitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB release or the small cell release, and/or others.
In some embodiments, on the other hand, the communication module 212 or other device may send the SeNB switch request or the small cell switch request (not illustrated in Figure 23) to the source SeNB 2030 in block 2306, and may receive the SeNB switch request ACK or the small cell switch request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 23) from the source SeNB 2030 in block 2307.
In some embodiments, upon receipt of the acknowledgment messages from the source SeNB 2030 and the target SeNB 2040, the communication module 212 (e.g., RRC layer) or other device may transmit to the UE 201 the message of reconfiguring the RRC connection to switch the small cell by switching the DRB from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040, in block 2308. The request may be embodied as, without limitation, a RRCconnectionreconfiguration message and may include information necessary for switching the SeNB resources or the small cell, such as the source SeNB information, the source small cell information, the target SeNB information, the target small cell information and/or others.
In some embodiments, in order to trigger the delivery of buffered and in- transmit packet data from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040, the communication module 212 or other device may transmit the SeNB SN status transfer message or the small cell SN status transfer message (not illustrated in Figure 23) to the source SeNB 2030 to request the transfer of the buffered and in- transit packet data to the target SeNB 2040, in block 2309. The SeNB SN status transfer message or the small cell SN status transfer message may include, without limitation, the UE RNTI in the target small cell, the target small cell information such as the target small cell identifier, the target SeNB information such as the target SeNB identifier, and/or others.
After UE 201 successfully synchronizes with the target SeNB 2040 and is able to access the target small cell, the communication module 212 (e.g., RRC layer) or other device may receive the RRCconnectionreconfiguration complete message from the UE 201 that may inform that the RRC connection reconfiguration has been completed and the SeNB resources or the small cell have been successfully switched, in block 2310. The communication module 212 or other device may then transmit the SeNB switch complete message or the small cell switch complete message (not illustrated in Figure 23) to the source SeNB 2030 and the target SeNB 2040, in block 2311.
Other embodiments may implement other modifications and variations to on the method as depicted in Figure 23. For example, in some embodiments, if the UE
201 sends the RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete message to the MeNB 202 as well as the target SeNB 2040, the SeNB switch complete message or the small cell switch complete message from the MeNB 202 to the target SeNB 2040 can be omitted. For another example, it may be the source SeNB 2030 rather than the MeNB 202 which makes the decision of switching the SeNB resources or the small cell. In such case, the SeNB release request or the small cell release request may be sent from the source SeNB 2030 to MeNB 202 as well as the target SeNB 2040, and the SeNB release ACK or the small cell release ACK may be sent from the MeNB
202 and the target SeNB 2040 to the source SeNB 2030. For yet another exmaple, the communication module 212 or other device may further transmit the path switch request to the MME 214 to request switching the downlink path of the EPS bearer from between the source SeNB 2030 and the core network system 204 to between the target SeNB 2040 and the core network system 204, wherein the DRB of the EPS bearer has already been switched from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040. The path switch request may include the list of the EPS bearer(s) whose DRB(s) have been switched. In some embodiments, the path switch request may further indicate to keep other bearer(s) unreleased, wherein the other bearer(s) may include those not listed in the request, such as the DRBs and/or the SRBs related to the MeNB 202.
Figure 24 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the MeNB 202 of the wireless communication system 200 to switch the SeNB resources or the small cell
by switching the bearer from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040, based on the X2 approach.
In some embodiments, the method of Figure 24 may be similar as that of Figure 23. For example, blocks 2401 to 2408 may be similar as blocks 2301 to 2308, and blocks 2411-2412 may be similar as blocks 2310-2311. However, due to the X2 approach, before switching the DRB of the EPS bearer from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040, the source SeNB 2030 may communicate the packet data with the core network system 204 through the MeNB 202.
Other embodiments may implement other modifications and variations to on the method as depicted in Figure 24. For example, in some embodiments, if the UE 201 sends the RRCconnectionreconfigurationcomplete message to the MeNB 202 as well as the target SeNB 2040, the SeNB switch complete message or the small cell switch complete message (not illustrated in Figure 24) from the MeNB 202 to the target SeNB 2040 can be omitted. For another example, it may be the source SeNB 2030 rather than the MeNB 202 which makes the decision of switching the SeNB resources or the small cell. In such case, the SeNB release request or the small cell release request (not illustrated in Figure 24) may be sent from the source SeNB 2030 to the MeNB 202 as well as to the target SeNB 2040. Further, the SeNB release request ACK or the small cell release ACK (not illustrated in Figure 24) may be sent from the MeNB 202 and the target SeNB 2040 to the source SeNB 2030.
Figure 25 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the source SeNB 2030 of the wireless communication system 200 to switch the SeNB resources or the small cell by switching the bearer from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB, based on the S 1 approach.
In some embodiments, based on the SI approach, the UE 201 may communicate the packet data with the core network system 204 over the DRB of the EPS bearer through the source SeNB 2030 of the source small cell. Under the dual connectivity, the UE 201 may communicate another packet data with the MeNB 202 over another DRB of another EPS bearer or communicate the signalling with the MeNB 202 over the SRB.
In some embodiments, the MeNB 202 may make the decision of switching the SeNB resources or the small cell by switching the DRB from the source SeNB
2030 to the target SeNB 2040. This may happen under certain circumstances, such as when the UE 201 moving from the source small cell to the target small cell. In such case, the communication module 2031 or other device of the source SeNB 2030 may receive, from the MeNB 202, the request of switching the SeNB resources or the small cell, in block 2501. The request may be embodied as the SeNB switch request or the small cell switch request (not illustrated in Figure 25), and may include, without limitation, information necessary for preparing the DRB switch, such as elements (IE) like TYPE field indicating whether the SeNB receiving the message may add the DRB (i.e., the target SeNB) or release the DRB (i.e., the source SeNB), cause for the SeNB switch or the small cell switch, a list of E-RABs to be setup or released, characteristics of E-RAB (such as E-RAB parameters, TNL address information, and/or others), a UE C-RNTI in the source small cell or the target small cell, UE security capabilities for SI approach, security context for SI approach, and/or others.
In block 2502, the communication module 2031 or other device may perform the admission control and determine that the request is acceptable. Moreover, in bock 2502, the communication module 2031 or other device may send the message to the MeNB 202, such as the SeNB switch request ACK or the small cell switch request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 25). The SeNB switch request ACK or the small cell switch request ACK may include, without limitation, information such as the C-RNTI, the cause for the SeNB switch or the small cell switch, a list of admitted E-RABs including TNL address information for the respective E-RAB, a list of unadmitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB release or the small cell release, and/or others.
On the other hand, although not being illustrated in Figure 25, it should be understood that the source SeNB 2030 may make a decision of not admitting the SeNB switch request or the small cell switch request, for example, when the measurement report indicates that the radio quality in the small cell is good enough
In block 2503, the communication module 2031 or other device may receive, from the MeNB 202, the SeNB SN status transfer message or the small cell SN status transfer message (not illustrated in Figure 25) which may trigger the delivery of buffered and in-transmit packet data from the source SeNB 2030 to the target
SeNB 2040. In response to the SeNB SN status transfer message or the small cell SN status transfer message, the communication module 2031 or other device may send the SN status message to the target SeNB 2040. In some embodiments, the communication module 2031 or other device may convey uplink PDCP (packet data convergence protocol) SN receiver status and/or downlink PDCP SN transmitter status of E-RABs for which PDCP status preservation applies. Then, in block 2505, the communication module 2031 or other device may forward the buffered and in- transit packet data to the target SeNB 2040.
After the UE 201 detaches from the source small cell and synchronizes to the target small cell, the communication module 2031 or other device may receive, from the MeNB 202, the SeNB switch complete message or the small cell switch complete message (not illustrated in Figure 25) in block 2506, which may inform that the SeNB switch or the small cell switch has been completed. In block 2507, the communication module 2031 or other device may receive, from the core network system 204 (e.g., S-GW 224), the End Marker indicating the end of downlink packet data transmission from the core network system 204 to the source SeNB 2030 on the old path. In block 2508, the communication module 2031 or other device may send, to the target SeNB 2040, the End Marker indicating the end of data forwarding from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040.
Other embodiments may implement other modifications and variations to on the method as depicted in Figure 25. For example, it may be the source SeNB 2030 rather than the MeNB 202 which makes the decision of switching the small cell. In such case, the SeNB release request or the small cell release request may be sent from the source SeNB 2030 to MeNB 202 as well as to the target SeNB 2040, and the SeNB release ACK or the small cell release ACK may be sent from the MeNB 202 and the target SeNB 2040 to the source SeNB 2030.
Figure 26 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the source SeNB 2030 of the wireless communication system 200 to switch the bearer from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040, based on the X2 approach.
In some embodiments, due to the X2 approach, before switching the DRB of the EPS bearer from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040, the source SeNB 2030 may communicate the packet data between the UE 201 and the core
network system 204 through the MeNB 202. In other words, the source SeNB 2030 may receive the packet data from the UE 201 and transmit it to the core network system 204 through the MeNB 202, and/or receive the packet data from the core network system through the MeNB 202 and transmit it to the UE 201. Further, under the dual connectivity, the UE 201 may communicate another packet data with the MeNB 202 over another DRB of another EPS bearer or communicate the signalling with the MeNB 202 over the SRB.
In some embodiments, the communication module 2031 or other device of the source SeNB 2030 may receive, from the MeNB 202, the request of switching the SeNB resources or the small cell in block 2601. The request may be embodied as the SeNB switch request or the small cell switch request (not illustrated in Figure 26), and may include, without limitation, information necessary for preparing the DRB switch, such as elements (IE) like TYPE field indicating whether the SeNB receiving the message may add the DRB (i.e., the target SeNB) or release the DRB (i.e., the source SeNB), cause for the SeNB switch or the small cell switch, a list of E-RABs to be setup or released, characteristics of E-RAB (such as E-RAB parameters, TNL address information, and/or others), a UE C-RNTI in the source small cell or the target small cell, UE security capabilities for SI approach, security context for SI approach, and/or others.
In block 2602, the communication module 2031 or other device may perform the admission control and determine that the request is acceptable. Moreover, in bock 2602, the communication module 2031 may send the message to the MeNB 202, such as the SeNB switch request ACK or the small cell switch request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 26). The SeNB switch request ACK or the small cell switch request ACK may include, without limitation, information such as the C- RNTI, the cause for the SeNB switch or the small cell switch, a list of admitted E- RABs including TNL address information for the respective E-RABs, a list of unadmitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB release or the small cell release, and/or others. On the other hand, although not being illustrated in Figure 26, it should be understood that the source SeNB 2030 may make the decision of not admitting the SeNB switch reqesut or the small cell switch request.
In some embodiments, after the UE 201 detaches from the source small cell and synchronizes to the target small cell, the communication module 2031 or other device may receive, from the MeNB 202, the SeNB switch complete message or the small cell switch complete message (not illustrated in Figure 26) in block 2603, which may inform that the SeNB resources switch or the small cell switch has been completed.
Other embodiments may implement other modifications and variations to on the method as depicted in Figure 26. For example, it may be the source SeNB 2030 rather than the MeNB 202 which makes the decision of switching the SeNB resources or the small cell. In such case, the SeNB release request or the small cell release request may be sent from the source SeNB 2030 to MeNB 202 as well as to the target SeNB 2040. Further, the SeNB release request ACK or the small cell release request ACK may be sent from the MeNB 202 and the target SeNB 2040 to the source SeNB 2030.
Figure 27 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the target SeNB 2040 of the wireless communication system 200 to switch the bearer from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040, based on the SI approach.
In some embodiments, based on the SI approach, before switching the small cell, the UE 201 may communicate the packet data with the core network system 204 over the DRB of the EPS bearer through the source SeNB 2030 of the source small cell. Under the dual connectivity, the UE 201 may communicate another packet data with the MeNB 202 over another DRB of another EPS bearer or communicate the signalling with the MeNB 202 over the SRB.
In some embodiments, it may be decided to switch the SeNB resources or the small cell by switching the DRB from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040. This may happen under certain circumstances, such as when the UE 201 moving from the source small cell to the target small cell. In such case, the communication module 2041 or other device of the target SeNB 2040 may receive the request of switching the DRB from the MeNB 202 or the source SeNB 2030 in block 2701. The request may be embodied as the SeNB switch request or the small cell switch request (not illustrated in Figure 27), and may include, without limitation, information necessary for preparing the DRB switch, such as elements (IE) like
TYPE field indicating whether the SeNB receiving the message may add the DRB (i.e., the target SeNB) or release the DRB (i.e., the source SeNB), cause for the SeNB switch or the small cell switch, a list of E-RABs to be setup or released, characteristics of E-RAB (such as E-RAB parameters, TNL address information, and/or others), a UE C-RNTI in the source small cell or the target small cell, UE security capabilities for SI approach, security context for SI approach, and/or others.
In block 2702, the communication device 2041 or other device may perform the admission control and determine that the request is acceptable. In block 2703, the communication module 2041 or other device may send the message to the MeNB 202 or the source SeNB 2030, such as the SeNB switch request or the small cell switch request ACK (not illustrated in Figure 27). The SeNB switch request ACK or the small cell switch request ACK may include, without limitation, information such as the C-RNTI, the cause for the SeNB switch or the small cell switch, a list of admitted E-RABs (such as E-RAB parameters, TNL address information, and/or others), a list of unadmitted E-RABs, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB release or the small cell release, and/or others. On the other hand, although not being illustrated in Figure 27, it should be understood that the target SeNB 2040 may make the decision of not admitting the SeNB switch request or the small cell switch request.
In some embodiments, in block 2704, the communication module 2041 or other device may receive the SeNB SN status transfer message or the small cell SN status transfer message (not illustrated in Figure 27) from the source SeNB 2030. In some embodiments, the source SeNB 2030 may convey uplink PDCP (packet data convergence protocol) SN receiver status and/or downlink PDCP SN transmitter status of E-RABs for which PDCP status preservation applies. Then, in block 2705, the communication module 2041 or other device may receive the buffered and in- transit packet data from the source SeNB 2040, and in block 2706, the target SeNB 2040 may buffer the packet data, for example, in the memory or the data storage of the target SeNB 2040.
In some embodiments, in response to the RRCconnectionreconfiguration message, the UE 201 may reconfigure the RRC connection to detach from the source SeNB 2030 and synchronize with the target SeNB 2040 in order to switch
the DRB from the source small cell to the target small cell, in block 2707. For example, the UE 201 may perform the synchronization to the target SeNB 2040 and access the target small cell via RACH, following a contention-free or contention- based procedure depending on whether a dedicated preamble was indicated or not.
After synchronizing with the UE 201 which may be able to access the target small cell, in block 2708, the communication module 2041 (e.g., RRC layer) or other device may receive the RRC connection reconfiguration complete message from the UE 201. Alternatively, the communication module 2041 (e.g., RRC layer) or other device may receive, from the MeNB 202, the SeNB switch complete message or the small cell switch complete message (not illustrated in Figure 27), either of which may inform that the DRB has been successfully switched from the source small cell to the target small cell. When the UE 201 can access the target small cell, based on the SI approach, the communication module 2041 or other device may receive/transmit packet data from/to the UE 201, in block 2709.
In some embodiments, in block 2710, the communication module 2041 or other device may further transmit the path switch request to the MME 214 to request switching the downlink path of the EPS bearer from between the source SeNB 2030 and the core network system 204 to between the target SeNB 2040 and the core network system 204, wherein the DRB of the EPS bearer has already been switched from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040. The path switch request may include a list of the EPS bearer(s) whose DRB(s) has been switched. In some embodiments, the path switch request may further indicate to keep other bearer(s) unreleased, wherein the other bearer(s) may include those not listed in the request, such as the DRBs and/or the SRBs related to the MeNB 202. Alternatively, the target SeNB 2040 or the MeNB 202 may send a separate request of keeping the other bearer(s) unreleased to the MME 214. In other embodiments, it may be the MeNB 202 rather than the target SeNB 2040 which may send the path switch request to the MME 214.
With modification of the downlink path of the EPS bearer to go through the target SeNB 2040, the target SeNB 2040 may be able to receive the packet data from the core network system 204, such as the S-GW 224. In this way, the communication path between the UE 201 and the core network system 204 through
the target SeNB 2040 has been completed. Further, the communication module 2041 or other device may receive the acknowledgement message, such as the patch switch request ACK from the MME 214, in block 2711. In block 2712, the communication module 2041 or other device may receive the End Marker from the source SeNB 2030 indicating the end of data forwarding from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040.
Other embodiments may implement other modifications and variations to on the method as depicted in Figure 27. For example, it may be the source SeNB 2030 rather than the MeNB 202 which makes the decision of switching the SeNB resources or the small cell. In such case, the SeNB release request or the small cell release request may be sent from the source SeNB 2030 to MeNB 202 as well as to the target SeNB 2040. Further, the SeNB release ACK or the small cell release ACK may be sent from the MeNB 202 and the target SeNB 2040 to the source SeNB 2030.
Figure 28 illustrates an embodiment of a method for the target SeNB 2040 of the wireless communication system 200 to switch the SeNB resources or the small cell by switching the bearer from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040, based on the X2 approach.
In some embodiments, the method of Figure 28 may be similar as that of Figure 27. For example, blocks 2801 to 2803 and blocks 2804-2805 may be similar as blocks 2701 to 2703, and blocks 2707 to 2708. However, due to the X2 approach, before switching the DRB of the EPS bearer from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040, the source SeNB 2030 may communicate the packet data with the core network system 204 through the MeNB 202. Moreover, in some embodiments, after the completion of the RRC connection reconfiguration to switch the DRB from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040, the transmissions of the packet data between the target SeNB 2040 and the core network system 204 over the EPS bearer may still need to go through the MeNB 202. In this way, there may be no need to forward the buffer and in transit packet data from the source SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB 2040, or to request the core network system 204 to modify the downlink path of the EPS bearer from the SeNB 2030 to the target SeNB
2040. In other words, the blocks 2704-2706 and blocks 2710-2712 of Figure 27 may be omitted from the Figure 28.
Other embodiments may implement other modifications and variations to on the method as depicted in Figure 28. For example, it may be the source SeNB 2030 rather than the MeNB 202 which makes the decision of switching the SeNB resources or the small cell. In such case, the SeNB release request or the small cell release request may be sent from the source SeNB 2030 to MeNB 202 as well as to the target SeNB 2040, and the SeNB release ACK or the small cell release ACK may be sent from the MeNB 202 and the target SeNB 2040 to the source SeNB 2030.
Figure 29 schematically illustrates an example system 2900 in accordance with various embodiments. The system 2900 may comprise one or more processor(s) 2904, system control logic 2908 coupled with at least one of the processor(s) 2904, system memory 2912 coupled with system control logic 2908, non- volatile memory (NVM)/storage 2916 coupled with system control logic 2908, and a network interface 2920 coupled with system control logic 2908.
Processor(s) 2904 may include one or more single-core or multi-core processors. Processor(s) 2904 may include any combination of general-purpose processors and dedicated processors (e.g., graphics processors, application processors, baseband processors, etc.). In an embodiment in which the system 2900 implements the UE 201, processors(s) 2904 may be configured to execute one or more embodiment(s) as illustrated in Figures 2-4, 6-8, 13-15, or 20-22 in accordance with various embodiments. In an embodiment in which the system 2900 implements the MeNB 202, processor(s) 2904 may be configured to execute one or more embodiment(s) as illustrated in Figures 2-3, 5-7, 9-10, 13-14, 16-17, 20-21, or 23-24 in accordance with various embodiments. In an embodiment in which the system 2900 implements the SeNB 203, processor(s) 2904 may be configured to execute one or more embodiment(s) as illustrated in Figures 2, 6-7, 11-14, orl8-19 in accordance with various embodiments. In an embodiment in which the system 2900 implements the source SeNB 2030, processor(s) 2904 may be configured to execute one or more embodiment(s) as illustrated in Figures 2, 20-21 or 25-26 in accordance with various embodiments. In an embodiment in which the system 2900
implements the target SeNB 2040, processor(s) 2904 may be configured to execute one or more embodiment(s) as illustrated in Figures 2, 20-21 or 27-28 in accordance with various embodiments.
System control logic 2908 for one embodiment may include any suitable interface controllers to provide for any suitable interface to at least one of the processor(s) 2904 and/or to any suitable device or component in communication with system control logic 2908.
System control logic 2908 for one embodiment may include one or more memory controller(s) to provide an interface to system memory 2912. System memory 2912 may be used to load and store data and/or instructions, for example, for system 2900. System memory 2912 for one embodiment may include any suitable volatile memory, such as suitable dynamic random access memory
(DRAM), for example.
NVM/storage 2916 may include one or more tangible, non-transitory computer-readable media used to store data and/or instructions, for example.
NVM/storage 2916 may include any suitable non-volatile memory, such as flash memory, for example, and/or may include any suitable non-volatile storage device(s), such as one or more hard disk drive(s) (HDD(s)), one or more compact disk (CD) drive(s), and/or one or more digital versatile disk (DVD) drive(s), for example.
The NVM/storage 2916 may include a storage resource physically part of a device on which the system 2900 is installed or it may be accessible by, but not necessarily a part of, the device. For example, the NVM/storage 2916 may be accessed over a network via the network interface 2920.
System memory 2912 and NVM/storage 2916 may respectively include, in particular, temporal and persistent copies of instructions 2924. Instructions 2924 may include instructions that when executed by at least one of the processor(s) 2904 result in the system 2900 implementing one or more of method(s) as described with reference to Figs. 4-5, 8-12, 15-19, and 22-28. In various embodiments, instructions 2924, or hardware, firmware, and/or software components thereof, may
additionally/alternatively be located in the system control logic 2908, the network interface 2920, and/or the processor(s) 2904.
Network interface 2920 may have a transceiver (e.g., the communication module 211, 212 or 213 in Figure 2, and the communication module 2031 or 2041 in Figures 20-21) to provide a radio interface for system 2900 to communicate over one or more network(s) and/or with any other suitable device. In various embodiments, the communication module 211, 212 or 213 may be integrated with other components of system 2900. For example, the communication module 211, 212, 213, 2031 or 2041 may include a processor of the processor(s) 2904, memory of the system memory 2912, NVM/Storage of NVM/Storage 2916, and/or a firmware device (not being illustrated) having instructions that when executed by at least one of the processor(s) 2904 result in the system 2900 implementing one or more of method(s) as described with reference to Figs. 4-5, 8-12, 15-19, and 22-28.
Network interface 2920 may include any suitable hardware and/or firmware. Network interface 2920 may include a plurality of antennas to provide a multiple input, multiple output radio interface. Network interface 2920 for one embodiment may include, for example, a network adapter, a wireless network adapter, a telephone modem, and/or a wireless modem.
For one embodiment, at least one of the processor(s) 2904 may be packaged together with logic for one or more controller(s) of system control logic 2908. For one embodiment, at least one of the processor(s) 2904 may be packaged together with logic for one or more controllers of system control logic 2908 to form a System in Package (SiP). For one embodiment, at least one of the processor(s) 2904 may be integrated on the same die with logic for one or more controller(s) of system control logic 2908. For one embodiment, at least one of the processor(s) 2904 may be integrated on the same die with logic for one or more controller(s) of system control logic 2908 to form a System on Chip (SoC).
The system 2900 may further include input/output (I/O) devices 2932. The I/O devices 2932 may include user interfaces designed to enable user interaction with the system 2900, peripheral component interfaces designed to enable peripheral component interaction with the system 2900, and/or sensors designed to determine environmental conditions and/or location information related to the system 2900.
In various embodiments, the user interfaces could include, but are not limited to, a display (e.g., a liquid crystal display, a touch screen display, etc.), a speaker, a microphone, one or more cameras (e.g., a still camera and/or a video camera), a flashlight (e.g., a light emitting diode flash), and a keyboard.
In various embodiments, the peripheral component interfaces may include, but are not limited to, a non- volatile memory port, an audio jack, and a power supply interface.
In various embodiments, the sensors may include, but are not limited to, a gyro sensor, an accelerometer, a proximity sensor, an ambient light sensor, and a positioning unit. The positioning unit may also be part of, or interact with, the network interface 2920 to communicate with components of a positioning network, e.g., a global positioning system (GPS) satellite.
In various embodiments, the system 2900 may be a mobile computing device such as, but not limited to, a laptop computing device, a tablet computing device, a netbook, a mobile phone, etc. In other embodiments, the system 2900 may be an eNB, such as, but not limited to, a master eNB, a secondary eNB, etc. In various embodiments, system 2900 may have more or less components, and/or different architectures.
The disclosure may include various example embodiments disclosed below.
In example embodiment 1 , a method, apparatus or system to be employed by a user equipment (UE) may comprise a communication module to communicate with a core network on a first bearer through a first evolved Node B (eNB), receive, from the first eNB, a first message of reconfiguring a radio resource control (RRC) connection to establish a second bearer between the UE and the core network through a second eNB; synchronize, in response to the message, with the second eNB in order to establish the second bearer; and communicate with the core network on the second bearer, and continue communicating other with the core network on the first bearer.
In example embodiment 2, the first eNB according to the example embodiment 1 may be a master eNB (MeNB).
In example embodiment 3, the second eNB according to any of the example embodiments 1-2 may be a secondary eNB (SeNB).
In example embodiment 4, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 1-3 may further transmit, to the first eNB, a second message informing that the RRC connection reconfiguration has been completed.
In example embodiment 5, the first message according to any of the example embodiments 1-4 may comprise bearer context information related to the second bearer and eNB information related to the second eNB information.
In example embodiment 6, the first message according to any of the example embodiments 1-5 may comprise a new cell-radio network temporary identifier (C- RNTI), security algorithm identifiers, dedicated RACH preamble for a second cell associated to the second eNB, and/or others.
In example embodiment 7, a method, apparatus or system to be employed by a first evolved Node B (eNB), may comprise a communication module to communicate with a user equipment (UE) and a core network on a first bearer through the first eNB; receive, from the UE or the core network, a first request of establishing a second bearer between the UE and the core network; transmit, to a second eNB, a second request of adding the second eNB for the second bearer; and receive, from the second eNB, a response to the second request to acknowledge that the second eNB can be added for the second bearer.
In example embodiment 8, the first eNB according to the example embodiment 7 may be a master eNB (MeNB).
In example embodiment 9, the second eNB according to any of the example embodiments 7-8 may be a secondary eNB (SeNB).
In example embodiment 10, the second request according to any of the example embodiments 7-9 may be a SeNB addition request comprising a cause for the SeNB addition, a list of bearers to be setup, UE security capabilities, security context, and/or others.
In example embodiment 11, the response according to any of the example embodiments 7-10 may be a SeNB addition acknowledgment message comprising a list of admitted bearers, a list of not admitted bearers, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB addition, and/or others.
In example embodiment 12, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 7-11 may further transmit, to or from the UE, a message
of reconfiguring a radio resource control (RRC) connection to establish the second bearer, wherein the message includes bearer context information related to the second bearer and eNB information related to the second eNB.
In example embodiment 13, the message according to any of the example embodiments 7-12 may comprise a new cell-radio network temporary identifier (C- RNTI), security algorithm identifiers, dedicated random access channel (RACH) preamble for a second cell associated with the second eNB, and/or others.
In example embodiment 14, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 7-13 may further receive, from the UE, another message informing that the RRC connection reconfiguration has been completed; and transmit, to the core network, another response to the first request to inform that the second bearer has been redirected to the second eNB.
In example embodiment 15, the first eNB according to any of the example embodiments 7-14 may continue communicating with the UE and the core network on the first bearer through the first cell, while the UE further communicates with the core network on the second bearer through the second eNB.
In example embodiment 16, a method, apparatus or system to be employed by a first evolved Node B (eNB), may comprise a communication module to receive, from a second eNB for a second cell, a request of adding the first eNB for a first bearer to be established between a user equipment (UE) and a core network; transmit, to the second eNB, a response to the first request to acknowledge that the first eNB can be added for the first bearer; synchronize with the UE in order to establish the first bearer; and communicate with the UE and the core network on the first bearer through the first eNB, wherein, the UE communicates with the core network on a second bearer through the second eNB.
In example embodiment 17, the first eNB according to the example embodiment 16 may be a secondary eNB (SeNB).
In example embodiment 18, the second eNB according to any of the example embodiments 16-17 may be a macro eNB (MeNB).
In example embodiment 19, the first request according to any of the example embodiments 16-18 may be a SeNB addition request comprising a cause for the
SeNB addition, a list of bearers to be setup, UE security capabilities, security context, and/or others.
In example embodiment 20, the response according to any of the example embodiments 16-19 may be a SeNB addition acknowledgement message comprising a list of admitted bearers, a list of not admitted bearers, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for SeNB addition, and/or others.
In example embodiment 21, a method, apparatus or system to be employed by a user equipment (UE), may comprise a communication module to communicate with a core network on one or more data bearers through a first evolved Node B (eNB); receive, from the first eNB, a message of reconfiguring a radio resource control (RRC) connection to switch at least one of the one or more data bearers from the first eNB to a second eNB; synchronize with the second eNB, in response to the message; and communicate with the core network on the at least one of the data bearers through the second eNB, while communicating with the first eNB on a signaling bearer through the first eNB.
In example embodiment 22, the first eNB according to the example embodiment 21 may be a master eNB (MeNB).
In example embodiment 23, the second eNB according to any of the example embodiments 21-22 may be a secondary eNB (SeNB).
In example embodiment 24, the message according to any of the example embodiments 21-23 may be a RRCconnectionreconfiguration message comprising a new cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI), second eNB security algorithm identifiers and optionally dedicated random access channel (RACH) preamble, second eNB system information blocks, and/or others.
In example embodiment 25, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 21-24 may further continue communicating with the core network on a remaining data bearer of the data bearers which hasn't been switched from the first eNB to the second eNB.
In example embodiment 26, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 21-25 may further transmit, to the first eNB or the second eNB, another message informing that the RRC connection reconfiguration has been completed.
In example embodiment 27, a method, apparatus or system to be employed by a first evolved Node B (eNB), may comprise a communication module to communicate with a user equipment (UE) and a core network on one or more data bearers through the first eNB; transmit, to a second eNB, a first request of adding a second SeNB by switching at least one of the data bears from the first eNB to the second eNB; receive, from the second eNB, a first message to acknowledge that the second eNB can be added; transmit, to the UE, a second message of reconfiguring a radio resource control (RRC) connection to switch the at least one data bearer; and communicate with the UE on a signaling bearer through the first eNB, while the UE communicates with the core network on the at least one data bearer through the second eNB.
In example embodiment 28, the first eNB according to the example embodiment 27 may be a master eNB (MeNB).
In example embodiment 29, the second eNB according to any of the example embodiments 27-28 may be a secondary eNB (SeNB).
In example embodiment 30, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 27-29 may further continue communicating with the UE and the core network on a remaining data bear of the data bears which hasn't been switched from the first eNB to the second eNB.
In example embodiment 31, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 27-30 may further receive, from the UE, a third message informing that the RRC connection reconfiguration has been completed.
In example embodiment 32, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 27-31 may further transmit, to the second eNB, a fourth message informing that the second SeNB has been added.
In example embodiment 33, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 27-32 may further transmit, to the core network, a second request of switching a downlink path of an evolved packet system (EPS) bearer from between the first eNB and the core network to between the second eNB and the core network, wherein a data bearer of the EPS bearer has been switched from the first eNB to the second eNB.
In example embodiment 34, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 27-33 may further transmit, to the core network, an indication to keep at least one EPB bearer not listed in the second request unreleased.
In example embodiment 35, the first request according to any of the example embodiments 27-34 may be a SeNB addition request comprising cause for a list of bearers to be setup, UE security capabilities, security context, and/or others.
In example embodiment 36, the first message according to any of the example embodiments 27-35 may be a SeNB addition acknowledgement message comprising a list of admitted bearers, a list of not admitted bearers, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB addition, and/or others.
In example embodiment 37, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 27-36 may further receive, from the UE, a measurement report about UE connection mobility; and determine, based on the measurement report, to add the second SeNB.
In example embodiment 38, a method, apparatus or system to be employed by a first evolved Node B (eNB), may comprise a communication module to receive, from a second eNB, a first request of adding the first eNB by switching at least one of one or more data bearers from the second eNB to the first eNB, wherein a user equipment (UE) communicated with a core network on the data bears through the second eNB; transmit, to the second eNB, a first message to acknowledge that the first eNB can be added; synchronize with the UE in order to establishing the at least one data bearer between the UE and the second eNB; communicate with the UE and the core network on the at least one data bearer through the first eNB, while the UE communicates with the second eNB on a signalling bearer through second eNB.
In example embodiment 39, the first eNB according to the example embodiment 38 may be a secondary eNB (MeNB).
In example embodiment 40, the second eNB according to any of the example embodiments 38-39 may be a master eNB (SeNB).
In example embodiment 41, the UE according to any of the example embodiments 38-40 may continue communicating with the core network on a
remaining data bear of the data bearers which hasn't been switched from the second eNB to the first eNB.
In example embodiment 42, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 38-41 may further transmit, to the core network, a second request of switching a downlink data path of the at least one data bearer from between the second eNB and the core network to between the first eNB and the core network; receive, from the core network, a second message to acknowledge that the downlink data path of the at least one data bearer has been switched.
In example embodiment 43, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 38-42 may further transmit, to the core network, an indication of keeping a remaining data bearer of the data bearers, which hasn't been switched from the second eNB to the first eNB, unreleased.
In example embodiment 44, the first request according to any of the example embodiments 38-43 may be a SeNB addition request comprising cause for a list of bearers to be setup, UE security capabilities, security context, and/or others.
In example embodiment 45, the first message according to any of the example embodiments 38-44 may be a SeNB addition acknowledgement message comprising a list of admitted bearers, a list of not admitted bearers, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB addition, and/or others.
In example embodiment 46, a method, apparatus, or system to be employed by a user equipment (UE), may comprise a communication module to communicate with a first evolved Node B (eNB) on a first bearer through the first eNB;
communicate with a second eNB on a second bearer through a second eNB ; receive, from the second eNB, a first message of reconfiguring a radio resource control (RRC) connection to switch the first bearer from the first eNB to the second eNB; detach from the first eNB, in response to the first message; communicate on the first bear through the second eNB, while continuing communicating on the second bearer through the second eNB.
In example embodiment 47, the first eNB according to the example embodiment 46 may be a secondary eNB (MeNB).
In example embodiment 48, the second eNB according to any of the example embodiments 46-47 may be a master eNB (SeNB).
In example embodiment 49, the first message according to any of the example embodiments 46-48 may be a RRCconnectionreconfiguration message comprising a SeNB release information to inform the UE that the second SeNB is going to be released.
In example embodiment 50, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 46-49 may further transmit, to the second eNB, a second message informing that the RRC connection reconfiguration is completed.
In example embodiment 51 , a method, apparatus or system to be employed by a first evolved node B (eNB), may comprise a communication module to communicate with a user equipment (UE) on a first bearer through the first eNB, while the UE communicates with a second eNB on a second bearer through the second eNB; transmit or receive, to or from a second eNB, a first request of releasing the second eNB; receive or transmit, from or to the second eNB, a first message to acknowledge that the second eNB can be released; and transmit, to the UE, a second message of reconfiguring a radio resource control (RRC) connection to switch the second bearer from the second eNB to the first eNB.
In example embodiment 52, the first eNB according to the example embodiment 51 may be a macro eNB (MeNB).
In example embodiment 53, the second eNB according to any of the example embodiments 51-52 may be a secondary eNB (SeNB).
In example embodiment 54, the first request according to any of the example embodiments 51-53 may be a SeNB release request including at least one of a cause for the SeNB release, a list of bearers to be switched, a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) in a second cell associated with the second eNB, UE security capabilities, security context, and/or others.
In example embodiment 55, the first message according to any of the example embodiments 51-54 may be a SeNB release acknowledgment message including at least one of a UE cell -radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI), a cause for the SeNB release, a list of admitted bearers, a list of not admitted bearers, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the cell release, and/or others.
In example embodiment 56, the first bearer according to any of the example embodiments 51-55 may be a signalling bearer and/or a data bearer, and the second bearer is a data bearer.
In example embodiment 57, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 51-56 may further receive, from the UE, a third message informing that the RRC connection reconfiguration is completed; and transmit, to the second eNB, a fourth message informing that the second bearer has been released.
In example embodiment 58, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 51-57 may further transmit, to a core network, a second request of switching a downlink path of the second bearer from between the second eNB and the core network to between the first eNB and the core network, wherein the second request further indicates not to release a bearer associated with the UE and not listed in the second request.
In example embodiment 59, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 51-58 may further receive, from the core network, a fifth message to acknowledge that the downlink data path of the second bearer is switched.
In example embodiment 60, a method, apparatus or system to be employed by a first evolved Node B (eNB), may comprise a communication module to communicate with a user equipment (UE) on a first bearer through the first eNB, wherein the UE further communicates on a second bearer through a second eNB ; receive or transmit, from or to a second eNB, a first request of releasing the first SeNB by switching the first bearer from the first eNB to the second eNB; transmit or receive, to or from the second eNB, a first message to acknowledge that the first SeNB can be released in response to a determination that the first request is acceptable; and detach from the UE in order to release the first bearer.
In example embodiment 61, the first eNB according to the example embodiment 60 may be a secondary eNB (MeNB).
In example embodiment 62, the second eNB according to any of the example embodiments 60-61 may be a master eNB (SeNB).
In example embodiment 63, the first request according to any of the example embodiments 60-62 may be a SeNB release request including at least one of a cause for the SeNB release or the small cell release, a list of bearers to be switched, a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) in a second cell associated with the second eNB, UE security capabilities, security context, and/or others.
In example embodiment 63, the first message according to any of the example embodiments 60-62 may be a SeNB release acknowledgment message including at least one of a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI), a cause for the SeNB release, a list of admitted bearers, a list of not admitted bearers, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB release, and/or others.
In example embodiment 64, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 60-63 may further transmit, to a core network, a second request of switching a downlink path of the first bearer from between the first eNB and the core network to between the second eNB and the core network, wherein the second request further indicates not to release a bearer associated with the UE and not listed in the second request.
In example embodiment 65, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 60-64 may further receive, from the core network, a second message to acknowledge that the downlink data path of the first bearer is switched.
In example embodiment 66, a method, apparatus, or system to be employed by a user equipment (UE), may comprise a communication module to communicate with a first evolved Node B (eNB) on a first bearer through a first eNB;
communicate with a second eNB on a second bearer through a second eNB; receive, from the first eNB, a first message of reconfiguring a radio resource control (RRC) connection to switch the second bearer from the second eNB to a third eNB ; detach from the second eNB and synchronizing with the third eNB, in response to the first message; communicate with the third eNB on the second bearer through the third eNB, while continuing communicating with the first eNB on the first bearer through the first eNB.
In example embodiment 67, the first eNB according to the example embodiments 66 may be a master eNB (MeNB).
In example embodiment 68, the second eNB according to any of the example embodiments 66-67 may be a source secondary eNB (SeNB).
In example embodiment 69, the third eNB according to any of the example embodiments 66-68 may be a target secondary eNB (SeNB).
In example embodiment 70, the first message according to any of the example embodiments 66-69 may be a RRCconnectionreconfiguration message comprising at least one of second eNB information, third eNB information and others.
In example embodiment 71, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 66-70 may further transmit, to the first eNB or the third eNB, a second message informing that the RRC connection reconfiguration is completed.
In example embodiment 72, the first bearer according to any of the example embodiments 66-71 may be a data bearer and/or a signalling bearer, and the second bearer is another data bearer.
In example embodiment 73, a method, apparatus or system to be employed by a first evolved Node B (eNB), may comprise a communication module to communicate with a user equipment (UE) on a first bearer through the first eNB, wherein the UE further communicates with a second eNB on a second bearer through the second eNB; transmit or receive, to or from a second eNB, a first request of switching the second eNB by switching the second bearer from the second eNB to a third eNB; and receive or transmit, from or to the second eNB, a first message to acknowledge that the second eNB can be switched.
In example embodiment 74, the first eNB according to the example embodiment 73 may be a master eNB (MeNB).
In example embodiment 75, the second eNB according to any of the example embodiments 73-74 may be a source secondary eNB (SeNB).
In example embodiment 76, the third eNB according to any of the example embodiments 73-75 may be a target secondary eNB (SeNB).
In example embodiment 77, the first request according to any of the example embodiments 73-76 may be a SeNB switch request including at least one of a TYPE field indicating whether an eNB receiving the first request adds the
second bearer or release the second bearer, a cause for the SeNB switch, a list of bearers to be setup or released, a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C- RNTI) in a second cell associated with the second eNB or a third cell associated with the third eNB, UE security capabilities, security context, and/or others.
In example embodiment 78, the first message according to any of the example embodiments 73-77 may be a SeNB switch request acknowledgement message comprising at least one of cell-radio network temporary identifier (C- RNTI), a cause for the SeNB switch, a list of admitted bearers, a list of not admitted bearers, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB switch, and/or others.
In example embodiment 79, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 73-78 may further transmit, to the third eNB, a second request of switching the second eNB by switching the second bearer from the second cell to the third cell; and receive, from the third eNB, a second message to acknowledge that the second eNB can be switched.
In example embodiment 80, the second request according to any of the example embodiments 73-79 may be a SeNB switch request comprising at least one of a TYPE field indicating whether an eNB receiving the message adds the second bearer or release the second bearer, a cause for the small cell switch, a list of bearers to be setup or released, a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) in a second cell associated with the second eNB or a third cell associated with the third eNB, UE security capabilities, security context, and/or others.
In example embodiment 81, the second message according to any of the example embodiments 73-80 may be a SeNB switch acknowledgement message comprising at least one of a cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI), a cause for the SeNB switch, a list of admitted bearers, a list of unadmitted bearers, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for SeNB switch, and/or others.
In example embodiment 82, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 73-81 may further transmit, to the UE, a third message of reconfiguring a radio resource control (RRC) connection by switching the second bearer from the second eNB to the third eNB.
In example embodiment 83, the third message according to any of the example embodiments 73-82 may be a RRCconnectionreconfiguration message comprising at least one of second Enb information, third eNB information and/or others.
In example embodiment 84, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 73-83 may further receive, from the UE, a fourth message informing that the RRC connection reconfiguration is completed; and transmit, to the second eNB and/or the third eNB, a fifth message informing that the second eNB switch is completed.
In example embodiment 85, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 73-84 may further transmit, to the second eNB, a third request of transferring a sequence number (SN) status from the second eNB to the third eNB.
In example embodiment 86, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 73-85 may further transmit, to a core network, a fourth request of switching a downlink path of the second bearer from between the second eNB and the core network to between the third eNB and the core network.
In example embodiment 87, the fourth request according to any of the example embodiments 73-86 may further indicate not to release a bearer associated with the UE and not listed in the second request.
In example embodiment 88, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 73-87 may further continue communicating with the UE on the first bearer through the first eNB, while the UE further communicates with the third eNB on the second bearer through the second eNB.
In example embodiment 89, a method, apparatus or sytem to be employed by a first evolved Node B (eNB), may comprise a communication module to communicate with a user equipment on a first bearer through the first eNB, wherein the UE further communicates with a second eNB on a second bearer through the second eNB; receive or transmit, from or to the second eNB, a first request of switching the first eNB by switching the first bearer from the first eNB to a third eNB; and transmit or receive, to or from the second eNB, a first message to acknowledge that the first eNB can be switched.
In example embodiment 90, the first eNB according to the example embodiments 89 may be a source secondary eNB (SeNB).
In example embodiment 91, the second eNB according to any of the example embodiments 89-90 may be a master eNB (MeNB).
In example embodiment 92, the third eNB according to any of the example embodiments 89-91 may be a target secondary eNB (SeNB).
In example embodiment 93, the first request according to any of the example embodiments 89-92 may be a SeNB switch request comprising at least one of a TYPE field indicating whether an eNB receiving the message adds the first bearer or release the first bearer, a cause for the SeNB switch, a list of bearers to be setup or released, a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) in a first cell associated with the first eNB or a third cell associate with the third eNB, UE security capabilities, security context, and/or others.
In example embodiment 94, the first message according to any of the example embodiments 89-93 may be a SeNB switch request acknowledgement message comprising at least one of cell-radio network temporary identifier (C- RNTI), a cause for the SeNB switch, a list of admitted bearers, a list of not admitted bearers, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB switch, and/or others.
In example embodiment 95, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 89-94 may further receive, from the second eNB, a second message of transferring a sequence number (SN) status from the first eNB to the third eNB; and forward, in response to the second message, a buffered and in transit data to the third eNB.
In example embodiment 96, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 89-95 may further transmit, to a core network, a third request of switching a downlink path of the first bearer from between the first eNB and the core network to between the third eNB and the core network.
In example embodiment 97, the third request according to any of the example embodiments 89-96 may further indicate not to release a bearer associated with the UE and not listed in the third request.
In example embodiment 98, a method, apparatus or system to be employed by a first evolved Node B (eNB), may comprise a communication module to communicate with a user equipment on a first bearer through the first eNB, wherein the UE further communicates with a second eNB on a second bearer through the second eNB; transmit, to a third eNB, a first request of switching the first eNB by switching the first bearer from the first eNB to the third eNB ; and receive, from the third eNB, a first message to acknowledge that the first eNB can be switched.
In example embodiment 99, the first eNB according to the example embodiments 98 may be a source secondary eNB (SeNB).
In example embodiment 100, the second eNB according to any of the example embodiments 98-99 may be a master eNB (MeNB).
In example embodiment 101, the third eNB according to any of the example embodiments 98-100 may be a target secondary eNB (SeNB).
In example embodiment 102, the first request according to any of the example embodiments 98-101 may be a SeNB switch request comprising at least one of a TYPE field indicating whether an eNB receiving the message adds the first bearer or release the first bearer, a cause for the SeNB switch, a list of bearers to be setup or released, a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) in a first cell associated with the first eNB or a third cell associated with the third eNB, UE security capabilities, security context, and/or others.
In example embodiment 103, the first message according to any of the example embodiments 98-102 may be a SeNB switch request acknowledgement message comprising at least one of cell-radio network temporary identifier (C- RNTI), a cause for the SeNB switch, a list of admitted bearers, a list of not admitted bearers, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB switch, and/or others.
In example embodiment 104, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 98-103 may further transmit, to the second eNB, a second request of switching the first eNB by switching the first bearer from the first eNB to the third eNB; and receive, from the second eNB, a second message to acknowledge that the first eNB can be switched.
In example embodiment 105, the second request according to any of the example embodiments 98-104 may be a SeNB switch request comprising at least one of a TYPE field indicating whether an eNB receiving the message adds the first bearer or release the first bearer, a cause for the SeNB switch, a list of bearers to be setup or released, a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) in the second cell or the third cell, UE security capabilities, security context, and/or others.
In example embodiment 106, the second message according to any of the example embodiments 98-105 may be a small cell switch request acknowledgement message comprising at least one of cell-radio network temporary identifier (C- RNTI), a cause for the cell switch, a list of admitted bearers, a list of not admitted bearers, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the small cell switch, and/or others.
In example embodiment 107, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 98-106 may further receive, from the second eNB, a third mesage of transferring a sequence number (SN) status from the first eNB to the third eNB; and forward, in response to the third message, a buffered and in transit data to the third eNB.
In example embodiment 108, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 98-101 may further transmit, to a core network, a third request of switching a downlink path of the first bearer from between the first eNB and the core network to between the third eNB and the core network.
In example embodiment 109, the third request according to any of the example embodiments 98-108 may further indicate not to release a bearer associated with the UE and not listed in the third request.
In example embodiment 110, a method, apparatus or system to be employed by a first eNB, may comprise a communication module to receive, from a second eNB or a third eNB, a first request of switching a third eNB by switching a first bearer from the third eNB to the first eNB, wherein a user equipment (UE) communicates with the third eNB on the first bearer through the third eNB and communicates with the second eNB on a second bearer through the second eNB; transmit, to the second eNB or the third eNB, a first message to acknowledge that the third eNB can be switched; synchronize with the user equipment (UE) to
establish the first bearer through the first eNB; and communicate with the UE on the first bearer through the first eNB.
In example embodiment 111, the first eNB according to the example embodiment 110 may be a target secondary eNB (SeNB).
In example embodiment 112, the second eNB according to any of the example embodiments 110-111 may be a master eNB (MeNB).
In example embodiment 113, the third eNB according to any of the example embodiments 110-112 may be a source secondary eNB (SeNB).
In example embodiment 114, the first request according to any of the example embodiments 110-113 may be a SeNB switch request comprising at least one of a TYPE field indicating whether an eNB receiving the message adds the first bearer or release the first bearer, a cause for the SeNB switch, a list of bearers to be setup or released, a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) in a first cell associated with the first eNB or a third cell associated with the third eNB, UE security capabilities, security context, and/or others.
In example embodiment 115, the first message according to any of the example embodiments 110-114 may be a SeNB switch request acknowledgement message comprising at least one of cell-radio network temporary identifier (C- RNTI), a cause for the SeNB switch, a list of admitted bearers, a list of not admitted bearers, a transparent container to be sent to the UE for the SeNB switch, and/or others.
In example embodiment 116, the communication module according to any of the example embodiments 110-115 may further transmit, to a core network, a second request of switching a downlink path of the first bearer from between the third eNB and the core network to between the first eNB and the core network.
In example embodiment 117, the third request according to any of the example embodiments 110-116 may furtherindicate not to release a bearer associated with the UE and not listed in the second request.
Although certain embodiments have been illustrated and described herein for purposes of description, a wide variety of alternate and/or equivalent embodiments or implementations calculated to achieve the same purposes may be substituted for the embodiments shown and described without departing from the scope of the
present disclosure. This application is intended to cover any adaptations or variations of the embodiments discussed herein. Therefore, it is manifestly intended that embodiments described herein be limited only by the claims and the equivalents thereof.
Claims
1. An apparatus, to be employed by a user equipment (UE), comprising: a communication module to:
communicate with a core network on a first bearer through a master evolved Node B (MeNB);
receive, from the MeNB, a first message of reconfiguring a radio resource control (RRC) connection to establish a second bearer between the UE and the core network and through a secondary eNB (SeNB);
synchronize, in response to the message, with the SeNB in order to establish the second bearer; and
communicate with the core network on the second bearer through the SeNB, and continue communicating with the core network on the first bearer through the MeNB.
2. The apparatus of claim 1 , wherein the communication module is further to transmit, to the MeNB, a second message that the RRC connection reconfiguration is completed.
3. An apparatus, to be employed by a master evolved Node B (MeNB), comprising:
a communication module to:
communicate with a user equipment (UE) and a core network on a first bearer through the MeNB;
transmit, to a secondary eNB (SeNB), a first request of adding a second bearer between the UE and the core network and through the SeNB; and
receive, from the SeNB, a first message to acknowledge that the second bearer can be added.
transmit, to the core network, a second message to indicate that the second bearer is redirected to the SeNB.
4. The apparatus of claim 3, wherein the first request is a SeNB addition request comprising a cause for the SeNB addition, characteristics of the second bearer, UE security capabilities, or security context.
5. The apparatus of claim 3, wherein the communication module is further to continue communicating with the UE and the core network on the first bearer through the MeNB, while the UE further communicates with the core network on the second bearer through the SeNB.
6. An apparatus, to be employed by a secondary evolved Node B (SeNB), comprising:
a communication module to:
receive, from a master eNB (MeNB), a request of adding a first bearer between a user equipment (UE) and a core network and through the SeNB;
transmit, to the MeNB, a message to acknowledge that the first bearer can be added;
synchronize with the UE to establish the first bearer;
communicate with the UE and the core network on the first bearer through the SeNB, wherein the UE continues communicating with the core network on a second bearer through the MeNB.
7. The apparatus of claim 6, wherein the request is a SeNB addition request comprising characteristics of the second bearer, UE security capabilities, or security context.
8. An apparatus, to be employed by a user equipment (UE), comprising: a communcation module to:
communicate with a core network on one or more data bearers through a master evolved Node B (MeNB);
receive, from the MeNB, a message of reconfiguring a radio resource control (RRC) connection to switch at least one of the one or more data bearers from the MeNB to a secondary eNB (SeNB); synchronize with the SeNB, in response to the message; and communicate with the core network on the at least one of the data bearers through the SeNB, and further communicate with the MeNB on a signaling bearer through the MeNB.
9. The apparatus of claim 8, wherein the communication module is further to transmit, to the MeNB, another message that the RRC connection reconfiguration is completed.
10. The apparatus of claim 8, wherein the communication module is further to continue communicating with the UE and the core network on a remaining data bear of the data bears which wasn't switched from the MeNB to the SeNB.
11. An apparatus, to be employed by a master evolved Node B (MeNB), comprising:
a communication module to:
communicate with a user equipment (UE) and a core network on one or more data bearers through the MeNB;
transmit, to a secondary eNB (SeNB), a first request of switching at least one of the data bears from the MeNB to the SeNB; receive, from the SeNB, a first message to acknowledge that the at least one of the data bearers can be switched;
transmit, to the UE, a second message of reconfiguring a radio resource control (RRC) connection to switch the at least one of the data bearers; and
communicate with the UE on a signaling bearer through the MeNB, while the UE further communicates with the core network on the at least one of the data bearers through the SeNB.
12. The apparatus of claim 11, wherein the communication module is further to continue communicating with the UE and the core network on a remaining data bear of the data bears which wasn't switched from the MeNB to the SeNB.
13. The apparatus of claim 11, wherein the first request is a SeNB addition request comprising characteristics of the at least one of the data bearers, UE security capabilities, or security context.
14. The apparatus of claim 11, wherein the communication module is further to transmit, to the core network, a second request of switching a downlink path of an evolved packet system (EPS) bearer from between the MeNB and the core network to between the SeNB and the core network, wherein a data bearer of the EPS bearer has been switched from the MeNB to the SeNB and wherein the second request further indicates not to release a bearer associated with the MeNB and not listed in the second request.
15. An apparatus, to be employed by a secondary evolved Node B (SeNB), comprising:
a communication module to:
receive, from a master eNB (MeNB), a first request of switching at least one of one or more data bearers from the MeNB to the SeNB, wherein a user equipment (UE) communicates with a core network on the data bears through the MeNB;
transmit, to the MeNB, a first message to acknowledge that the at least one of the data bearers can be switched;
synchronize with the UE in order to establish the at least one of the data bearers through the SeNB;
communicate with the UE and the core network on the at least one of the data bearers through the SeNB, while the UE further communicates with the MeNB on a signalling bearer through MeNB.
16. The apparatus of claim 15, wherein the UE continues communicating with the core network on a remaining data bear of the data bearers which wasn't switched from the MeNB to the SeNB.
17. The apparatus of claim 15, wherein the first request is a SeNB addition request comprising characteristics of the at least one of the data bearers, UE security capabilities, or security context.
18. An apparatus, to be employed by a user equipment (UE), comprising: a communication module to:
communicate with a master evolved Node B (MeNB) on a first bearer through the MeNB ;
communicate with a secondary eNB (SeNB) on a second bearer through a SeNB ;
receive, from the MeNB, a first message of reconfiguring a radio resource control (RRC) connection to switch the second bearer from the SeNB to the MeNB;
detach from the SeNB, in response to the first message;
communicate on the second bear through the MeNB, and continue communicating on the first bearer through the MeNB.
19. The apparatus of claim 18, wherein the communication module is further to transmit, to the MeNB, a second message informing that the RRC connection reconfiguration is completed.
20. An apparatus, to be employed by a Master evolved node B (MeNB), comprising:
a communication module to
communicate with a user equipment (UE) on a first bearer through the MeNB, while the UE further communicates with a secondary eNB (SeNB) on a second bearer through the SeNB ;
transmit or receive, to or from the SeNB, a first request of releasing the second bearer by switching the second bearer from the SeNB to the MeNB;
receive or transmit, from or to the SeNB, a first message to acknowledge that the second bearer can be released;
transmit, to the UE, a second message of reconfiguring a radio resource control (RRC) connection to switch the second bearer from the SeNB to the MeNB; and
communicate with the UE on the second bearer through the MeNB, and continue communicating with the UE on the first bearer through the MeNB.
21. The apparatus of claim 20, wherein the first request is a SeNB release request including a cause for the SeNB release, a list of bearers to be switched, a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) in a second cell associated with the second eNB, UE security capabilities, or security context.
22. The apparatus of claim 20, wherein the communication module is further to transmit, to a core network, a second request of switching a downlink path of the second bearer from between the SeNB and the core network to between the MeNB and the core network, wherein the second request further indicates not to release a bearer associated with the MeNB and not listed in the second request.
23. An apparatus, to be employed by a secondary evolved Node B (SeNB), comprising:
a communication module to
communicate with a user equipment (UE) on a first bearer through the SeNB, wherein the UE further communicates on a second bearer through a master eNB (MeNB);
receive or transmit, from or to a MeNB, a first request of release the first bearer by switching the first bearer from the SeNB to the MeNB;
transmit or receive, to or from the MeNB, a first message to acknowledge that the first bearer can be released; and detach from the UE in order to release the first bearer.
24. The method of claim 23, wherein the first request is a SeNB release request including a cause for the SeNB release, a list of bearers to be switched, a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) in a second cell associated with the second eNB, UE security capabilities, or security context.
25. An apparatus, to be employed by a user equipment (UE), comprising: a communication module to
communicate with a master evolved Node B (MeNB) on a first bearer through the Master eNB ;
communicate with a source secondary eNB (SeNB) on a second bearer through the source SeNB
receive, from the MeNB, a first message of reconfiguring a radio resource control (RRC) connection to switch the second bearer from the source SeNB to a target SeNB;
detach from the source SeNB and synchronize with the target SeNB, in response to the first message;
communicate with the target SeNB on the second bearer through the target SeNB, and continue communicating with the MeNB on the first bearer through the MeNB.
26. The apparatus of claim 25, wherein the communication module is further to transmit, to the MeNB, a second message that the RRC connection reconfiguration is completed.
27. An apparatus, to be employed by a master evolved Node B (MeNB), comprising:
a communication module to
communicate with a user equipment (UE) on a first bearer through the MeNB, wherein the UE further communicates with a source secondary eNB (SeNB) on a second bearer through the source SeNB;
transmit or receive, to or from a source SeNB, a first request of switching the second bearer from the source SeNB to a target SeNB; and
receive or transmit, from or to the source SeNB, a first message to acknowledge that the second bearerr can be switched.
28. The apparatus of claim 27, wherein the first request is a SeNB switch request including a TYPE field indicating whether an eNB receiving the first request adds the second bearer or release the second bearer, a cause for the SeNB switch, a list of bearers to be setup or released, a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) in a cell associated with the source SeNB or a cell associated with the target SeNB, UE security capabilities, or security context.
29. The apparatus of claim 27, wherein the communication module is further to transmit, to the target SeNB, a second request of switching the second bearer from the source SeNB to the target SeNB; and receive, from the target SeNB, a second message to acknowledge that the second bearer can be switched, wherein the second request is a SeNB switch request comprising a TYPE field indicating whether an eNB receiving the message adds the second bearer or release the second bearer, a cause for the SeNB switch, a list of bearers to be setup or released, a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) in a cell associated with the source SeNB or a cell associated with the target SeNB, UE security capabilities, or security context.
30. The apparatus of claim 27, wherein the communication module is further to transmit, to a core network, a third request of switching a downlink path of the second bearer from between the source SeNB and the core network to between the target SeNB and the core network.
31. An apparatus, to be employed by a source secondary evolved Node B (SeNB), comprising:
a communication module to:
communicate with a user equipment on a first bearer through the source SeNB, wherein the UE further communicates with a master eNB (MeNB) on a second bearer through the MeNB;
receive or transmit, from or to the MeNB, a first request of switching the first bearer from the source SeNB to a target SeNB; and transmit or receive, to or from the source SeNB, a first message to acknowledge that the first bearer can be switched.
32. The apparatus of claim 31, wherein the first request is a SeNB switch request comprising a TYPE field indicating whether an eNB receiving the message adds the first bearer or release the first bearer, a cause for the SeNB switch, a list of bearers to be setup or released, a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C- RNTI) in a cell associated with the source SeNB or a cell associate with the target SeNB, UE security capabilities, or security context.
33. An apparatus, to be employed by a target second eNB (SeNB), comprising:
a communication module to:
receive, from a master eNB (MeNB) or a source SeNB, a first request of switching a first bearer from the source SeNB to the target SeNB, wherein a user equipment (UE) communicates with the source SeNB on the first bearer through the source SeNB and communicates with the MeNB on a second bearer through the MeNB;
transmit, to the MeNB or the source SeNB, a first message to acknowledge that the first bearer can be switched;
synchronize with the UE to establish the first bearer through the target SeNB; and
communicate with the UE on the first bearer through the target eNB, while the UE continues communicating with the MeNB on the second bearer throught the MeNB.
34. The apparatus of 33, wherein the first request is a SeNB switch request comprising a TYPE field indicating whether an eNB receiving the message adds the first bearer or release the first bearer, a cause for the SeNB switch, a list of bearers to be setup or released, a UE cell-radio network temporary identifier (C- RNTI) in a cell associated with the source SeNB or a cell associated with the target SeNB, UE security capabilities, or security context.
Priority Applications (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
EP13871565.1A EP2946491A4 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-12-20 | Method, apparatus and system for managing bearers in a wireless communication system |
US14/653,221 US9848322B2 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-12-20 | Method, apparatus and system for managing bearers in a wireless communication system |
US15/804,786 US10868648B2 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2017-11-06 | Method, apparatus and system for managing bearers in a wireless communication system |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US201361753914P | 2013-01-17 | 2013-01-17 | |
US61/753,914 | 2013-01-17 |
Related Child Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US14/653,221 A-371-Of-International US9848322B2 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-12-20 | Method, apparatus and system for managing bearers in a wireless communication system |
US15/804,786 Continuation US10868648B2 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2017-11-06 | Method, apparatus and system for managing bearers in a wireless communication system |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2014113190A1 true WO2014113190A1 (en) | 2014-07-24 |
Family
ID=51209990
Family Applications (19)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/US2013/056666 WO2014113072A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-08-26 | Centralized partitioning of user devices in a heterogeneous wireless network |
PCT/US2013/057709 WO2014113073A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-08-30 | Device-to-device discovery with direct radio signals |
PCT/US2013/057882 WO2014113074A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-09-03 | Techniques and systems for extended discontinuous reception |
PCT/US2013/058579 WO2014113075A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-09-06 | Fast small cell discovery |
PCT/US2013/058582 WO2014113076A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-09-06 | Discovery signal in cluster-based small cell |
PCT/US2013/060201 WO2014113078A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-09-17 | Mapping special subframes in a wireless communication network |
PCT/US2013/061461 WO2014113080A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-09-24 | Method, apparatus and system for handling in-device coexistance interference in a wireless network |
PCT/US2013/061518 WO2014113082A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-09-25 | Communication of security key information |
PCT/US2013/061630 WO2014113083A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-09-25 | Lawful interception for device-to-device (d2d) communication |
PCT/US2013/061946 WO2014113084A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-09-26 | Systems and methods for efficient traffic offload without service disruption |
PCT/US2013/061962 WO2014113085A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-09-26 | Systems and methods for mobility optimization in a heterogeneous network |
PCT/US2013/062444 WO2014113088A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-09-27 | Systems and methods for generating a discovery signal in a device-to-device or network communication |
PCT/US2013/062428 WO2014113087A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-09-27 | Channel state information-reference signal patterns for time division duplex systems in long term evolution wireless networks |
PCT/US2013/063793 WO2014113095A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-10-08 | Dynamic configuration of uplink (ul) and downlink (dl) frame resources for a time division duplex (tdd) transmission |
PCT/US2013/064761 WO2014113103A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-10-14 | Apparatus, system and method of communicating non-cellular access network information over a cellular network |
PCT/US2013/071934 WO2014113141A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-11-26 | Techniques for deploying small cells as secondary cells for user equipment |
PCT/US2013/075849 WO2014113171A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-12-17 | Channel quality indication for fallback transmission mode over new carrier type |
PCT/US2013/077294 WO2014113190A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-12-20 | Method, apparatus and system for managing bearers in a wireless communication system |
PCT/US2013/077745 WO2014113197A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-12-26 | Presence service using ims based dash service |
Family Applications Before (17)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/US2013/056666 WO2014113072A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-08-26 | Centralized partitioning of user devices in a heterogeneous wireless network |
PCT/US2013/057709 WO2014113073A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-08-30 | Device-to-device discovery with direct radio signals |
PCT/US2013/057882 WO2014113074A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-09-03 | Techniques and systems for extended discontinuous reception |
PCT/US2013/058579 WO2014113075A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-09-06 | Fast small cell discovery |
PCT/US2013/058582 WO2014113076A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-09-06 | Discovery signal in cluster-based small cell |
PCT/US2013/060201 WO2014113078A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-09-17 | Mapping special subframes in a wireless communication network |
PCT/US2013/061461 WO2014113080A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-09-24 | Method, apparatus and system for handling in-device coexistance interference in a wireless network |
PCT/US2013/061518 WO2014113082A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-09-25 | Communication of security key information |
PCT/US2013/061630 WO2014113083A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-09-25 | Lawful interception for device-to-device (d2d) communication |
PCT/US2013/061946 WO2014113084A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-09-26 | Systems and methods for efficient traffic offload without service disruption |
PCT/US2013/061962 WO2014113085A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-09-26 | Systems and methods for mobility optimization in a heterogeneous network |
PCT/US2013/062444 WO2014113088A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-09-27 | Systems and methods for generating a discovery signal in a device-to-device or network communication |
PCT/US2013/062428 WO2014113087A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-09-27 | Channel state information-reference signal patterns for time division duplex systems in long term evolution wireless networks |
PCT/US2013/063793 WO2014113095A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-10-08 | Dynamic configuration of uplink (ul) and downlink (dl) frame resources for a time division duplex (tdd) transmission |
PCT/US2013/064761 WO2014113103A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-10-14 | Apparatus, system and method of communicating non-cellular access network information over a cellular network |
PCT/US2013/071934 WO2014113141A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-11-26 | Techniques for deploying small cells as secondary cells for user equipment |
PCT/US2013/075849 WO2014113171A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-12-17 | Channel quality indication for fallback transmission mode over new carrier type |
Family Applications After (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/US2013/077745 WO2014113197A1 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2013-12-26 | Presence service using ims based dash service |
Country Status (11)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (28) | US9226211B2 (en) |
EP (16) | EP2946587A4 (en) |
JP (4) | JP6185078B2 (en) |
KR (3) | KR101776799B1 (en) |
CN (15) | CN104854916B (en) |
BR (2) | BR122017006293A2 (en) |
ES (1) | ES2693337T3 (en) |
HK (5) | HK1216958A1 (en) |
HU (1) | HUE040437T2 (en) |
TW (3) | TWI528772B (en) |
WO (19) | WO2014113072A1 (en) |
Cited By (8)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2016035835A1 (en) * | 2014-09-03 | 2016-03-10 | 株式会社Nttドコモ | Base station and data transfer method |
CN105451278A (en) * | 2014-08-07 | 2016-03-30 | 上海贝尔股份有限公司 | Method and device for changing secondary eNB in double connection system |
CN105792282A (en) * | 2014-11-28 | 2016-07-20 | 财团法人工业技术研究院 | Evolved Node B and Traffic Scheduling Method |
KR20170042314A (en) * | 2014-08-04 | 2017-04-18 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Signaling in dual connectivity mobile communication networks |
JPWO2016152140A1 (en) * | 2015-03-25 | 2018-02-01 | 日本電気株式会社 | Communication apparatus, communication system, and control method |
EP3241384A4 (en) * | 2014-12-30 | 2018-06-13 | LG Electronics Inc. | Method and apparatus for performing inter-menb handover without senb change in wireless communication system |
US10349309B2 (en) | 2014-08-19 | 2019-07-09 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Admission control and load balancing |
CN112261695A (en) * | 2016-11-04 | 2021-01-22 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method, device and system for sending end mark |
Families Citing this family (385)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US9144029B2 (en) * | 2010-09-13 | 2015-09-22 | Blinq Wireless Inc. | System and method for downlink power optimization in a partitioned wireless backhaul network with out-of-neighborhood utility evaluation |
KR101862429B1 (en) * | 2010-10-04 | 2018-05-29 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for handling in-device co-existence interference in a wireless communication enviroment |
CN107371154B (en) | 2011-09-29 | 2021-06-01 | 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 | Method for realizing anonymous reporting of MDT (minimization of drive test) measurement |
WO2014019591A1 (en) * | 2012-07-30 | 2014-02-06 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Technique for operating a radio network controller during a soft handover process |
KR101634916B1 (en) | 2012-11-01 | 2016-06-29 | 인텔 코포레이션 | Network assisted device-to-device discovery for peer-to-peer applications |
US10356640B2 (en) | 2012-11-01 | 2019-07-16 | Intel Corporation | Apparatus, system and method of cellular network communications corresponding to a non-cellular network |
US9414392B2 (en) | 2012-12-03 | 2016-08-09 | Intel Corporation | Apparatus, system and method of user-equipment (UE) centric access network selection |
US9107028B2 (en) * | 2012-12-14 | 2015-08-11 | Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc | Coupling devices using multiple discovery zones |
US9386062B2 (en) * | 2012-12-28 | 2016-07-05 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Elastic response time to hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP) requests |
CN103338518B (en) | 2012-12-31 | 2016-12-28 | 上海华为技术有限公司 | A kind of send the method for RRC signaling, base station and system |
WO2014107208A1 (en) | 2013-01-03 | 2014-07-10 | Intel Corporation | Apparatus, system and method of lawful interception (li) in a cellular network |
JP6063061B2 (en) | 2013-01-07 | 2017-01-18 | エルジー エレクトロニクス インコーポレイティド | Signal transmission / reception method based on dynamic radio resource change in radio communication system and apparatus therefor |
US10433162B2 (en) * | 2013-01-09 | 2019-10-01 | Ntt Docomo, Inc. | Secure radio access with inter-eNB carrier aggregation |
US20160021581A1 (en) * | 2013-01-17 | 2016-01-21 | Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. | Packet data convergence protocol (pdcp) placement |
US9226211B2 (en) * | 2013-01-17 | 2015-12-29 | Intel IP Corporation | Centralized partitioning of user devices in a heterogeneous wireless network |
US11177919B2 (en) * | 2013-01-18 | 2021-11-16 | Texas Instruments Incorporated | Methods for energy-efficient unicast and multicast transmission in a wireless communication system |
US10009164B2 (en) * | 2013-01-28 | 2018-06-26 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for utilizing a reconfiguration timer for updating TDD configuration |
US20140219451A1 (en) * | 2013-02-07 | 2014-08-07 | Mediatek Inc. | Adaptive security apparatus and method for updating security parameter |
EP3512298B1 (en) | 2013-02-22 | 2021-03-24 | HTC Corporation | Method and apparatus for the release of a cell |
WO2014130091A1 (en) | 2013-02-22 | 2014-08-28 | Intel IP Corporation | Systems and methods for access network selection and traffic routing |
US9386619B2 (en) | 2013-02-22 | 2016-07-05 | Htc Corporation | Method of handling a cell addition for dual connectivity and related communication device |
WO2014127532A1 (en) * | 2013-02-22 | 2014-08-28 | 华为技术有限公司 | Sub-frame generating method and equipment, sub-frame determining method and user equipment |
EP2782317A1 (en) * | 2013-03-18 | 2014-09-24 | Koninklijke KPN N.V. | Redirecting a client device from a first gateway to a second gateway for accessing a network node function |
CN104066093B (en) * | 2013-03-18 | 2018-03-23 | 财团法人工业技术研究院 | Interference management method, anchor point equipment, base station and system of wireless communication system |
EP2785082B1 (en) * | 2013-03-27 | 2021-06-16 | Sony Corporation | Method for operating a terminal device |
US20160066237A1 (en) * | 2013-04-02 | 2016-03-03 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Radio communication system, base station device, terminal device, radio communication method, and integrated circuit |
WO2014161503A1 (en) * | 2013-04-03 | 2014-10-09 | 联发科技(新加坡)私人有限公司 | Method and device for monitoring paging signal |
US9160515B2 (en) | 2013-04-04 | 2015-10-13 | Intel IP Corporation | User equipment and methods for handover enhancement using scaled time-to-trigger and time-of-stay |
US9397807B2 (en) * | 2013-04-05 | 2016-07-19 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | UE, network node and methods of assisting measurements in mixed signal configuration |
US9877352B2 (en) | 2013-04-15 | 2018-01-23 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Application of a discontinuous reception (DRX) cycle |
WO2014172654A1 (en) * | 2013-04-19 | 2014-10-23 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Media quality information signaling in dynamic adaptive video streaming over hypertext transfer protocol |
EP2802091A1 (en) * | 2013-05-08 | 2014-11-12 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America | Flexible TDD uplink-downlink configuration with flexible subframes |
WO2014181154A1 (en) * | 2013-05-09 | 2014-11-13 | Nokia Siemens Networks Oy | Measurements in a wireless system |
WO2014181972A1 (en) * | 2013-05-09 | 2014-11-13 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for receiving search signal for detecting small-sized cell |
EP2996405A4 (en) * | 2013-05-10 | 2016-11-16 | Fujitsu Ltd | Method and device for calculating paging opportunity under extended paging cycle |
JP6147562B2 (en) * | 2013-05-10 | 2017-06-14 | 京セラ株式会社 | COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, USER TERMINAL, AND PROCESSOR |
EP2802183B1 (en) * | 2013-05-10 | 2020-02-26 | Alcatel Lucent | Dual connectivity setup |
WO2014185674A1 (en) | 2013-05-11 | 2014-11-20 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Communication method considering carrier type and apparatus for same |
WO2014185743A1 (en) * | 2013-05-16 | 2014-11-20 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Scheme for discovery in a communication network |
US9585178B2 (en) * | 2013-05-21 | 2017-02-28 | Htc Corporation | Method for handling proximity-based service discovery and communication in a wireless communications system |
CN104185209B (en) * | 2013-05-24 | 2019-11-19 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | A kind of small cell base station access system and its method for realizing network insertion |
US20160127420A1 (en) * | 2013-06-14 | 2016-05-05 | Nokia Solutions And Networks Oy | Lawful Interception for Proximity Service |
EP3011685A4 (en) * | 2013-06-20 | 2017-01-11 | Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) | Mapping codewords |
EP2816853A1 (en) * | 2013-06-21 | 2014-12-24 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America | Uplink switching of communication links for mobile stations in dual connectivity |
EP3014934B1 (en) * | 2013-06-28 | 2020-08-05 | Intel Corporation | Network assisted device-to-device discovery for peer-to-peer applications |
KR102219227B1 (en) * | 2013-07-05 | 2021-02-23 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method and apparatus for forwarding data for small cell in wireless communication system |
WO2015005651A1 (en) * | 2013-07-08 | 2015-01-15 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Lawful interception method and apparatus of d2d communication-capable terminal |
EP2830352A1 (en) * | 2013-07-24 | 2015-01-28 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America | Efficient discard mechanism in small cell deployment |
US10506590B2 (en) * | 2013-07-30 | 2019-12-10 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Device and method for transmitting and receiving discovery signal of base station in mobile communication system |
CN104349374A (en) * | 2013-08-02 | 2015-02-11 | 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 | Method for maintaining service continuity in heterogeneous communication system |
JP2015035674A (en) * | 2013-08-08 | 2015-02-19 | ソニー株式会社 | Communication control device, communication control method, terminal device, and information processing device |
US10624005B2 (en) * | 2013-08-08 | 2020-04-14 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Method and apparatus for proxy algorithm identity selection |
WO2015018038A1 (en) * | 2013-08-08 | 2015-02-12 | 华为技术有限公司 | Tunnel establishment method and device |
KR102078866B1 (en) * | 2013-08-09 | 2020-02-19 | 삼성전자주식회사 | SCHEME FOR Security key management for PDCP distribution in dual connectivity |
CN104349308B (en) | 2013-08-09 | 2018-06-05 | 宏达国际电子股份有限公司 | Wireless network is distributed in doubly-linked knot and temporarily knows method for distinguishing, communicator and network-side |
CN110224797B (en) * | 2013-08-09 | 2022-06-07 | 太阳专利信托公司 | Mobile station, method and storage medium for communicating with base station in communication system |
EP2978270B1 (en) * | 2013-08-23 | 2018-10-03 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Method and device for transmitting uplink information |
US20150063260A1 (en) * | 2013-09-04 | 2015-03-05 | Innovative Sonic Corporation | Method and apparatus for device to device service in a wireless communication system |
KR102196213B1 (en) | 2013-09-11 | 2020-12-31 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | Method and system to enable secure communication for inter-enb transmission |
US9591430B2 (en) * | 2013-09-16 | 2017-03-07 | Blackberry Limited | Temporary identifiers and expiration values for discoverable user equipments (UEs) |
WO2015046918A1 (en) * | 2013-09-25 | 2015-04-02 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for transmitting/receiving discovery signals in d2d communication and devices for supporting same |
EP3050232B1 (en) * | 2013-09-27 | 2020-04-01 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method and apparatus for discovery signals for lte advanced |
US9756531B2 (en) * | 2013-09-30 | 2017-09-05 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method for determining radio resource control configuration in a wireless communication system supporting dual connectivity and apparatus thereof |
US9807452B2 (en) * | 2013-10-07 | 2017-10-31 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Practical delivery of high quality video using dynamic adaptive hypertext transport protocol (HTTP) streaming (DASH) without using HTTP in a broadcast network |
JP6251538B2 (en) * | 2013-10-15 | 2017-12-20 | 株式会社Nttドコモ | Mobile station |
US9474089B2 (en) * | 2013-10-22 | 2016-10-18 | Acer Incorporated | User equipment and base station with configurable carrier |
WO2015063991A1 (en) * | 2013-10-30 | 2015-05-07 | Nec Corporation | Apparatus, system and method for secure direct communcation in proximity based services |
ES2825548T3 (en) * | 2013-11-01 | 2021-05-17 | Lg Electronics Inc | Method and apparatus for performing an operation related to radio link failure in a heterogeneous network |
CN104619027B (en) | 2013-11-01 | 2020-01-14 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Discovery signal processing method and base station |
CN105874866B (en) | 2013-11-01 | 2021-04-02 | 三星电子株式会社 | Apparatus and method for allocating resources and transmitting/receiving resource allocation information |
WO2015066873A1 (en) | 2013-11-07 | 2015-05-14 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method for measuring service transmission condition of user terminal, and serving station |
US9473913B2 (en) | 2013-11-12 | 2016-10-18 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method for small cell based augmented reality |
KR102221332B1 (en) | 2013-11-13 | 2021-03-02 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | Method and apparatus for handling a Power headroom report and a hybrid automatic repeat request in a mobile communication system |
US10028132B2 (en) * | 2013-12-04 | 2018-07-17 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method for transceiving system information in cloud wireless communication system and apparatus therefor |
WO2015089774A1 (en) * | 2013-12-18 | 2015-06-25 | Nokia Solutions And Networks Oy | Method and apparatus |
CN109951837B (en) * | 2013-12-18 | 2020-12-11 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Method for information interaction in small cell environment, base station and mobile management entity |
US20170250927A1 (en) * | 2013-12-23 | 2017-08-31 | Dali Systems Co. Ltd. | Virtual radio access network using software-defined network of remotes and digital multiplexing switches |
WO2015097980A1 (en) | 2013-12-24 | 2015-07-02 | Nec Corporation | Apparatus, system and method for sce |
US9386275B2 (en) * | 2014-01-06 | 2016-07-05 | Intel IP Corporation | Interactive video conferencing |
CN105794263B (en) * | 2014-01-08 | 2019-08-13 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method and system for consulting service quality (abbreviation QoS) in network assistance self adaptation stream |
EP2897318B1 (en) * | 2014-01-21 | 2017-09-06 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America | TDD uplink/downlink configuration enhancements |
CN104812075A (en) * | 2014-01-27 | 2015-07-29 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Device discovery signal transmitting method, device and system |
US10362033B1 (en) * | 2014-01-27 | 2019-07-23 | Microstrategy Incorporated | Finding users |
KR102170402B1 (en) * | 2014-01-29 | 2020-10-27 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | Method and apparatus for performing a handover in wireless communication system supporting a dual connectivity |
CN105027617B (en) * | 2014-01-29 | 2020-04-28 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method and device for transmitting configuration message |
CN105960824B (en) * | 2014-01-30 | 2020-02-18 | 夏普株式会社 | Terminal device, base station device, and communication method |
US9713044B2 (en) * | 2014-01-30 | 2017-07-18 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Systems and methods for dual-connectivity operation |
JP6082129B2 (en) * | 2014-01-31 | 2017-02-15 | 京セラ株式会社 | Master base station, secondary base station, and processor |
US9825748B2 (en) * | 2014-02-03 | 2017-11-21 | Apple Inc. | Offloading and reselection policies and rules for mobile devices |
JP2015154243A (en) | 2014-02-14 | 2015-08-24 | ソニー株式会社 | Terminal apparatus, program and method |
US10003448B2 (en) * | 2014-02-18 | 2018-06-19 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method for reporting channel status information in wireless communication system supporting change in use of wireless resources, and device therefor |
CN104869575A (en) * | 2014-02-21 | 2015-08-26 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Optimal path establishing method, MME (Mobility Management Entity) and gateway |
WO2015127669A1 (en) * | 2014-02-28 | 2015-09-03 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method, device and system for performing communication by using unauthorized spectrum |
US9549394B2 (en) | 2014-02-28 | 2017-01-17 | Blackberry Limited | Methods and devices for performing proximity discovery |
WO2015134907A1 (en) * | 2014-03-06 | 2015-09-11 | Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. | Full duplex operation in wireless systems |
US10375614B2 (en) | 2014-03-06 | 2019-08-06 | Nec Corporation | Apparatus, system and method for dual connectivity |
EP3119024B1 (en) * | 2014-03-12 | 2021-02-17 | LG Electronics Inc. | Method for transmitting uplink control channel in wireless communication system that supports use change of radio resources, and apparatus therefor |
CN104918329B (en) * | 2014-03-13 | 2019-06-25 | 中国移动通信集团公司 | A kind of communication processing method, device and base station |
CN104936173B (en) * | 2014-03-18 | 2022-02-25 | 华为技术有限公司 | Key generation method, main base station, auxiliary base station and user equipment |
WO2015142078A1 (en) * | 2014-03-19 | 2015-09-24 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method and apparatus for transmitting information on serving gateway for supporting small cell mobility in wireless communication system |
JP6504509B2 (en) * | 2014-03-19 | 2019-04-24 | シャープ株式会社 | Terminal device and communication method |
EP3122146A1 (en) * | 2014-03-20 | 2017-01-25 | Kyocera Corporation | Secondary base station, mobile station, communication control method, and master base station |
EP3122116B1 (en) * | 2014-03-20 | 2021-05-05 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Terminal device and base station device |
CN106134253B (en) * | 2014-03-20 | 2019-11-29 | 三菱电机株式会社 | Communication system |
CN104936174B (en) * | 2014-03-21 | 2019-04-19 | 上海诺基亚贝尔股份有限公司 | The method of more new key under the dual link situation based on user plane 1A framework |
EP3120599B1 (en) | 2014-03-21 | 2021-03-17 | Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) | Mobility robustness optimization in a cellular network |
CN108901026B (en) * | 2014-03-21 | 2019-07-12 | 华为技术有限公司 | Detect the method and apparatus of man-in-the-middle attack |
US20150271836A1 (en) * | 2014-03-21 | 2015-09-24 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Techniques for bearer prioritization and data mapping in multiple connectivity wireless communications |
US9877256B2 (en) | 2014-03-24 | 2018-01-23 | Intel IP Corporation | Systems, devices, and methods for interworking between a universal mobile telecommunications system (UMTS) network and a wireless local area network (WLAN) |
EP2928261B1 (en) * | 2014-03-31 | 2020-03-18 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Bearer release |
EP3122124B1 (en) * | 2014-04-16 | 2019-06-19 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Information transmission method, device, and system |
CN105099633B (en) * | 2014-04-25 | 2019-08-09 | 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 | The transmission method and device of Physical Downlink Shared Channel |
US10341911B2 (en) * | 2014-05-05 | 2019-07-02 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method for establishing plurality of PDN connections by means of CSIPTO |
US9467921B2 (en) | 2014-05-08 | 2016-10-11 | Intel IP Corporation | Systems, devices, and methods for long term evolution and wireless local area interworking |
WO2015174700A1 (en) * | 2014-05-11 | 2015-11-19 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for configuring apn-ambr in wireless communication system supporting csipto and device therefor |
US10327198B2 (en) * | 2014-05-27 | 2019-06-18 | Zte Corporation | Discovery signal processing method and base station |
US9930716B2 (en) * | 2014-06-30 | 2018-03-27 | Apple Inc. | Methods and apparatus to support network-based IP flow mobility via multiple wireless accesses for a wireless device |
WO2016000196A1 (en) * | 2014-06-30 | 2016-01-07 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method of reestablishing pdn connection, reset central server, mobility management network element and data gateway |
US11115174B2 (en) * | 2014-07-01 | 2021-09-07 | Ntt Docomo, Inc. | Base station, user terminal, radio communication system, and communication control method |
US10075864B2 (en) | 2014-07-02 | 2018-09-11 | Intel IP Corporation | System and method for measurement reporting in an unlicensed spectrum |
EP3172921B1 (en) * | 2014-07-08 | 2021-03-31 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method for performing inter plmn discovery by a user equipment (ue) in device-to-device (d2d) communication |
WO2016012053A1 (en) * | 2014-07-25 | 2016-01-28 | Nokia Solutions And Networks Oy | Minimization of drive tests in dual connectivity scenario |
CN104202778B (en) * | 2014-08-05 | 2017-12-19 | 电信科学技术研究院 | One kind carrying acceptance controlling method and device |
US10440661B2 (en) | 2014-08-06 | 2019-10-08 | Quacomm Incorporated | RAN procedures for extended discontinuous reception (DRX) |
CN106471854B (en) * | 2014-08-12 | 2020-03-10 | 华为技术有限公司 | Downlink distribution and convergence method, uplink distribution and convergence method and equipment |
US20160057679A1 (en) * | 2014-08-22 | 2016-02-25 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Cson-aided small cell load balancing based on backhaul information |
US9743450B2 (en) | 2014-09-05 | 2017-08-22 | Apple Inc. | Learned dual band WiFi network association method |
KR101814248B1 (en) | 2014-09-05 | 2018-01-04 | 주식회사 케이티 | Methods for transmitting data using a WLAN carrier and Apparatuses thereof |
US10560891B2 (en) * | 2014-09-09 | 2020-02-11 | Blackberry Limited | Medium Access Control in LTE-U |
KR102238214B1 (en) * | 2014-09-12 | 2021-04-12 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | Display apparatus and control method of the same |
US10779161B2 (en) | 2014-09-15 | 2020-09-15 | Nokia Solutions And Networks Oy | Delivery of cellular network insights to subscriber devices through SSID via cellular system information block |
US9887907B2 (en) | 2014-09-18 | 2018-02-06 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Base station initiated control mechanism for supporting supplemental link |
US10334481B2 (en) | 2014-09-18 | 2019-06-25 | Kt Corporation | Method and apparatus for processing user plane data |
WO2016043561A2 (en) * | 2014-09-19 | 2016-03-24 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Communication method and apparatus in wireless communication system supporting d2d communication |
US9736083B2 (en) * | 2014-09-22 | 2017-08-15 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Techniques for packet-switched video telephony setup with QOS preconditions |
US10736175B2 (en) * | 2014-10-02 | 2020-08-04 | Kt Corporation | Method for processing data using WLAN carrier and apparatus therefor |
US9516220B2 (en) | 2014-10-02 | 2016-12-06 | Intel Corporation | Interactive video conferencing |
EP4075832A1 (en) * | 2014-10-03 | 2022-10-19 | Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. | Methods for restricted direct discovery |
EP3202214B1 (en) * | 2014-10-03 | 2021-08-25 | Intel Corporation | Packet data network connection establishment during handover |
US9999089B2 (en) * | 2014-10-09 | 2018-06-12 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Frame number extension for long discontinuous receive (DRX) cycles |
US10764912B2 (en) * | 2014-10-13 | 2020-09-01 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Scheduling request modes for enhanced component carriers |
US10244083B2 (en) | 2014-10-16 | 2019-03-26 | Intel Corporation | Method, apparatus and system for using a user equipment as a small evolved NodeB for a small cell |
JP6586422B2 (en) * | 2014-10-16 | 2019-10-02 | 京セラ株式会社 | User terminal, relay device, and processor |
US20160119896A1 (en) * | 2014-10-22 | 2016-04-28 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Methods for handling of user equipment pages in radio resource control connected mode |
US9699800B2 (en) * | 2014-10-23 | 2017-07-04 | Intel IP Corporation | Systems, methods, and appartatuses for bearer splitting in multi-radio HetNet |
US10219292B2 (en) * | 2014-10-24 | 2019-02-26 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Flexible multiplexing and feedback for variable transmission time intervals |
US10123323B2 (en) * | 2014-10-24 | 2018-11-06 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Dynamic uplink/downlink frame structure for enhanced component carriers |
US10187803B2 (en) * | 2014-10-27 | 2019-01-22 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Systems and methods for controlling SCell on/off durations |
US10455414B2 (en) * | 2014-10-29 | 2019-10-22 | Qualcomm Incorporated | User-plane security for next generation cellular networks |
US9887822B2 (en) | 2014-11-03 | 2018-02-06 | Intel IP Corporation | System and method to address resource collision for asymmetric region allocation |
US9800387B2 (en) | 2014-11-06 | 2017-10-24 | Intel IP Corporation | Computing apparatus with cross-subframe scheduling |
EP3018936B1 (en) * | 2014-11-07 | 2018-05-30 | Alcatel Lucent | Secondary base station bearer change |
US10129920B2 (en) * | 2014-11-10 | 2018-11-13 | Nec Corporation | Control apparatus, radio communication device, and method therefor |
CN105634701B (en) * | 2014-11-19 | 2019-10-11 | 南京中兴软件有限责任公司 | The sending method and device of information sequence |
KR102251353B1 (en) | 2014-11-25 | 2021-05-12 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method for organizing proximity network and an electronic device thereof |
US9906973B2 (en) * | 2014-11-28 | 2018-02-27 | Industrial Technology Research Institute | Evolved NodeB and traffic dispatch method thereof |
US10021346B2 (en) | 2014-12-05 | 2018-07-10 | Intel IP Corporation | Interactive video conferencing |
US20160164725A1 (en) * | 2014-12-08 | 2016-06-09 | Cyntec Co., Ltd. | Wireless System Package and Communication Method of Wireless System Package and Communication Device |
US9819972B1 (en) * | 2014-12-10 | 2017-11-14 | Digital Keystone, Inc. | Methods and apparatuses for a distributed live-on-demand (LOD) origin |
CN112188585A (en) | 2014-12-12 | 2021-01-05 | 索尼公司 | Apparatus and method for wireless communication |
CN106211027B (en) * | 2014-12-25 | 2021-06-18 | 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 | Method and equipment for realizing time-frequency synchronization of D2D terminal |
EP3244549B1 (en) * | 2015-01-07 | 2021-03-03 | LG Electronics Inc. | Method for reporting channel quality information in tdd type wireless communication system, and device therefor |
US9781753B2 (en) * | 2015-01-09 | 2017-10-03 | Acer Incorporated | Proximity map request method, server and network entity using the same, proximity request validating method, and server and network entity using the same |
US10306450B2 (en) * | 2015-01-09 | 2019-05-28 | Acer Incorporated | Proximity request validating method, user equipment using the same, identity request method, and network entity using the same |
KR102518821B1 (en) | 2015-01-20 | 2023-04-06 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for transmitting uplink control information and apparatus therefor |
JP6648702B2 (en) * | 2015-02-10 | 2020-02-14 | ソニー株式会社 | Transmitting device, transmitting method, receiving device and receiving method |
SG11201510546TA (en) * | 2015-02-13 | 2016-09-29 | Ericsson Telefon Ab L M | Establishment of dual connectivity |
US10412132B2 (en) * | 2015-02-16 | 2019-09-10 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Broadcasting signal transmission device, broadcast signal reception device, broadcast signal transmission method, and broadcast signal reception method |
WO2016140271A1 (en) * | 2015-03-03 | 2016-09-09 | 京セラ株式会社 | Base station, wireless terminal, and network device |
WO2016153176A1 (en) | 2015-03-20 | 2016-09-29 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for performing uplink synchronization in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor |
US10530461B2 (en) * | 2015-03-25 | 2020-01-07 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Relay discovery and association messages |
US11284337B2 (en) | 2015-03-27 | 2022-03-22 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Selection of proximity services relay |
CN107211473B (en) * | 2015-03-31 | 2021-01-29 | 华为技术有限公司 | Communication method, user equipment and base station |
KR102415672B1 (en) | 2015-04-09 | 2022-07-04 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and appratus for transmitting and receiving a message between devices |
CN106160948B (en) * | 2015-04-20 | 2020-11-20 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Method and device for determining Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) quantity |
US9641642B2 (en) | 2015-04-22 | 2017-05-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method for time shifting cellular data transfers |
US9813936B2 (en) | 2015-04-22 | 2017-11-07 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and method for scheduling time-shifting traffic in a mobile cellular network |
FR3035763A1 (en) * | 2015-04-28 | 2016-11-04 | Commissariat Energie Atomique | METHOD OF ASSOCIATING TERMINALS WITH CELLS IN A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK |
CN107996022B (en) * | 2015-05-22 | 2021-08-27 | Lg电子株式会社 | Wireless device and method for receiving downlink control channel |
US10693602B2 (en) | 2015-05-29 | 2020-06-23 | Futurewei Technologies, Inc. | System and method for a long-term evolution (LTE)-compatible subframe structure for wideband LTE |
US10225380B2 (en) * | 2015-05-29 | 2019-03-05 | Futurewei Technologies, Inc. | Systems and methods for a subframe structure for wideband LTE |
KR20160143145A (en) * | 2015-06-04 | 2016-12-14 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method for providing multimidea service and electronic device thereof |
GB2539243A (en) * | 2015-06-11 | 2016-12-14 | Fujitsu Ltd | A method in a terminal, a method in a communications system, a terminal and a communications system |
US9930634B1 (en) * | 2015-06-11 | 2018-03-27 | Sprint Spectrum L.P. | Systems and methods for efficient updating of tracking area information for relay based networks |
US10868601B2 (en) | 2015-06-12 | 2020-12-15 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd | Method and device for reporting channel state information in wireless communication system |
US20160373360A1 (en) * | 2015-06-16 | 2016-12-22 | Saguna Networks Ltd. | Methods Circuits Devices Systems and Associated Machine Executable Instructions for Transporting Packetized Data Across a Cellular Communications Network |
US10903958B2 (en) | 2015-06-19 | 2021-01-26 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method and apparatus for transmitting reference signal in wireless communication system |
US10229135B2 (en) * | 2015-06-22 | 2019-03-12 | Apple Inc. | Cellular network information |
EP3318067B1 (en) * | 2015-07-03 | 2022-05-18 | Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) | A media user client, a media user agent and respective methods performed thereby for providing media from a media server to the media user client |
EP3326410B1 (en) | 2015-07-23 | 2021-03-24 | Intel IP Corporation | Apparatus, system and method of cellular-assisted wlan regulatory information |
KR102496365B1 (en) * | 2015-08-07 | 2023-02-06 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | Method and apparatus for applying discontinuous reception mode in wireless communication system |
CN107926007B (en) | 2015-08-11 | 2022-08-19 | 日本电气株式会社 | Apparatus and method relating to dual connectivity |
WO2017025145A1 (en) * | 2015-08-13 | 2017-02-16 | Telecom Italia S.P.A. | Method and system for enabling inter-plmn proximity services |
KR102513274B1 (en) | 2015-08-21 | 2023-03-24 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for performing hybrid automatic repeat request in a wireless communication system |
KR102340499B1 (en) * | 2015-09-04 | 2021-12-17 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | Method and apparatus for controlling uplink transmission power in wireless communication system |
WO2017043767A1 (en) * | 2015-09-11 | 2017-03-16 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for operating idle mode by applying extended drx mode in wireless communication system, and apparatus therefor |
US10326514B2 (en) * | 2015-09-11 | 2019-06-18 | Intel IP Corporation | Reference signals for initial acquisition in 5G systems |
US10716009B2 (en) * | 2015-09-11 | 2020-07-14 | Nec Corporation | Apparatus, method, and system relating to minimization of drive tests (MDT) measurements |
KR20180042299A (en) | 2015-09-14 | 2018-04-25 | 삼성전자주식회사 | How to Manage In-Device Co-existence (IDC) Problems and UE |
US20180227726A1 (en) * | 2015-09-18 | 2018-08-09 | Nec Corporation | Base station, radio terminal, and methods therein |
KR101954495B1 (en) * | 2015-09-23 | 2019-03-07 | 주식회사 케이티 | Methods for controlling mobility of UE and Apparatuses thereof |
WO2017050395A1 (en) * | 2015-09-25 | 2017-03-30 | Nokia Solutions And Networks Oy | Reduction of in-device coexistence interference |
CN106559169B (en) * | 2015-09-25 | 2020-08-11 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Signaling configuration method and device |
WO2017052569A1 (en) * | 2015-09-25 | 2017-03-30 | Nokia Solutions And Networks Oy | Initiating and selecting a relay ue for d2d communications |
CN106559204B (en) | 2015-09-29 | 2020-05-26 | 电信科学技术研究院 | Pilot frequency configuration method and device |
CN106559920B (en) * | 2015-09-30 | 2022-09-09 | 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 | Method and apparatus for supporting SIPTO or LIPA bearer release under dual connectivity architecture |
CN107950056B (en) * | 2015-10-06 | 2021-02-23 | 苹果公司 | Dual radio operation between access systems using 3GPP radio access technologies |
US10873984B2 (en) * | 2015-10-06 | 2020-12-22 | Nec Corporation | Apparatus related to dual connectivity |
CN108029060B (en) | 2015-10-09 | 2020-12-04 | 苹果公司 | Network initiated packet data network connection |
EP3363253B1 (en) * | 2015-10-14 | 2020-12-02 | Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) | Managing transitions between different user equipment activity configurations |
BR112018007418A2 (en) | 2015-10-14 | 2018-10-16 | Ericsson Telefon Ab L M | method performed by a node, method performed by a gateway, mobility node and gateway |
CN106604356B (en) | 2015-10-15 | 2020-02-14 | 华为终端有限公司 | Wireless communication access method, device, processor and wireless terminal |
US10432386B2 (en) * | 2015-10-19 | 2019-10-01 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Flexible time division duplexing (TDD) subframe structure with latency reduction |
US10756799B2 (en) | 2015-10-23 | 2020-08-25 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd | Method and device for transmitting and receiving channel state information in mobile communication system |
US10368346B2 (en) * | 2015-10-30 | 2019-07-30 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Dynamic subframe structure |
CN106685500B (en) * | 2015-11-05 | 2019-11-12 | 中国移动通信集团公司 | A kind of CSI-RS indicating means, base station and user equipment |
CN106792773B (en) * | 2015-11-24 | 2020-07-14 | 上海诺基亚贝尔股份有限公司 | Data transmission method and equipment based on virtual anchor point |
US9814050B2 (en) * | 2015-11-30 | 2017-11-07 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Systems and methods for performing network configurable access and data transfer procedures |
US9942578B1 (en) * | 2015-12-07 | 2018-04-10 | Digital Keystone, Inc. | Methods and apparatuses for a distributed live-on-demand (LOD) origin |
US10085276B2 (en) * | 2015-12-09 | 2018-09-25 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Frame configuration of dynamic uplink/downlink switch |
US11831584B2 (en) * | 2015-12-15 | 2023-11-28 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Techniques for indicating a dynamic subframe type |
WO2017116298A1 (en) * | 2015-12-30 | 2017-07-06 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Methods and devices for cell edge robustness of pdcch |
KR102233218B1 (en) * | 2016-01-19 | 2021-03-29 | 삼성전자주식회사 | A method for control at least one device to communicate at a mobile device and the mobile device in a wireless communicaton system |
EP3409059B1 (en) | 2016-01-29 | 2021-04-07 | LG Electronics Inc. -1- | Method for processing an uplink grant of which a resource size is zero in wireless communication system and a device therefor |
JP6676766B2 (en) * | 2016-02-03 | 2020-04-08 | 株式会社Nttドコモ | Wireless communication method |
EP3411978A1 (en) * | 2016-02-03 | 2018-12-12 | Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. | Methods, systems and apparatus for scheduling of subframes and hybrid automatic repeat request (harq) feedback |
CN105592558B (en) * | 2016-02-05 | 2018-01-09 | 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 | A kind of data transmission method, terminal and data transmission system |
US9924431B2 (en) * | 2016-02-08 | 2018-03-20 | Smartsky Networks LLC | Seamless relocation of a mobile terminal in a wireless network |
US10420154B2 (en) | 2016-02-10 | 2019-09-17 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Providing a system information block request and response |
US9998500B2 (en) * | 2016-02-15 | 2018-06-12 | Wipro Limited | Methods and systems for performing lawful interception (LI) in communication networks involving content adulteration with colluding agents |
JP2019068113A (en) * | 2016-02-16 | 2019-04-25 | シャープ株式会社 | Terminal device, MME (Mobility Management Entity), and communication control method |
US10085256B2 (en) * | 2016-02-16 | 2018-09-25 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Downlink operations with shortened transmission time intervals |
WO2017156790A1 (en) | 2016-03-18 | 2017-09-21 | 广东欧珀移动通信有限公司 | Method and d2d device used for d2d communications |
US9894679B2 (en) | 2016-03-18 | 2018-02-13 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Dynamic adjustment of downlink and uplink traffic scheduling |
CN107205275A (en) * | 2016-03-18 | 2017-09-26 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | A kind of information transferring method and device |
CN108605263B (en) | 2016-03-18 | 2022-03-15 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | Device-to-device based communication method and terminal |
EP3386258B1 (en) | 2016-03-30 | 2023-05-03 | Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp., Ltd. | Data sending method and apparatus |
CN114698102A (en) * | 2016-03-31 | 2022-07-01 | 三星电子株式会社 | Method for determining paging occasions and monitoring paging occasions based on CEL in an EDRX cycle |
CN107294687A (en) * | 2016-04-01 | 2017-10-24 | 索尼公司 | Electronic equipment and method for electronic equipment, message processing device |
US9960830B2 (en) | 2016-04-04 | 2018-05-01 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method and apparatus for managing beam in beamforming system |
WO2017176438A1 (en) * | 2016-04-04 | 2017-10-12 | Intel IP Corporation | Paging design for stand-alone beamformed system |
KR20170114911A (en) | 2016-04-04 | 2017-10-16 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving feedback in a wireless communication system |
WO2017176017A1 (en) | 2016-04-04 | 2017-10-12 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving feedback in wireless communication system |
WO2017179921A1 (en) * | 2016-04-14 | 2017-10-19 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Operating method according to changed tdd uplink-downlink configuration in wireless communication system, and apparatus therefor |
CN107370582A (en) * | 2016-05-12 | 2017-11-21 | 株式会社Ntt都科摩 | reference signal sending method, detection method, base station and mobile station |
WO2017193370A1 (en) | 2016-05-13 | 2017-11-16 | 富士通株式会社 | Information transmission device and method, and communication system |
CN107404771B (en) * | 2016-05-19 | 2020-02-11 | 展讯通信(上海)有限公司 | Communication terminal and method for requesting to expand discontinuous reception parameters |
US10375561B2 (en) | 2016-05-26 | 2019-08-06 | International Business Machines Corporation | Coordinating the use of independent radio receivers associated with multiple different transmitters |
US10587699B2 (en) * | 2016-05-26 | 2020-03-10 | International Business Machines Corporation | Coordinating the use of independent radio receivers associated with a single transmitter |
CN107453852B (en) * | 2016-05-31 | 2020-05-15 | 电信科学技术研究院 | Subframe type notification and determination method and device |
WO2017209667A1 (en) * | 2016-05-31 | 2017-12-07 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Icn connectivity awareness |
US10182387B2 (en) | 2016-06-01 | 2019-01-15 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for distributing content via diverse networks |
JP7074667B2 (en) * | 2016-06-10 | 2022-05-24 | 株式会社Nttドコモ | Terminals, wireless communication methods, base stations and systems |
US9961527B2 (en) | 2016-06-30 | 2018-05-01 | Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. | Access control and scheduling mechanism for MTC devices |
US10314037B2 (en) | 2016-07-08 | 2019-06-04 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Latency reduction techniques in wireless communications |
WO2018010775A1 (en) * | 2016-07-12 | 2018-01-18 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Automatic configuration testing and verification of a communication node |
JP6703180B2 (en) * | 2016-07-13 | 2020-06-03 | 北京小米移動軟件有限公司Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co.,Ltd. | Data transmission method, device, computer program, and recording medium |
CN107659947B (en) * | 2016-07-26 | 2022-08-02 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | State measurement method, device and system |
TWI618424B (en) * | 2016-07-29 | 2018-03-11 | 財團法人資訊工業策進會 | Intercepting user equipment and lawful interception method thereof for use in 3gpp direct mode communication |
WO2018026199A1 (en) * | 2016-08-02 | 2018-02-08 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method and apparatus for communicating in a wireless communication system |
US20200107381A1 (en) * | 2016-08-10 | 2020-04-02 | Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. | Methods, apparatus, and systems for power efficient d2d communications for wearable and iot devices |
US10863473B2 (en) * | 2016-08-10 | 2020-12-08 | Convida Wireless, Llc | Methods, network, integrated circuitry and apparatus for telecommunications device location |
CN109479234B (en) * | 2016-08-10 | 2021-11-16 | 苹果公司 | Method, apparatus and machine readable medium for synchronization signal transmission |
US20180069685A1 (en) * | 2016-09-07 | 2018-03-08 | Mediatek Inc. | Dynamic TDD Design, Methods And Apparatus Thereof |
WO2018045519A1 (en) * | 2016-09-08 | 2018-03-15 | 华为技术有限公司 | Wireless communication method, base station, and terminal |
CN107872834B (en) * | 2016-09-28 | 2023-10-24 | 华为技术有限公司 | Information transmission method and device |
EP3520563A1 (en) * | 2016-09-30 | 2019-08-07 | Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (PUBL) | Radio resource control connection establishment |
KR20190062459A (en) * | 2016-09-30 | 2019-06-05 | 광동 오포 모바일 텔레커뮤니케이션즈 코포레이션 리미티드 | Method and apparatus for transmitting channel state information |
US11057913B2 (en) * | 2016-10-11 | 2021-07-06 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method and apparatus for reducing latency based on pre-configured physical uplink shared channel in wireless communication system |
CN106411911B (en) * | 2016-10-19 | 2019-05-07 | 浙江大学 | A method of non-interrupted probability is monitored to maximize system based on active sniffing |
CN110024354B (en) * | 2016-10-25 | 2022-05-03 | 意大利电信股份公司 | Proximity service access in a mobile communication network |
CN108377527B (en) * | 2016-11-02 | 2021-02-26 | 华为技术有限公司 | Network architecture suitable for flexible deployment scene |
US10505697B2 (en) | 2016-11-03 | 2019-12-10 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Facilitating a mobile device specific physical downlink shared channel resource element mapping indicator |
CN108024375B (en) * | 2016-11-04 | 2020-12-15 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method and device for data transmission |
US11032095B2 (en) * | 2016-11-23 | 2021-06-08 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Method for optimized delivery of sub-service flows using broadcast/multicast |
US10091784B1 (en) * | 2016-12-31 | 2018-10-02 | Sprint Communications Company L.P. | Device-to-device (D2D) scheduling control in orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) wireless system |
BR112019013617A2 (en) * | 2017-01-05 | 2020-01-07 | Nec Corporation | ACCESS NETWORK NODE VIA RADIO, RADIO TERMINAL, AND METHODS AND MEDIA READABLE BY COMPUTER OF THE SAME |
CN108282867B (en) | 2017-01-05 | 2021-09-21 | 华为技术有限公司 | Data transmission method, device and system |
US10299173B2 (en) * | 2017-01-05 | 2019-05-21 | Htc Corporation | Device and method of handling a PDN connection in LTE to NR/5G inter-system mobility |
US11228949B2 (en) * | 2017-01-06 | 2022-01-18 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Intra-RAT handover for next generation system |
US10498636B2 (en) | 2017-01-19 | 2019-12-03 | Hughes Network Systems, Llc | Very small aperture terminal including cell site components, and a system |
EP3352432A1 (en) * | 2017-01-20 | 2018-07-25 | Sentiance NV | Method and system for classifying an activity of a user |
CN108347324B (en) * | 2017-01-25 | 2022-05-31 | 华为技术有限公司 | Communication method and network device |
KR20180090689A (en) * | 2017-02-03 | 2018-08-13 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method for managing resource for lte-nr coexistence |
CN110178324B (en) * | 2017-02-06 | 2021-05-07 | 苹果公司 | Synchronization method based on synchronization signal blocks in new radio systems, next generation node-B and user equipment |
KR102648505B1 (en) * | 2017-02-24 | 2024-03-18 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Apparatus and method for load balancing in wireless communication system |
JP6893235B2 (en) * | 2017-03-02 | 2021-06-23 | 株式会社Nttドコモ | Terminals, wireless communication methods, base stations and systems |
CN108696923A (en) * | 2017-03-03 | 2018-10-23 | 展讯通信(上海)有限公司 | Mobile terminal and its power consumption control method |
WO2018170626A1 (en) * | 2017-03-18 | 2018-09-27 | 华为技术有限公司 | Connection recovery method, access and mobility management function entity, and user equipment |
EP3606115B1 (en) * | 2017-03-20 | 2022-05-04 | LG Electronics Inc. | Method for interaction between layers in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor |
CN116709271A (en) * | 2017-03-24 | 2023-09-05 | 苹果公司 | Wake-up signal for machine type communication and narrowband internet of things devices |
WO2018170911A1 (en) | 2017-03-24 | 2018-09-27 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method and apparatus for configuring power consumption parameter |
US10091777B1 (en) | 2017-03-31 | 2018-10-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Facilitating physical downlink shared channel resource element mapping indicator |
WO2018186787A1 (en) * | 2017-04-03 | 2018-10-11 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Configuration-dependent dci timing |
US10425981B2 (en) * | 2017-04-04 | 2019-09-24 | Roku, Inc. | Network-based user identification |
US10230632B2 (en) | 2017-04-05 | 2019-03-12 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Systems and methods for tunnel free connectionless packet routing to a service edge |
US10659151B2 (en) | 2017-04-21 | 2020-05-19 | Apple Inc. | Apparatus, system and method for utilizing a flexible slot format indicator |
RU2651251C1 (en) * | 2017-04-28 | 2018-04-18 | АО "Лаборатория Касперского" | Method of downloading filtering rules to mobile device |
WO2018201284A1 (en) | 2017-05-02 | 2018-11-08 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Port group indication and port subsets in a csi-rs resource for new radio (nr) |
CN110087327A (en) * | 2017-05-05 | 2019-08-02 | 华为技术有限公司 | The method and device of resource distribution |
US11219077B2 (en) * | 2017-05-05 | 2022-01-04 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method and apparatus for coordination of RRC configurations between interworking nodes in dual connectivity |
US11134531B2 (en) * | 2017-05-05 | 2021-09-28 | Htc Corporation | Device and method of handling a dual connectivity |
US20180338254A1 (en) * | 2017-05-22 | 2018-11-22 | Industrial Technology Research Institute | Beam tracking method in multi-cell group of millimeter wave communication system and related apparatuses using the same |
US10638426B2 (en) * | 2017-05-25 | 2020-04-28 | Tracie Wireless Llc | Staggered extended sleep cycles, comprising on and off sleep durations in wireless devices |
US10673605B2 (en) * | 2017-06-15 | 2020-06-02 | Apple Inc. | Semi-static and dynamic TDD configuration for 5G-NR |
CN115297507A (en) | 2017-06-16 | 2022-11-04 | 三星电子株式会社 | Method and apparatus for processing packet in next generation mobile communication system |
KR102333690B1 (en) | 2017-07-25 | 2021-12-01 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Apparatus and method for sampling a signal in wireless communication system adopting a time division duplex |
EP3659314B1 (en) * | 2017-07-25 | 2021-06-16 | Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (Publ) | Subscription concealed identifier |
US10959171B2 (en) | 2017-07-31 | 2021-03-23 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Cell selection by service group |
WO2019025503A1 (en) * | 2017-08-01 | 2019-02-07 | Sony Corporation | Communications device, infrastructure equipment, communications system and methods |
RU2742100C1 (en) * | 2017-08-04 | 2021-02-02 | Гуандун Оппо Мобайл Телекоммьюникейшнс Корп., Лтд. | Method of transmitting data, end device and network device |
CN109392078B (en) * | 2017-08-11 | 2021-11-02 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Signal detection and transmission method and device, and remote user equipment |
KR102437642B1 (en) * | 2017-08-18 | 2022-08-30 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Apparatus and method for scheduling uplink transmission in wireless communication system |
CN109246042B (en) * | 2017-08-25 | 2019-11-19 | 华为技术有限公司 | A kind of method, equipment and the system of signal transmission |
CN107396449B (en) * | 2017-08-31 | 2020-09-22 | 中国能源建设集团江苏省电力设计院有限公司 | Configuration method of special subframe of TD-LTE electric wireless private network |
US11838863B2 (en) | 2017-09-25 | 2023-12-05 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method for monitoring downlink channel or downlink signal, and wireless device |
WO2019059674A1 (en) * | 2017-09-25 | 2019-03-28 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for monitoring downlink channel or downlink signal, and wireless device |
WO2019064445A1 (en) * | 2017-09-28 | 2019-04-04 | 富士通株式会社 | Base station device, terminal device, wireless communication system, and transmission timing setting method |
US10931725B2 (en) * | 2017-09-29 | 2021-02-23 | Apple Inc. | Multiway audio-video conferencing |
KR102384877B1 (en) * | 2017-09-29 | 2022-04-08 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for transmission and reception of data information in wirelss communication system |
US20200267189A1 (en) * | 2017-11-07 | 2020-08-20 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Lawful interception security |
CN109661031B (en) * | 2017-11-17 | 2020-06-16 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method for transmitting paging message, terminal equipment and network equipment |
CN109819483B (en) * | 2017-11-21 | 2020-09-11 | 电信科学技术研究院 | Special bearer creation method, mobility management entity and packet data network gateway |
KR20200088851A (en) * | 2017-11-24 | 2020-07-23 | 광동 오포 모바일 텔레커뮤니케이션즈 코포레이션 리미티드 | How to connect to a wireless LAN, terminal device and network device |
JP2020504512A (en) * | 2017-11-27 | 2020-02-06 | エルジー エレクトロニクス インコーポレイティド | Method and apparatus for performing CSI reporting in a wireless communication system |
US10827468B2 (en) * | 2017-11-30 | 2020-11-03 | Mediatek Inc. | UE behaviour on resource assignment collision between coreset/search space and SFI assignment |
CN111641578B (en) * | 2017-12-04 | 2023-01-24 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | Wireless communication method, station and storage medium |
EP3731593A4 (en) | 2018-01-10 | 2021-02-24 | Sony Corporation | Information processing device and information processing system |
WO2019136629A1 (en) * | 2018-01-10 | 2019-07-18 | 富士通株式会社 | Method for sending and acquiring system information, device, and communication system |
US11246133B2 (en) | 2018-01-12 | 2022-02-08 | Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp., Ltd. | Signal transmission method, terminal device and network device |
US10470044B2 (en) * | 2018-01-12 | 2019-11-05 | Intel Corporation | Resolving bidding down attacks for multi-connectivity |
US10904909B2 (en) | 2018-01-23 | 2021-01-26 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | System and method for time domain grant-free PUSCH resource allocation |
MX2020008475A (en) * | 2018-02-22 | 2020-09-28 | Ericsson Telefon Ab L M | Nr user plane signaling controlled triggering of pdcp duplication. |
CN111886890B (en) * | 2018-03-12 | 2022-04-12 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Method, device and system for configuring minimization of drive tests under multi-connection architecture |
US11483895B2 (en) | 2018-04-13 | 2022-10-25 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Interaction between WUS and RRM measurement |
CN109451824B (en) * | 2018-04-24 | 2022-08-12 | 北京小米移动软件有限公司 | Wireless backhaul connection method and apparatus |
US11151315B1 (en) | 2018-05-02 | 2021-10-19 | Microstrategy Incorporated | Automatically defining groups in documents |
KR102450653B1 (en) * | 2018-05-11 | 2022-10-06 | 광동 오포 모바일 텔레커뮤니케이션즈 코포레이션 리미티드 | Signal transmission method, base station and network node |
US10999761B2 (en) * | 2018-05-11 | 2021-05-04 | Apple Inc. | Methods to determine a hybrid automatic repeat request acknowledgement (HARQ-ACK) codebook in new radio (NR) systems |
US10798562B2 (en) * | 2018-05-24 | 2020-10-06 | Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. | Differentiation of dual-connectivity split-bearer wireless access |
CN110557764A (en) * | 2018-05-31 | 2019-12-10 | 电信科学技术研究院有限公司 | Method and equipment for transmitting and receiving signals |
US10880917B2 (en) | 2018-06-11 | 2020-12-29 | Apple Inc. | TDD single Tx switched UL solution |
US10595187B2 (en) * | 2018-07-23 | 2020-03-17 | Syniverse Technologies, Llc | System and method of selective packet data network gateway discovery |
US10798041B2 (en) * | 2018-07-25 | 2020-10-06 | Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. | Systems and methods for classification and/or transmission of messages |
EP3836669B1 (en) * | 2018-08-10 | 2023-10-18 | Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co., Ltd. | Method and apparatus for sending information |
CN109168171B (en) | 2018-09-14 | 2020-09-25 | 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 | Configuration information acquisition method, device, equipment and system |
US20220022161A1 (en) * | 2018-09-28 | 2022-01-20 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Groupcast for sidelink communication |
JP6609788B1 (en) * | 2018-10-01 | 2019-11-27 | 二村 憲人 | Information communication device, authentication program for information communication device, and authentication method |
CN112823538A (en) * | 2018-10-08 | 2021-05-18 | 苹果公司 | Mobile device context transfer in 5G systems |
EP3871440A1 (en) * | 2018-10-23 | 2021-09-01 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Method and arrangement for flow control in a split path communication system |
EP3876620A4 (en) * | 2018-11-01 | 2021-11-24 | Fujitsu Limited | Resource indication method and apparatus as well as communication system |
US11411690B2 (en) | 2018-11-21 | 2022-08-09 | Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute | Method for transmitting and receiving data channel based on a plurality of physical uplink shared channels in communication system and apparatus for the same |
CN111385858B (en) * | 2018-12-29 | 2022-04-05 | 华为技术有限公司 | Communication method and communication device |
WO2020147091A1 (en) * | 2019-01-17 | 2020-07-23 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | Wireless communication method and device |
US10798617B1 (en) | 2019-01-23 | 2020-10-06 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Providing low latency traffic segregation for mobile edge computing network environments |
US11683714B2 (en) | 2019-01-29 | 2023-06-20 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Mobile edge computing with low latency traffic segregation within a PDN using dedicated bearers |
CN111510996B (en) * | 2019-01-30 | 2024-01-09 | 瑞昱半导体股份有限公司 | Wireless communication circuit and method for controlling the same |
SG11202008573XA (en) * | 2019-02-13 | 2020-10-29 | Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp Ltd | Bearing configuration method and device, and network device |
US11350304B1 (en) | 2019-03-19 | 2022-05-31 | Sprint Spectrum L.P. | Use of backhaul load as basis to control configuration of dual-connectivity |
CN110086567B (en) * | 2019-03-22 | 2021-11-23 | 西安电子科技大学 | Method for enhancing DCI (Downlink control information) carrying mode information of HARQ (hybrid automatic repeat request) stop process |
CN110191476B (en) * | 2019-04-18 | 2020-07-14 | 浙江大学 | Reconfigurable antenna array-based non-orthogonal multiple access method |
CN110149627B (en) * | 2019-04-22 | 2020-08-18 | 西北工业大学 | Deep learning-based emergency communication system wireless energy supply D2D communication safety method |
CN110062384B (en) * | 2019-04-28 | 2020-10-27 | 西安交通大学 | Wireless monitoring method based on signal rotation |
CN111918237B (en) * | 2019-05-07 | 2022-03-25 | 华为技术有限公司 | Communication method and device |
EP3979684A4 (en) | 2019-05-29 | 2022-07-20 | Kyocera Corporation | Communication control method |
CN111836407B (en) * | 2019-08-09 | 2023-09-15 | 维沃移动通信有限公司 | Processing method and apparatus |
US11689981B2 (en) * | 2019-08-14 | 2023-06-27 | Intel Corporation | Technologies to reduce interruption for non-dual connectivity (DC) based handover (HO) |
US11533613B2 (en) * | 2019-08-16 | 2022-12-20 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Providing secure communications between computing devices |
CN112543512A (en) * | 2019-09-23 | 2021-03-23 | 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 | Direct communication establishing method, user equipment and session management function entity |
US11659552B2 (en) * | 2019-09-27 | 2023-05-23 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Time division duplex (TDD) slot format configuration indication for sidelink communications |
US11337168B2 (en) * | 2019-11-27 | 2022-05-17 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Protecting shared low noise amplifiers by limiting transmission power |
US20230039024A1 (en) * | 2020-01-06 | 2023-02-09 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Method and apparatus for dynamic group management |
US11064372B1 (en) * | 2020-01-16 | 2021-07-13 | Sprint Spectrum L.P. | Dynamic reconfiguration of secondary access node radiation pattern in response to threshold high rate of secondary access node addition failures for dual connectivity |
US11019542B1 (en) * | 2020-02-13 | 2021-05-25 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Facilitation of dynamic spectrum aggregation for 5G or other next generation network |
US11974256B2 (en) * | 2020-04-13 | 2024-04-30 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Scheduling and bandwidth part adaptation techniques for extended reality |
US11696359B2 (en) * | 2020-05-18 | 2023-07-04 | Qualcomm Incoporated | Override of default base station discontinuous reception cycle for individual user equipment |
WO2021257047A1 (en) * | 2020-06-15 | 2021-12-23 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Obtaining permanent user equipment (ue) id that corresponds to a ciphered or temporary ue id |
US11343762B1 (en) | 2020-08-17 | 2022-05-24 | Sprint Spectrum L.P. | Serving cell selection based on backhaul connection maximum bit rate and packet-drop rate |
US11240715B1 (en) | 2020-09-16 | 2022-02-01 | Sprint Spectrum L.P. | Cooperative use of secondary-node data load and UE data load as basis to control configuration of dual connectivity for UE |
US11330658B1 (en) | 2020-09-29 | 2022-05-10 | Sprint Spectrum L.P. | Pairing of access nodes for dual-connectivity based on evaluation of inter-access-node delay |
EP4271053A1 (en) * | 2020-12-24 | 2023-11-01 | LG Electronics Inc. | Method and device for performing sl drx operation on basis of default drx configuration in nr v2x |
US11888913B2 (en) * | 2021-04-28 | 2024-01-30 | Lemon Inc. | External stream representation properties |
US11716641B1 (en) | 2022-01-24 | 2023-08-01 | Rohde & Schwarz Gmbh & Co. Kg | Systems and methods for generating synthetic wireless channel data |
CN114567392B (en) * | 2022-03-10 | 2023-07-28 | 四川恒湾科技有限公司 | Uplink self-detection method for remote radio unit |
WO2024006370A1 (en) * | 2022-06-28 | 2024-01-04 | Intel Corporation | Systems, apparatus, articles of manufacture, and methods for device authentication in a dedicated private network |
Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2008008964A2 (en) * | 2006-07-14 | 2008-01-17 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Methods and apparatus for supporting multiple connections |
US20100080116A1 (en) * | 2008-09-29 | 2010-04-01 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Re-establishing a radio resource control connection with a non-prepared base station |
US20120044836A1 (en) * | 2009-04-27 | 2012-02-23 | Sivapathalingham Sivavakeesar | Mobile network, radio access node, system including a relay apparatus, and method thereof |
US20120289231A1 (en) | 2011-05-12 | 2012-11-15 | Krishna Balachandran | Method And Apparatus For Improved Mobile Communications In Heterogeneous Wireless Networks |
Family Cites Families (376)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CA2119199C (en) * | 1993-05-07 | 2003-05-27 | Steven J. Willhoff | Dual stage rssi handoff trigger |
US6574266B1 (en) * | 1999-06-25 | 2003-06-03 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Base-station-assisted terminal-to-terminal connection setup |
US6718173B1 (en) | 1999-09-30 | 2004-04-06 | Iowa State University Research Foundation | Location information recovery and management for mobile networks |
AUPQ672900A0 (en) | 2000-04-06 | 2000-05-04 | Linlan Research And Design Company Pty Ltd | An emergency signalling device |
US7114010B2 (en) * | 2000-06-28 | 2006-09-26 | Broadcom Corporation | Multi-mode controller |
BR0309326A (en) | 2002-04-17 | 2005-02-01 | Thomson Licensing Sa | Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN) as a public mobile network for telecom / wlan system interworking |
DE10219358A1 (en) | 2002-04-30 | 2003-11-20 | Advanced Micro Devices Inc | Automatic gain control in a WLAN receiver with improved settling time |
US7212837B1 (en) | 2002-05-24 | 2007-05-01 | Airespace, Inc. | Method and system for hierarchical processing of protocol information in a wireless LAN |
US7965693B2 (en) | 2002-05-28 | 2011-06-21 | Zte (Usa) Inc. | Interworking mechanism between wireless wide area network and wireless local area network |
MXPA04012158A (en) | 2002-06-06 | 2005-04-19 | Thomson Licensing Sa | Interworking function (iwf) as logical radio network controller (rnc) for hybrid coupling in an interworking between wlan and a mobile communications network. |
US8787988B2 (en) * | 2003-01-29 | 2014-07-22 | Intellectual Ventures I Llc | Power management for wireless direct link |
US6963739B2 (en) * | 2002-10-21 | 2005-11-08 | Motorola, Inc. | Method and apparatus for providing information intercept in an ad-hoc wireless network |
KR100913869B1 (en) * | 2002-10-28 | 2009-08-26 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Terminal and method for creating and changing automatically configuration information in wireless-lan |
US7403505B2 (en) * | 2002-12-31 | 2008-07-22 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Resource granting in multi-carrier CDMA systems |
US20040165563A1 (en) | 2003-02-24 | 2004-08-26 | Hsu Raymond T. | Wireless local access network system detection and selection |
EP1458148A1 (en) * | 2003-03-10 | 2004-09-15 | Sony International (Europe) GmbH | Quality of Service (QoS) -aware handover procedure for Ad-Hoc networks |
JP4515451B2 (en) * | 2003-03-24 | 2010-07-28 | ストリックス システムズ インコーポレイテッド | Wireless local area network system with self-configuration and self-optimization |
US20040192222A1 (en) | 2003-03-26 | 2004-09-30 | Nokia Corporation | System and method for semi-simultaneously coupling an antenna to transceivers |
US7729686B2 (en) * | 2003-04-02 | 2010-06-01 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Security methods for use in a wireless communications system |
EP1467586B1 (en) | 2003-04-09 | 2010-05-19 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method for cell reselection in an MBMS mobile communication system |
DE60311326T2 (en) * | 2003-04-11 | 2007-05-31 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | CONNECTION SETUP WITH MULTI-ACCESS |
US7356015B2 (en) | 2003-05-02 | 2008-04-08 | Steven Blumenthal | Data handoff method between wireless local area network and wireless wide area network |
DE10323006A1 (en) * | 2003-05-21 | 2004-12-23 | Siemens Ag | Central listening and evaluation unit |
US7089029B2 (en) | 2003-06-09 | 2006-08-08 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Adjusting the transmission power of a forward access channel (FACH), and a corresponding network for mobile telecommunications |
EP1494394A1 (en) | 2003-06-30 | 2005-01-05 | Sony International (Europe) GmbH | Distance-aware service mechanism for determining the availability of remote services in wireless personal area networks |
US6958982B2 (en) | 2003-07-16 | 2005-10-25 | Interdigital Technology Corporation | Method and apparatus for storing mobile station physical measurements and MAC performance statistics in a management information base of an access point |
KR100735242B1 (en) * | 2003-12-16 | 2007-07-03 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method for providing/notifying interworking information of mobile telecommunication network and wireless local area network and therefor system |
KR100669238B1 (en) | 2003-12-19 | 2007-01-15 | 한국전자통신연구원 | Method for Providing Routing Protocol in Sensor Network |
CN101015221A (en) * | 2004-01-05 | 2007-08-08 | 摩托罗拉公司 | Method and apparatus for associating with a communication system |
KR100595644B1 (en) * | 2004-01-09 | 2006-07-03 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for receiving notification indicator for point-to-multipoint service in mobile communication system |
GB2409952B (en) | 2004-01-12 | 2008-10-15 | Nec Corp | Mobile telecommunications |
GB2410862B (en) * | 2004-02-04 | 2007-11-14 | Vodafone Plc | Mobile telecommunications systems handover |
US7310526B2 (en) * | 2004-02-06 | 2007-12-18 | Nec Laboratories America, Inc. | Load-aware handoff and site selection scheme |
KR101150553B1 (en) * | 2004-03-12 | 2012-05-31 | 인터디지탈 테크날러지 코포레이션 | Method and system for switching a radio access technology between wireless communication systems with a multi-mode wireless transmit/receive unit |
GB0407347D0 (en) * | 2004-03-31 | 2004-05-05 | Nokia Corp | Monitoring quality of service in a wireless communications network |
EP1596617B1 (en) | 2004-05-11 | 2011-11-23 | Tektronix International Sales GmbH | Method and apparatus for establishing and performing a test scenario for a real network controller of a mobile communications network |
JPWO2005115034A1 (en) | 2004-05-21 | 2008-03-27 | 三菱電機株式会社 | Third generation mobile communication / wireless LAN integration system and third generation mobile communication / wireless LAN integration method |
JP4670270B2 (en) | 2004-06-28 | 2011-04-13 | ソニー株式会社 | Communication system and communication apparatus |
US7233583B2 (en) * | 2004-06-28 | 2007-06-19 | Nokia Corporation | Method and apparatus providing context transfer for inter-BS and inter-PCF handoffs in a wireless communication system |
ATE460063T1 (en) * | 2004-09-17 | 2010-03-15 | Ericsson Telefon Ab L M | 3G/GSM AND WIFI INTEGRATION OF TELEPHONE |
US7515548B2 (en) | 2004-09-28 | 2009-04-07 | Texas Instruments Incorporated | End-point based approach for determining network status in a wireless local area network |
AU2005330513B2 (en) * | 2004-10-29 | 2011-07-14 | Skyhook Wireless, Inc. | Location beacon database and server, method of building location beacon database, and location based service using same |
US7873357B2 (en) | 2004-11-04 | 2011-01-18 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Selective disablement of mobile communication equipment capabilities |
KR100644398B1 (en) * | 2005-01-17 | 2006-11-10 | 주식회사 케이티프리텔 | Method to help for searching APaccess point of mobile station, and combination mobile-station |
EP1699197A1 (en) * | 2005-01-27 | 2006-09-06 | Alcatel | Method for sending channel quality information in a multi-carrier radio communication system, corresponding mobile terminal and base station |
US20060172736A1 (en) | 2005-02-01 | 2006-08-03 | Intel Corporation | Methods and apparatus for operating a wireless electronic device having a plurality of communication platforms |
JP4714482B2 (en) * | 2005-02-28 | 2011-06-29 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Cryptographic communication system and method |
US20070121561A1 (en) | 2005-03-09 | 2007-05-31 | Haim Yashar | Wlan mobile phone and wireless network |
FI117735B (en) * | 2005-03-23 | 2007-01-31 | First Hop Oy | Centralized management for a set of network nodes |
KR100762647B1 (en) | 2005-03-31 | 2007-10-01 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Node B and Method for Managing Radio Resource Using the Same |
ATE489819T1 (en) | 2005-04-29 | 2010-12-15 | Ericsson Telefon Ab L M | NETWORKING OF CELLULAR RADIO NETWORKS AND WIRELESS DATA NETWORKS |
EP1727329A1 (en) | 2005-05-23 | 2006-11-29 | Siemens S.p.A. | Method and system for the remote management of a machine via IP links of an IP multimedia subsystem, IMS |
US20090124196A1 (en) | 2005-07-20 | 2009-05-14 | Ntt Docomo, Inc. | Multimedia content providing method and mobile station |
CN100426802C (en) * | 2005-07-22 | 2008-10-15 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method of providing existant information |
TW200721861A (en) | 2005-09-09 | 2007-06-01 | Nokia Corp | Use of measurement pilot for radio measurement in a wireless network |
JP4738950B2 (en) | 2005-09-16 | 2011-08-03 | パナソニック株式会社 | Wireless communication apparatus and handover method |
US20070110015A1 (en) | 2005-10-19 | 2007-05-17 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Select diversity for radio communications |
US7821996B2 (en) | 2005-10-27 | 2010-10-26 | Motorola Mobility, Inc. | Mobility enhancement for real time service over high speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) |
US7886013B2 (en) * | 2005-12-15 | 2011-02-08 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Selective throttling presence updates |
CN101009919A (en) * | 2006-01-24 | 2007-08-01 | 华为技术有限公司 | Authentication method based on the end-to-end communication of the mobile network |
DE102006012743A1 (en) | 2006-03-17 | 2007-09-27 | Nec Europe Ltd. | Method for operating a mobile node |
US20070224988A1 (en) * | 2006-03-24 | 2007-09-27 | Interdigital Technology Corporation | Method and apparatus for performing a handover procedure between a 3gpp lte network and an alternative wireless network |
US8462742B2 (en) * | 2006-03-31 | 2013-06-11 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd | System and method for optimizing authentication procedure during inter access system handovers |
KR100895180B1 (en) | 2006-04-14 | 2009-04-24 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method for Radio Resource Control Connection Setup and Apparatus for the same |
JP5130287B2 (en) | 2006-04-28 | 2013-01-30 | リサーチ イン モーション リミテッド | WLAN and WWAN connection migration method and apparatus |
WO2007130325A2 (en) * | 2006-05-01 | 2007-11-15 | Interdigital Technology Corporation | Method and apparatus for facilitating lossless handover in 3gpp long term evolution systems |
EP1860904A1 (en) | 2006-05-26 | 2007-11-28 | Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. | Mobility management in communication networks |
EP2030468B1 (en) * | 2006-06-16 | 2023-05-17 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Changing lte specific anchor with simple tunnel switching |
US20090061877A1 (en) * | 2006-07-14 | 2009-03-05 | Gallagher Michael D | Generic Access to the Iu Interface |
DE102006038592B4 (en) * | 2006-08-17 | 2008-07-03 | Siemens Ag | Method and device for providing a wireless mesh network |
US8289924B2 (en) * | 2006-08-24 | 2012-10-16 | Panasonic Corporation | Communication system, communication method, radio terminal, radio relay device, and control device |
US8316117B2 (en) | 2006-09-21 | 2012-11-20 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Personal presentity presence subsystem |
US20080096560A1 (en) | 2006-10-24 | 2008-04-24 | Nortel Networks Limited | System and method for ensuring handoffs across heterogeneous networks |
KR100945859B1 (en) * | 2006-11-01 | 2010-03-05 | 한국전자통신연구원 | Method and apparatus for creating common physical channel |
US9265003B2 (en) | 2006-11-13 | 2016-02-16 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Apparatus and methods for reducing power consumption and/or radio frequency interference in a mobile computing device |
KR100875916B1 (en) * | 2006-12-05 | 2008-12-26 | 한국전자통신연구원 | Sensor node communication security method and system |
US8238835B2 (en) * | 2006-12-07 | 2012-08-07 | Mitsubishi Electric Corporation | Wireless communication system, wireless terminal station, wireless base station, and wireless communication method |
KR101248542B1 (en) | 2007-01-10 | 2013-04-03 | 닛본 덴끼 가부시끼가이샤 | Wireless communication terminal device, access point device, wireless communication system, and information service method and information fetching method in the system |
CN101622835B (en) | 2007-01-18 | 2012-12-05 | 诺基亚公司 | Network oriented self-optimization measurement control |
EP1962520B1 (en) | 2007-02-23 | 2018-06-13 | BlackBerry Limited | Improved method for updating location information on a wireless device |
EP1973265A1 (en) * | 2007-03-21 | 2008-09-24 | Nokia Siemens Networks Gmbh & Co. Kg | Key refresh in SAE/LTE system |
WO2008134473A2 (en) | 2007-04-26 | 2008-11-06 | Interdigital Technology Corporation | Method and apparatus of measurement mechanism and efficient paging and broadcasting scheme implementation in mbms dedicated cell of lte systems |
EP2158782B1 (en) | 2007-05-23 | 2014-07-30 | Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) | Reducing battery power consumption of a user equipment |
ATE484935T1 (en) | 2007-06-22 | 2010-10-15 | Ericsson Telefon Ab L M | HANDING PERIODIC LOCATION UPDATES |
US20090006187A1 (en) * | 2007-06-28 | 2009-01-01 | Andrew Marcuvitz | Profile based advertising method for out-of-line advertising delivery |
KR101498968B1 (en) * | 2007-07-05 | 2015-03-12 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Apparatus and method for determining communication resource of peer to peer in a communication system |
WO2009020789A2 (en) * | 2007-08-03 | 2009-02-12 | Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. | Security procedure and apparatus for handover in a 3gpp long term evolution system |
CN101370283B (en) * | 2007-08-13 | 2011-03-30 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method and apparatus for processing non-access layer message in switching course of evolution network |
CN101115239A (en) | 2007-09-04 | 2008-01-30 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Time negotiation method of login overtime and relogin method and logout method |
US8849275B2 (en) * | 2007-09-11 | 2014-09-30 | Wichorus Inc. | Method and apparatus for load balancing in a wireless communication network |
CN100568990C (en) * | 2007-09-24 | 2009-12-09 | 北京邮电大学 | A kind of network system and method that realizes presenting business based on IMS |
EP2193623B1 (en) | 2007-09-26 | 2017-06-28 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Header structure for resource allocations in an lte system |
US9198033B2 (en) * | 2007-09-27 | 2015-11-24 | Alcatel Lucent | Method and apparatus for authenticating nodes in a wireless network |
US8503547B2 (en) * | 2007-10-11 | 2013-08-06 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Scrambling codes for secondary synchronization codes in wireless communication systems |
JP5088091B2 (en) * | 2007-10-29 | 2012-12-05 | 富士通株式会社 | Base station apparatus, communication method, and mobile communication system |
US8514809B2 (en) | 2007-11-16 | 2013-08-20 | Nokia Siemens Networks Oy | Mapping quality of service for intersystem handover |
US20090135804A1 (en) * | 2007-11-26 | 2009-05-28 | Francis Swarts | Method And System For Ordering Sequences For Synchronization Signaling In A Wireless System |
CN101939965B (en) | 2008-02-08 | 2013-10-30 | 爱立信电话股份有限公司 | Method and apparatuses for authorising provision of indirected content associated with presentity of presence service |
KR100905385B1 (en) * | 2008-03-16 | 2009-06-30 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for effective transmission of a control signal in a wireless communication system |
CN101552978B (en) * | 2008-03-31 | 2011-04-13 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method, system and device for realizing route optimization |
EP2111018A1 (en) | 2008-04-17 | 2009-10-21 | Alcatel Lucent | Method for saving energy and radio resources in wireless communication devices |
US20090270097A1 (en) | 2008-04-29 | 2009-10-29 | Gallagher Michael D | Method and Apparatus for User Equipment Registration Updates Triggered by a Tracking Area Change |
US8331272B2 (en) * | 2008-04-29 | 2012-12-11 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Aggregation of resources over multiple frames in a TDD communication system |
US8804546B2 (en) * | 2008-06-13 | 2014-08-12 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for managing interaction between DRX cycles and paging cycles |
US9585069B2 (en) * | 2008-06-19 | 2017-02-28 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Access terminal assisted node identifier confusion resolution |
US8396037B2 (en) * | 2008-06-23 | 2013-03-12 | Htc Corporation | Method for synchronizing PDCP operations after RRC connection re-establishment in a wireless communication system and related apparatus thereof |
US8498207B2 (en) * | 2008-06-26 | 2013-07-30 | Reverb Networks | Dynamic load balancing |
US8488634B2 (en) * | 2008-07-07 | 2013-07-16 | Apple Inc. | Use of first and second preambles in wireless communication signals |
US8577363B2 (en) * | 2008-07-14 | 2013-11-05 | Nokia Corporation | Setup of device-to-device connection |
WO2010006649A1 (en) * | 2008-07-17 | 2010-01-21 | Nokia Siemens Networks Oy | Device-to-device communications in cellular system |
US20100029282A1 (en) | 2008-07-31 | 2010-02-04 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Resource partitioning in heterogeneous access point networks |
US20110189987A1 (en) * | 2008-08-06 | 2011-08-04 | Zte (Usa) Inc. | Method for femto-cell identification |
US8391206B2 (en) * | 2008-08-07 | 2013-03-05 | Alcatel Lucent | Method of joint resource allocation and clustering of base stations |
EP2152032B1 (en) | 2008-08-07 | 2012-10-03 | Nokia Siemens Networks OY | Providing lawful intercept information at a network element being assigned to a cell of a mobile telecommunication network |
CN101651898B (en) | 2008-08-15 | 2012-12-12 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method, device and system for acquiring position area information during switching heterogeneous networks |
EP2166694A3 (en) * | 2008-09-18 | 2012-01-04 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Transmission of sounding reference signals in TDD communication systems |
CN101677266B (en) * | 2008-09-19 | 2012-12-26 | 电信科学技术研究院 | Method, system and apparatus for the operation of reordering and repeated elimination |
US8145218B2 (en) | 2008-09-22 | 2012-03-27 | Motorola Solutions, Inc. | Method and system for wireless handoffs |
US8301156B2 (en) * | 2008-09-25 | 2012-10-30 | Optimi Corporation | Load balancing for capacity improvement in mobile wireless communication networks |
KR101545873B1 (en) * | 2008-09-26 | 2015-08-21 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and system for providing presence service |
WO2010049587A1 (en) * | 2008-10-31 | 2010-05-06 | Nokia Corporation | Dynamic allocation of subframe scheduling for time division duplex operation in a packet-based wireless communication system |
US20100113027A1 (en) * | 2008-11-01 | 2010-05-06 | Broadband Wireless Technology Corp | Apparatus, Method, And Tangible Machine-Readable Medium Thereof For CallBack HandOver Procedure In A FemTo-Network |
US8654682B2 (en) * | 2008-11-10 | 2014-02-18 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Method and apparatus for enabling services and media in a communication network |
US8971933B2 (en) * | 2008-11-18 | 2015-03-03 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for determining DRX cycle used for paging |
KR101264805B1 (en) | 2008-11-20 | 2013-05-15 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and System for providing presence service |
US20100144363A1 (en) | 2008-12-10 | 2010-06-10 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Load-based adaptive inactivity timers |
US8437741B2 (en) * | 2008-12-19 | 2013-05-07 | Tecore | Intelligent network access controller and method |
ES2368385T3 (en) * | 2009-01-29 | 2011-11-16 | Lg Electronics Inc. | SIGNAL TRANSMISSION SCHEME FOR EFFECTIVE MANAGEMENT OF THE COMMON IMPROVED DEDICATED CHANNEL. |
CN102308557A (en) * | 2009-02-06 | 2012-01-04 | 瑞典爱立信有限公司 | A method and server for accessing and providing presence information in a communications network |
US8571550B2 (en) | 2009-02-09 | 2013-10-29 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Managing access control to closed subscriber groups |
US9204349B2 (en) * | 2009-02-10 | 2015-12-01 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for facilitating a hand-in of user equipment to femto cells |
US8577378B2 (en) * | 2009-02-10 | 2013-11-05 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for facilitating a beacon-assisted handover to a home Node-B for users on an active call |
US8391224B2 (en) * | 2009-03-03 | 2013-03-05 | Avaya Inc. | Proactive load distribution for 802.111-based wireless LANs |
US8190119B2 (en) | 2009-03-03 | 2012-05-29 | E3 Llc | System and method for direct communication between wireless communication devices |
WO2010102668A1 (en) * | 2009-03-12 | 2010-09-16 | Nokia Siemens Networks Oy | Device-to-device communication |
US8537724B2 (en) * | 2009-03-17 | 2013-09-17 | Motorola Mobility Llc | Relay operation in a wireless communication system |
US8805371B2 (en) * | 2009-03-17 | 2014-08-12 | Airvana Lp | Identifying hand-over targets in lightly coordinated networks |
US8588178B2 (en) * | 2009-03-19 | 2013-11-19 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Adaptive association and joint association and resource partitioning in a wireless communication network |
EP2237469B1 (en) * | 2009-04-03 | 2018-10-31 | Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) | Method and device for measuring a received signal power in a mobile communication system |
US9351340B2 (en) * | 2009-04-08 | 2016-05-24 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Apparatus and method for mode selection for device-to-device communications |
CN101868027A (en) * | 2009-04-17 | 2010-10-20 | 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 | Configuration and sending method of uplink signal transmission resource, base station and user terminal |
WO2010122771A1 (en) | 2009-04-20 | 2010-10-28 | パナソニック株式会社 | Wireless communication terminal apparatus, wireless communication base station apparatus, and wireless communication method |
WO2010121494A1 (en) | 2009-04-22 | 2010-10-28 | 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 | Method and equipment for processing local network type for base station |
US8213360B2 (en) * | 2009-04-29 | 2012-07-03 | Nokia Corporation | Apparatus and method for flexible switching between device-to-device communication mode and cellular communication mode |
KR20100119714A (en) * | 2009-05-01 | 2010-11-10 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for accessing femto cell |
WO2010125535A1 (en) * | 2009-05-01 | 2010-11-04 | Nokia Corporation | Systems, methods, and apparatuses for facilitating authorization of a roaming mobile terminal |
US8842633B2 (en) | 2009-05-04 | 2014-09-23 | Blackberry Limited | Systems and methods for mobile stations to identify radio access technologies |
CA2764459A1 (en) | 2009-06-03 | 2010-12-09 | Research In Motion Limited | Voice service in evolved packet system |
KR20100132427A (en) | 2009-06-09 | 2010-12-17 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method of low duty mode operation for femto base station |
US20100317315A1 (en) | 2009-06-16 | 2010-12-16 | Richard Charles Burbidge | Method for accessing a service unavailable through a network cell |
US8774039B2 (en) | 2009-06-17 | 2014-07-08 | Panasonic Corporation | Communication system, mobile terminal, network node, and base station apparatus |
US8260356B2 (en) * | 2009-06-18 | 2012-09-04 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method and system for indicating method used to scramble dedicated reference signals |
US8391141B2 (en) | 2009-06-18 | 2013-03-05 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Systems and methods for selecting a network access system |
JP4660609B2 (en) * | 2009-06-22 | 2011-03-30 | 株式会社エヌ・ティ・ティ・ドコモ | Mobile communication method, radio base station, and relay node |
CN101945391A (en) * | 2009-07-03 | 2011-01-12 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method, device and system for selecting target access network for heterogeneous network intercommunicating entity |
JP2011015327A (en) * | 2009-07-06 | 2011-01-20 | Fujitsu Ltd | Communication management apparatus and communication management program |
US9236896B2 (en) | 2009-07-09 | 2016-01-12 | Mediatek Inc. | Systems and methods for coexistence of a plurality of wireless communications modules |
US8458353B2 (en) * | 2009-08-13 | 2013-06-04 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for link aggregation in a heterogeneous communication system |
US8599768B2 (en) | 2009-08-24 | 2013-12-03 | Intel Corporation | Distributing group size indications to mobile stations |
US8280417B2 (en) * | 2009-12-23 | 2012-10-02 | Intel Corporation | Short user messages in system control signaling |
WO2011034340A2 (en) * | 2009-09-15 | 2011-03-24 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method and apparatus for transmitting a downlink reference signal in a wireless communication system supporting multiple antennas |
WO2011034317A2 (en) * | 2009-09-17 | 2011-03-24 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method and apparatus for transmitting reference signal in time division duplex system |
US9083482B2 (en) * | 2009-09-27 | 2015-07-14 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method and apparatus for transmitting reference signal in wireless communication system |
CN107104780B (en) * | 2009-10-01 | 2020-10-16 | 交互数字专利控股公司 | Uplink control data transmission |
IN2012DN02809A (en) | 2009-10-01 | 2015-07-24 | Interdigital Patent Holdings | |
US9763197B2 (en) * | 2009-10-05 | 2017-09-12 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Component carrier power control in multi-carrier wireless network |
JP5187909B2 (en) * | 2009-10-05 | 2013-04-24 | 株式会社エヌ・ティ・ティ・ドコモ | Mobile communication method and relay node |
US20110085519A1 (en) * | 2009-10-09 | 2011-04-14 | Nokia Corporation | Spreading Code Allocation |
US9059818B2 (en) * | 2009-10-16 | 2015-06-16 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method and apparatus for transmitting multi-user MIMO reference signal in wireless communication system for supporting relay |
US8666403B2 (en) * | 2009-10-23 | 2014-03-04 | Nokia Solutions And Networks Oy | Systems, methods, and apparatuses for facilitating device-to-device connection establishment |
WO2011049499A1 (en) * | 2009-10-23 | 2011-04-28 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Li reporting of updated location information for eps |
US20110103247A1 (en) * | 2009-11-02 | 2011-05-05 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Channel status reporting |
US8254985B2 (en) | 2009-11-04 | 2012-08-28 | Research In Motion Limited | Methods and apparatus for use in controlling wireless transceiver operation in a mobile communication device |
KR101584603B1 (en) * | 2009-11-10 | 2016-01-14 | 노키아 솔루션스 앤드 네트웍스 오와이 | Network device in a communication network and method for providing communications traffic breakout |
KR101173628B1 (en) | 2009-11-20 | 2012-08-13 | 경북대학교 산학협력단 | Ad-hoc wireless instant messenger system and service security method thereof |
US9178670B2 (en) * | 2009-11-27 | 2015-11-03 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Downlink control information transmitting method and base station, and downlink control information receiving method and user device |
US20110130119A1 (en) * | 2009-12-02 | 2011-06-02 | Symbol Technologies, Inc. | Staging a mobile device to an enterprise network securely using voice channel of a wireless wide area network (wwan) |
US8588109B2 (en) * | 2009-12-11 | 2013-11-19 | Verizon Patent And Licensing Inc. | Integrated lawful intercept for internet protocol multimedia subsystem (IMS) over evolved packet core (EPC) |
KR101217579B1 (en) | 2009-12-11 | 2013-01-03 | 한국전자통신연구원 | method and apparatus for providing a presence service in a group communication system based on session initiation protocol |
CN102104924B (en) * | 2009-12-18 | 2014-12-03 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method and system for switching networks |
US8559343B2 (en) * | 2009-12-23 | 2013-10-15 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Flexible subframes |
US9124406B2 (en) * | 2009-12-29 | 2015-09-01 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Fallback operation for cross-carrier signaling in multi-carrier operation |
JP5890319B2 (en) | 2010-01-08 | 2016-03-22 | インターデイジタル パテント ホールディングス インコーポレイテッド | Managing power consumption at base stations and remote access points |
TWI526098B (en) | 2010-01-08 | 2016-03-11 | 內數位專利控股公司 | Method and apparatus for selected internet protocol traffic offload |
US8416690B2 (en) | 2010-01-11 | 2013-04-09 | Research In Motion Limited | Explicit congestion notification based rate adaptation using binary marking in communication systems |
US8477724B2 (en) * | 2010-01-11 | 2013-07-02 | Research In Motion Limited | System and method for enabling session context continuity of local service availability in local cellular coverage |
CN102823208B (en) * | 2010-01-12 | 2016-01-20 | 爱立信(中国)通信有限公司 | For the method and apparatus of channel estimating in mimo system and detection |
KR101720334B1 (en) * | 2010-01-12 | 2017-04-05 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for supporting discontinuous reception operation in mobile communication system |
US8867362B2 (en) | 2010-01-15 | 2014-10-21 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Congestion control for interworking between networks |
CN102137400B (en) * | 2010-01-23 | 2015-04-01 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Safety treatment method and system when re-establishing RRC (radio resource control) connection |
US8285291B2 (en) * | 2010-02-02 | 2012-10-09 | Clearwire Ip Holdings Llc | System and method for multimode device handover |
KR101622792B1 (en) | 2010-02-04 | 2016-06-01 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for handover in wireless communication system |
KR101148036B1 (en) * | 2010-02-08 | 2012-06-01 | 주식회사 케이티 | Method and system for handover to WLAN network from LTE network |
AU2011214925B2 (en) | 2010-02-10 | 2015-06-11 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Method and arrangement in a telecommunication system |
US9220028B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2015-12-22 | Blackberry Limited | Methods and apparatus to perform measurements |
CN102860063A (en) * | 2010-02-12 | 2013-01-02 | 捷讯研究有限公司 | Methods and apparatus to perform measurements |
KR101494061B1 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2015-02-16 | 엔이씨 유럽 리미티드 | Method and mobile terminal device for supporting multiple simultaneous pdn connections to the same apn |
US8977257B2 (en) | 2010-03-05 | 2015-03-10 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus to control visited network access for devices |
US20110222523A1 (en) | 2010-03-12 | 2011-09-15 | Mediatek Inc | Method of multi-radio interworking in heterogeneous wireless communication networks |
US8078175B2 (en) * | 2010-03-15 | 2011-12-13 | Motorola Mobility, Inc. | Method for facilitating a handover of a communication device, communication device, application server for facilitating a handover of a communication device, and communication system arrangement |
WO2011115421A2 (en) * | 2010-03-17 | 2011-09-22 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method and apparatus for providing channel state information-reference signal (csi-rs) configuration information in a wireless communication system supporting multiple antennas |
EP2548389B1 (en) * | 2010-03-17 | 2015-06-24 | Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) | Enhanced key management for srns relocation |
US20110252477A1 (en) * | 2010-04-08 | 2011-10-13 | Kamakshi Sridhar | Dynamic Load Balancing In An Extended Self Optimizing Network |
US9125072B2 (en) * | 2010-04-13 | 2015-09-01 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Heterogeneous network (HetNet) user equipment (UE) radio resource management (RRM) measurements |
US9307431B2 (en) | 2010-04-13 | 2016-04-05 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Reporting of channel properties in heterogeneous networks |
KR101719683B1 (en) * | 2010-05-04 | 2017-04-04 | 삼성전자주식회사 | An efficient measurements on carriers for a multiple carriers aggregated UE in a wireless system |
CN102244895B (en) | 2010-05-13 | 2015-12-16 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | The ambulant shunt method of a kind of enhancing and device |
US9420055B2 (en) * | 2010-05-13 | 2016-08-16 | Futurewei Technologies, Inc. | System, apparatus for content delivery for internet traffic and methods thereof |
KR101107094B1 (en) | 2010-05-18 | 2012-01-30 | 웨이브솔루션즈 주식회사 | System for remote management of mobile device and control method thereof |
ES2375866B1 (en) | 2010-05-21 | 2013-01-29 | Vodafone España, S.A.U | NETWORK ELEMENT AND METHOD TO REDUCE THE SIGNALING LOAD IN A NETWORK CONTROLLING ELEMENT OF A CELLULAR TELECOMMUNICATIONS NETWORK. |
SG188377A1 (en) | 2010-06-04 | 2013-04-30 | Univ Texas | Methods and apparatuses for relaying data in a wireless communications system |
GB201009649D0 (en) | 2010-06-09 | 2010-07-21 | Roke Manor Research | Mobile device and method |
KR101721015B1 (en) * | 2010-06-21 | 2017-03-29 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Blind scheduiling apparatus in a mobile communication system and method thereof |
KR101730088B1 (en) * | 2010-06-28 | 2017-04-26 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Wireless communication system and method for processing handover thereof |
US8838159B2 (en) * | 2010-06-28 | 2014-09-16 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method and apparatus for transmitting reference signal in multi-node system |
KR20120009616A (en) | 2010-07-19 | 2012-02-02 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Display system, display device and control method thereof |
CN101902737B (en) * | 2010-07-29 | 2014-04-09 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Method and system for synchronizing integrity protection counter of SRB3 (Signaling Radio Bearer 3) and SRB4 |
EP2416597B1 (en) | 2010-08-05 | 2016-03-16 | HTC Corporation | Method of handling emergency sessions and related communication device |
KR101694773B1 (en) | 2010-08-05 | 2017-01-23 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for connecting wireless network in a digital device |
US9246603B2 (en) | 2010-08-12 | 2016-01-26 | Mediatek Inc. | Method of in-device interference mitigation for cellular, bluetooth, WiFi, and satellite systems coexistence |
US8619654B2 (en) | 2010-08-13 | 2013-12-31 | Intel Corporation | Base station selection method for heterogeneous overlay networks |
US8553563B2 (en) * | 2010-08-13 | 2013-10-08 | Blackberry Limited | Methods and apparatus to limit reporting of neighbor cell measurements |
US8787337B2 (en) | 2010-08-13 | 2014-07-22 | Intel Corporation | Techniques for managing mobility management signaling in a wireless network |
KR20120015927A (en) | 2010-08-13 | 2012-02-22 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Wireless communication system and method for processing reference signal |
KR101804923B1 (en) | 2010-08-16 | 2017-12-05 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method for allowing terminal to report measurement result for mdt to base station in wireless communication system and device therefor |
US8848516B2 (en) * | 2010-09-15 | 2014-09-30 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Methods and apparatus for relocating and restoring connections through a failed serving gateway and traffic offloading |
US20120309394A1 (en) * | 2010-09-16 | 2012-12-06 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Apparatus and methods for hand-in to a femto node |
JP2013538031A (en) * | 2010-09-28 | 2013-10-07 | ブラックベリー リミテッド | Residential / corporate network connection management and handover scenarios |
CN102438312B (en) * | 2010-09-29 | 2015-06-03 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Mobile communication system and CSI-RS (channel state indication reference signal) configuring method thereof |
CA2813290C (en) * | 2010-10-01 | 2017-03-14 | Research In Motion Limited | Method and apparatus for avoiding in-device coexistence interference |
KR101862429B1 (en) | 2010-10-04 | 2018-05-29 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for handling in-device co-existence interference in a wireless communication enviroment |
EP2442610B1 (en) * | 2010-10-13 | 2017-12-06 | Alcatel Lucent | In-sequence delivery of upstream user traffic during handover |
KR101276860B1 (en) * | 2010-10-20 | 2013-06-18 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Apparatus and method for transceiving data in a wireless access system supporting machine to machine communication |
CN102457918B (en) * | 2010-10-20 | 2015-12-02 | 华为技术有限公司 | Determine the method and apparatus of Target cell |
KR101769375B1 (en) * | 2010-10-21 | 2017-08-18 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method of receiving data from base station at relay node in wireless communication system and apparatus thereof |
US10637891B2 (en) * | 2010-11-02 | 2020-04-28 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Methods and devices for media description delivery |
EP2922335B1 (en) | 2010-11-05 | 2018-03-07 | Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. | Methods for handing over a relay node from a source enb to a target enb and corresponding relay node |
WO2012061224A1 (en) | 2010-11-05 | 2012-05-10 | Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. | Methods, apparatus and systems for applying almost blank subframe (abs) patterns |
EP2451214B1 (en) * | 2010-11-05 | 2012-11-28 | Alcatel Lucent | Method for deciding on a potential load balancing operation in a wireless network and corresponding network element |
CN102468926B (en) * | 2010-11-09 | 2015-05-20 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Configuration method of downlink control information, network equipment and access node |
EP2453710B1 (en) | 2010-11-11 | 2013-10-30 | BlackBerry Limited | Reducing energy consumption of mobile devices using early paging indicator |
KR20120059751A (en) * | 2010-12-01 | 2012-06-11 | 엘지에릭슨 주식회사 | Load re-balancing method and mobile telecommunication system for the same |
CN102076098B (en) * | 2010-12-03 | 2015-09-16 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | Obtain the method and system of Downlink Control Information in MBSFN sub-frame |
WO2012078000A2 (en) | 2010-12-09 | 2012-06-14 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Access method between a terminal and a base station in a wireless communication system and apparatus thereof |
CN102075949B (en) * | 2010-12-22 | 2013-03-20 | 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 | Carrier aggregation (CA) technology-based data transmission method and device |
US20120170497A1 (en) | 2011-01-04 | 2012-07-05 | HT mMobile Inc. | Method for reporting srs in discontinuous reception and wireless communication system thereof |
US8934362B2 (en) | 2011-01-06 | 2015-01-13 | Mediatek Inc. | Power control method to mitigate interference for in-device coexistence |
KR101803019B1 (en) | 2011-01-07 | 2017-12-01 | 주식회사 골드피크이노베이션즈 | Apparatus and method for coordinating in-device coexistence interference in wireless communication system |
KR20120081923A (en) | 2011-01-12 | 2012-07-20 | 주식회사 팬택 | Apparatus and method for coordinating in-device coexistence interference in wireless communication system |
WO2012096527A2 (en) | 2011-01-12 | 2012-07-19 | 주식회사 팬택 | Apparatus and method for coordinating in-device coexistence interference in a wireless communication system |
EP3544326B1 (en) * | 2011-01-21 | 2020-11-04 | BlackBerry Limited | Network apparatus and process to determine the connection context for connections used for (local) offloading |
US20120201158A1 (en) * | 2011-02-03 | 2012-08-09 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Peer-to-peer / wan association control and resource coordination for mobile entities using aggregate neighborhood utility metrics |
KR20120091635A (en) * | 2011-02-09 | 2012-08-20 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Authentication method and apparatus in wireless communication system |
WO2012106840A1 (en) * | 2011-02-10 | 2012-08-16 | Renesas Mobile Corporation | Resource allocation for flexible tdd configuration |
KR20120092778A (en) | 2011-02-12 | 2012-08-22 | 주식회사 팬택 | Apparatus and method for performing measurement report considering in-device coexistence interference |
US10187859B2 (en) | 2011-02-14 | 2019-01-22 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Power control and user multiplexing for heterogeneous network coordinated multipoint operations |
US9107184B2 (en) * | 2011-02-14 | 2015-08-11 | Alcatel Lucent | Method for reduced-overhead short message transmission |
US8769076B2 (en) * | 2011-02-14 | 2014-07-01 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Methods and systems for presence publication using SIP register feature tags |
EP2679068B1 (en) | 2011-02-21 | 2017-04-05 | Broadcom Corporation | Dynamic uplink/downlink configuration for time division duplex |
US9635624B2 (en) * | 2011-02-22 | 2017-04-25 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Discovery reference signal design for coordinated multipoint operations in heterogeneous networks |
US20130265984A1 (en) | 2011-03-07 | 2013-10-10 | Honggang Li | Grouped machine-to-machine communications |
KR101859594B1 (en) * | 2011-03-10 | 2018-06-28 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | Method and Apparatus for Supporting Flexible Time Division Duplex in Communication System |
US9363798B2 (en) * | 2011-03-11 | 2016-06-07 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method and device for terminal to transmit/receive signal in wireless communication system having carrier aggregation technique applied thereto |
US9137733B2 (en) * | 2011-03-15 | 2015-09-15 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Dynamic control of cell reselection parameters |
EP2688226B1 (en) * | 2011-03-18 | 2016-10-05 | LG Electronics Inc. | Method and device for communicating device-to-device |
KR101921179B1 (en) * | 2011-03-23 | 2018-11-22 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Retransmission method for dynamic subframe setting in wireless communication system and apparatus for same |
US9155079B2 (en) * | 2011-03-25 | 2015-10-06 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Communication method and device in a wireless communication system |
WO2012129806A1 (en) * | 2011-03-31 | 2012-10-04 | Renesas Mobile Corporation | Method and apparatus for facilitating device-to-device communication |
US20140086122A1 (en) * | 2011-04-01 | 2014-03-27 | Maruti Gupta | Techniques to control paging for fixed devices |
KR101832261B1 (en) * | 2011-04-01 | 2018-02-27 | 주식회사 팬택 | Handover Apparatus and Method for In-Device Coexistence Interference Avoidance |
CN105429738A (en) * | 2011-04-01 | 2016-03-23 | 华为技术有限公司 | Data transmission method, device and system |
US9088924B2 (en) | 2011-04-01 | 2015-07-21 | Mediatek Inc. | Signaling design to support in-device coexistence interference avoidance |
WO2012134193A2 (en) | 2011-04-01 | 2012-10-04 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method and system of handling in-device coexistence in various wireless network technologies |
US8849950B2 (en) | 2011-04-07 | 2014-09-30 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Network streaming of video data using byte range requests |
WO2012142436A1 (en) | 2011-04-13 | 2012-10-18 | Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. | Method and apparatus for small cell discovery in heterogeneous networks |
KR101500894B1 (en) | 2011-04-20 | 2015-03-09 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Method and apparatus for detecting an access point in a radio access system |
CN102158978B (en) * | 2011-04-22 | 2017-03-01 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | A kind of processing method of Downlink Control Information and system |
WO2012148442A1 (en) | 2011-04-29 | 2012-11-01 | Intel Corporation | Techniques to manage energy savings for interoperable radio access technology networks |
US20120275362A1 (en) | 2011-04-30 | 2012-11-01 | Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. | Devices for interference control signaling |
WO2012149968A1 (en) * | 2011-05-04 | 2012-11-08 | Nokia Siemens Networks Oy | Pathloss-based access node wake-up control |
US20120284785A1 (en) * | 2011-05-05 | 2012-11-08 | Motorola Mobility, Inc. | Method for facilitating access to a first access nework of a wireless communication system, wireless communication device, and wireless communication system |
US20120294163A1 (en) | 2011-05-19 | 2012-11-22 | Renesas Mobile Corporation | Apparatus and Method for Direct Device-to-Device Communication in a Mobile Communication System |
KR101851240B1 (en) * | 2011-05-23 | 2018-04-23 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | Method and apparatus for transmitting of dynamic time division duplex data region in wireless communication system |
GB2491226A (en) | 2011-05-27 | 2012-11-28 | Vodafone Ip Licensing Ltd | Single band query of frequency bands supported by a multi-band WLAN access point |
US20140341109A1 (en) * | 2011-06-02 | 2014-11-20 | Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. | Methods, Apparatus and Systems for Managing Converged Gateway Communications |
KR101840642B1 (en) * | 2011-06-07 | 2018-03-21 | 한국전자통신연구원 | Wireless communication system using distributed antennas and method for performing the same |
US8805374B2 (en) | 2011-06-07 | 2014-08-12 | Intel Corporation | Multi-radio handover manager system and algorithms for heterogeneous wireless networking |
EP2719236B1 (en) * | 2011-06-10 | 2019-02-13 | Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) | Dynamic carrier selection for cell base stations |
US20130148643A1 (en) * | 2011-06-13 | 2013-06-13 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Enhanced discovery procedures in peer-to-peer wireless local area networks (wlans) |
WO2012177190A1 (en) * | 2011-06-20 | 2012-12-27 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Selective relaying in a network node |
CN102843209B (en) * | 2011-06-22 | 2015-09-30 | 华为技术有限公司 | The method and apparatus of control channel |
US9160779B2 (en) * | 2011-06-30 | 2015-10-13 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Dynamic adaptive streaming proxy for unicast or broadcast/multicast services |
WO2013004793A1 (en) * | 2011-07-05 | 2013-01-10 | Nec Europe Ltd. | Method for supporting selection of pdn connections for a mobile terminal and mobile terminal |
US20130016649A1 (en) * | 2011-07-12 | 2013-01-17 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System design for user equipment relays |
KR101896001B1 (en) | 2011-07-12 | 2018-09-06 | 한국전자통신연구원 | Method of mobility management for mobile terminal in a heterogeneous network environment |
US8918096B2 (en) | 2011-07-15 | 2014-12-23 | Nokia Corporation | Method and apparatus providing multi-level proximity indication and small cell discovery |
US9363753B2 (en) * | 2011-07-19 | 2016-06-07 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Sleep mode for user equipment relays |
CN102905324B (en) | 2011-07-25 | 2016-06-08 | 华为技术有限公司 | The method and apparatus of cell change |
US9590814B2 (en) * | 2011-08-01 | 2017-03-07 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Method and apparatus for transport of dynamic adaptive streaming over HTTP (DASH) initialization segment description fragments as user service description fragments |
EP2557890B1 (en) * | 2011-08-12 | 2019-07-17 | BlackBerry Limited | Simplified ue + enb messaging |
US8923274B2 (en) * | 2011-08-15 | 2014-12-30 | Blackberry Limited | Notifying a UL/DL configuration in LTE TDD systems |
US20130044659A1 (en) * | 2011-08-16 | 2013-02-21 | Renesas Mobile Corporation | Wireless Devices and Base Stations and Methods of Operating |
CN102300276B (en) * | 2011-09-14 | 2013-10-30 | 重庆大学 | Method for realizing automatic switch between time division-synchronization code multiple access (TD-SCDMA) cellular network and wireless local area network in heterogeneous network |
WO2013052163A1 (en) | 2011-10-03 | 2013-04-11 | Intel Corporation | Device to device (d2d) communication mechanisms |
US9042918B2 (en) * | 2011-10-03 | 2015-05-26 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Using fingerprints in proximity detection of wireless devices |
TW201330569A (en) | 2011-10-07 | 2013-07-16 | Interdigital Patent Holdings | Method and apparatus for integrating different radio access technologies using carrier aggregation |
GB2495550A (en) * | 2011-10-14 | 2013-04-17 | Ubiquisys Ltd | An access point that can be used to establish connections with UE devices using both cellular and wifi air interfaces |
US9088583B2 (en) * | 2011-10-31 | 2015-07-21 | Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. | Method and apparatus for enabling multimedia synchronization |
US9161331B2 (en) | 2011-11-04 | 2015-10-13 | Futurwei Technologies, Inc. | Positioning enhancement systems and methods |
CN103354666B (en) * | 2011-12-07 | 2017-09-26 | 华为技术有限公司 | Communication means, base station and terminal |
CN103152748B (en) * | 2011-12-07 | 2015-11-25 | 华为技术有限公司 | communication monitoring method, base station and terminal |
CN103167492B (en) * | 2011-12-15 | 2016-03-30 | 华为技术有限公司 | Generate method and the equipment thereof of access layer secret key in a communications system |
US9398473B2 (en) | 2011-12-21 | 2016-07-19 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | System and method for load based optimization in communication networks |
US9559866B2 (en) | 2011-12-21 | 2017-01-31 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Systems and methods for load balancing in cellular networks and wireless local area networks |
US9560652B2 (en) * | 2012-01-10 | 2017-01-31 | Nokia Solutions And Networks Oy | Providing a radio bearer on a plurality of component carriers |
CN102595405A (en) * | 2012-01-21 | 2012-07-18 | 华为技术有限公司 | Authentication method, system and equipment for network access |
US9119120B2 (en) * | 2012-01-23 | 2015-08-25 | Intel Corporation | Network assisted user association and offloading techniques for integrated multi-rat heterogeneous networks |
US9602251B2 (en) * | 2012-01-27 | 2017-03-21 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Devices for reconfiguring uplink and downlink allocations in time domain duplexing wireless systems |
US9247542B2 (en) * | 2012-01-31 | 2016-01-26 | Apple Inc. | Methods and apparatus for efficient spectral usage in extensible carrier deployments |
US20130203380A1 (en) * | 2012-02-05 | 2013-08-08 | Institute For Information Industry | Network device, core network, direct mode communication system and lawful interception method thereof |
CN102547984B (en) * | 2012-02-23 | 2015-03-11 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method and device for paging in device-to-device communication |
KR20140132747A (en) * | 2012-02-29 | 2014-11-18 | 텔레호낙티에볼라게트 엘엠 에릭슨(피유비엘) | Methods and apparatus for enhancing circuit-switched call fallback(csfb) service for a shared network node |
US8774041B2 (en) | 2012-03-02 | 2014-07-08 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Proximity-based wireless handshaking for connection establishment |
US9706423B2 (en) | 2012-03-16 | 2017-07-11 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method of offloading traffic to a wireless local area network |
EP2832150B1 (en) * | 2012-03-25 | 2017-11-22 | Intucell Ltd. | Communication apparatus and method for optimizing performance of a communication network |
EP2832149B1 (en) * | 2012-03-30 | 2019-01-16 | Nokia Solutions and Networks Oy | Devices, methods and computer program products for an improved handover in inter-site carrier aggregation scenarios |
WO2013143613A1 (en) * | 2012-03-30 | 2013-10-03 | Nokia Siemens Networks Oy | Devices, methods and computer program products for an improved handover in inter-site carrier aggregation scenarios |
CN103379427B (en) | 2012-04-13 | 2016-06-15 | 华为技术有限公司 | A kind of localization method, equipment and system |
US9240881B2 (en) * | 2012-04-30 | 2016-01-19 | Alcatel Lucent | Secure communications for computing devices utilizing proximity services |
US9144003B2 (en) * | 2012-05-02 | 2015-09-22 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Apparatus and method for a connected mode with reduced signaling |
US9584297B2 (en) * | 2012-05-11 | 2017-02-28 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Interference management for adaptive TDD with frequency domain separations |
WO2013170908A1 (en) * | 2012-05-15 | 2013-11-21 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Interference management for network assisted device-to-device communication |
US9100852B2 (en) | 2012-05-15 | 2015-08-04 | Futurewei Technologies, Inc. | System and method for network detection and selection |
US8988999B2 (en) | 2012-05-30 | 2015-03-24 | Intel Corporation | Method, system and apparatus of wireless local area network (WLAN) communication in conjunction with cellular communication |
KR20150021561A (en) * | 2012-06-04 | 2015-03-02 | 이든 락 커뮤니케이션즈, 엘엘씨 | Method & system for cellular network load balance |
CN102740289B (en) * | 2012-06-15 | 2015-12-02 | 电信科学技术研究院 | A kind of key updating method, Apparatus and system |
US9203563B2 (en) | 2012-07-02 | 2015-12-01 | Intel Corporation | Devices and methods for radio communication network guided traffic offload |
KR20140017883A (en) | 2012-08-01 | 2014-02-12 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Method and apparatus for cell reselection of user equipment between lte inter frequency or inter radio access technology in a mobile communication system |
EP3668181A1 (en) * | 2012-08-02 | 2020-06-17 | Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) | A node and method for handing over a sub-set of bearers to enable multiple connectivity of a terminal towards several base stations |
US8971182B2 (en) | 2012-08-07 | 2015-03-03 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method for data traffic offloading and apparatus using the same |
US20140050125A1 (en) * | 2012-08-17 | 2014-02-20 | Zte Usa, Inc. | Method for dynamic change of downlink/uplink allocation in lte-tdd systems |
EP2901599B1 (en) * | 2012-09-26 | 2022-06-29 | Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. | Methods for dynamic tdd uplink/downlink configuration |
US10159100B2 (en) * | 2012-09-28 | 2018-12-18 | Nokia Solutions And Networks Oy | Mechanism for establishing packet data network connection with multiple IP addresses |
US8923880B2 (en) | 2012-09-28 | 2014-12-30 | Intel Corporation | Selective joinder of user equipment with wireless cell |
US9185573B2 (en) * | 2012-10-01 | 2015-11-10 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | User equipment, network node and methods therein |
EP2910052A4 (en) * | 2012-10-10 | 2016-07-13 | Broadcom Corp | Method and apparatus for managing handovers |
US9332584B2 (en) * | 2012-10-18 | 2016-05-03 | Apple Inc. | Discontinuous reception cycle scaling in a wireless device |
US9232531B2 (en) | 2012-10-22 | 2016-01-05 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Prioritization of users for switching between co-existence wireless systems |
CN104885492B (en) * | 2012-10-29 | 2020-03-17 | 皇家Kpn公司 | Intercepting device-to-device communications |
US10356640B2 (en) | 2012-11-01 | 2019-07-16 | Intel Corporation | Apparatus, system and method of cellular network communications corresponding to a non-cellular network |
WO2014073865A1 (en) * | 2012-11-06 | 2014-05-15 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving data in a wireless communication system |
WO2014071562A1 (en) * | 2012-11-07 | 2014-05-15 | Broadcom Corporation | Small cell initial access and physical cell identity determination |
US20140133294A1 (en) | 2012-11-09 | 2014-05-15 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Methods and Systems for Broadcasting Load Information to Enable a User Equipment (UE) to Select Different Network Access |
US20140133395A1 (en) * | 2012-11-09 | 2014-05-15 | Samsung Electronics Co. Ltd | Methods and apparatus for identification of small cells |
US9264985B2 (en) | 2012-11-14 | 2016-02-16 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Apparatus and methods of controlling call establishment |
WO2014081262A1 (en) * | 2012-11-25 | 2014-05-30 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving data in a wireless communication system |
US9628251B2 (en) * | 2012-11-29 | 2017-04-18 | Mediatek, Inc. | UE measurement enhancement in adaptive TDD configuration networks |
WO2014085622A1 (en) * | 2012-11-30 | 2014-06-05 | Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. | Method and gateway to handle inactivity timer expiry with a converged gateway |
WO2014084773A1 (en) | 2012-11-30 | 2014-06-05 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Expanding or shrinking a coverage area of a cell |
US9414392B2 (en) | 2012-12-03 | 2016-08-09 | Intel Corporation | Apparatus, system and method of user-equipment (UE) centric access network selection |
US9072027B2 (en) * | 2012-12-07 | 2015-06-30 | Alcatel Lucent | Methods and apparatuses for facilitating D2D bearer switching |
US8855625B2 (en) * | 2012-12-10 | 2014-10-07 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Dynamic steering of traffic across radio access networks |
US8886209B2 (en) * | 2012-12-12 | 2014-11-11 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Long term evolution integrated radio access network system leverage proactive load balancing policy enforcement |
US9655012B2 (en) * | 2012-12-21 | 2017-05-16 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Deriving a WLAN security context from a WWAN security context |
EP2939485B1 (en) * | 2012-12-27 | 2018-08-15 | Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) | Method and apparatus for measurement procedures with composite dynamic subframes in dynamic tdd |
WO2014107122A1 (en) * | 2013-01-04 | 2014-07-10 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Mitigating cross-link interference when using reconfigurable tdd |
EP2944110B1 (en) * | 2013-01-11 | 2019-07-24 | LG Electronics Inc. | Method for transmitting information in wireless communication system |
EP2946503B1 (en) * | 2013-01-16 | 2018-10-03 | LG Electronics Inc. | Method and apparatus for transmitting indication in wireless communication system |
US9723536B2 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2017-08-01 | Avago Technologies General Ip (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. | Wireless communication system utilizing broadcast-based blind offloading |
US9226211B2 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2015-12-29 | Intel IP Corporation | Centralized partitioning of user devices in a heterogeneous wireless network |
US9462515B2 (en) | 2013-01-17 | 2016-10-04 | Broadcom Corporation | Wireless communication system utilizing enhanced air-interface |
US9288717B2 (en) * | 2013-01-29 | 2016-03-15 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Inter-rat systems access network (AN) load balance and congestion control mechanism |
US20140274101A1 (en) * | 2013-03-14 | 2014-09-18 | Alcatel-Lucent Usa Inc. | Methods and systems for load balancing and interference coordination in networks |
US9160515B2 (en) | 2013-04-04 | 2015-10-13 | Intel IP Corporation | User equipment and methods for handover enhancement using scaled time-to-trigger and time-of-stay |
US9609566B2 (en) | 2014-06-03 | 2017-03-28 | Intel Corporation | Radio resource control (RRC) protocol for integrated WLAN/3GPP radio access technologies |
WO2016143560A1 (en) | 2015-03-06 | 2016-09-15 | 京セラ株式会社 | Radio terminal and base station |
-
2013
- 2013-08-26 US US14/129,197 patent/US9226211B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2013-08-26 WO PCT/US2013/056666 patent/WO2014113072A1/en active Application Filing
- 2013-08-26 EP EP13872102.2A patent/EP2946587A4/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2013-08-30 US US14/122,646 patent/US9526001B2/en active Active
- 2013-08-30 WO PCT/US2013/057709 patent/WO2014113073A1/en active Application Filing
- 2013-08-30 CN CN201380065490.7A patent/CN104854916B/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2013-09-03 US US14/125,871 patent/US9357463B2/en active Active
- 2013-09-03 CN CN201380066257.0A patent/CN105009478B/en active Active
- 2013-09-03 EP EP13871937.2A patent/EP2946492A4/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2013-09-03 WO PCT/US2013/057882 patent/WO2014113074A1/en active Application Filing
- 2013-09-06 US US14/127,482 patent/US20150004969A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2013-09-06 CN CN201380065080.2A patent/CN104885504B/en active Active
- 2013-09-06 WO PCT/US2013/058579 patent/WO2014113075A1/en active Application Filing
- 2013-09-06 EP EP13871351.6A patent/EP2946606A4/en active Pending
- 2013-09-06 WO PCT/US2013/058582 patent/WO2014113076A1/en active Application Filing
- 2013-09-17 WO PCT/US2013/060201 patent/WO2014113078A1/en active Application Filing
- 2013-09-17 US US14/127,891 patent/US9503892B2/en active Active
- 2013-09-17 CN CN201380066104.6A patent/CN104871447B/en active Active
- 2013-09-24 US US14/128,809 patent/US10257849B2/en active Active
- 2013-09-24 KR KR1020157016030A patent/KR101776799B1/en active IP Right Grant
- 2013-09-24 WO PCT/US2013/061461 patent/WO2014113080A1/en active Application Filing
- 2013-09-24 EP EP13872068.5A patent/EP2946590B1/en active Active
- 2013-09-25 CN CN201380066189.8A patent/CN105027597B/en active Active
- 2013-09-25 CN CN201811073518.2A patent/CN109088714B/en active Active
- 2013-09-25 US US14/125,606 patent/US9313802B2/en active Active
- 2013-09-25 EP EP13872108.9A patent/EP2946582B1/en active Active
- 2013-09-25 EP EP13871467.0A patent/EP2946490A4/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2013-09-25 WO PCT/US2013/061518 patent/WO2014113082A1/en active Application Filing
- 2013-09-25 WO PCT/US2013/061630 patent/WO2014113083A1/en active Application Filing
- 2013-09-25 US US14/125,608 patent/US9532213B2/en active Active
- 2013-09-25 CN CN201380064488.8A patent/CN104871444B/en active Active
- 2013-09-26 EP EP13871416.7A patent/EP2946591A4/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2013-09-26 EP EP18151858.0A patent/EP3328122B1/en active Active
- 2013-09-26 EP EP13871551.1A patent/EP2946604B8/en active Active
- 2013-09-26 WO PCT/US2013/061946 patent/WO2014113084A1/en active Application Filing
- 2013-09-26 US US14/128,217 patent/US9313803B2/en active Active
- 2013-09-26 WO PCT/US2013/061962 patent/WO2014113085A1/en active Application Filing
- 2013-09-27 CN CN201380064647.4A patent/CN104995855B/en active Active
- 2013-09-27 WO PCT/US2013/062444 patent/WO2014113088A1/en active Application Filing
- 2013-09-27 WO PCT/US2013/062428 patent/WO2014113087A1/en active Application Filing
- 2013-09-27 CN CN201380064480.1A patent/CN104885390B/en active Active
- 2013-10-08 CN CN201810332068.8A patent/CN108683485B/en active Active
- 2013-10-08 EP EP13872245.9A patent/EP2946496A4/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2013-10-08 WO PCT/US2013/063793 patent/WO2014113095A1/en active Application Filing
- 2013-10-08 EP EP19173692.5A patent/EP3544221A1/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2013-10-08 CN CN201380064664.8A patent/CN104885389B/en active Active
- 2013-10-08 US US14/125,605 patent/US9282571B2/en active Active
- 2013-10-14 JP JP2015547932A patent/JP6185078B2/en active Active
- 2013-10-14 US US14/129,295 patent/US9525538B2/en active Active
- 2013-10-14 ES ES13872198.0T patent/ES2693337T3/en active Active
- 2013-10-14 EP EP17169661.0A patent/EP3226595B1/en active Active
- 2013-10-14 KR KR1020177005482A patent/KR101828757B1/en active IP Right Grant
- 2013-10-14 CN CN201710153561.9A patent/CN106899971B/en active Active
- 2013-10-14 HU HUE13872198A patent/HUE040437T2/en unknown
- 2013-10-14 BR BR122017006293A patent/BR122017006293A2/en not_active Application Discontinuation
- 2013-10-14 EP EP13872198.0A patent/EP2946607B1/en active Active
- 2013-10-14 CN CN201380066063.0A patent/CN105144789B/en active Active
- 2013-10-14 WO PCT/US2013/064761 patent/WO2014113103A1/en active Application Filing
- 2013-10-14 KR KR1020157015916A patent/KR101713466B1/en active IP Right Grant
- 2013-10-14 BR BR112015014223A patent/BR112015014223A2/en not_active Application Discontinuation
- 2013-11-26 EP EP13871474.6A patent/EP2946589A4/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2013-11-26 US US14/652,478 patent/US9686677B2/en active Active
- 2013-11-26 WO PCT/US2013/071934 patent/WO2014113141A1/en active Application Filing
- 2013-12-17 US US14/652,600 patent/US20150327247A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2013-12-17 CN CN201380064547.1A patent/CN104969503B/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2013-12-17 WO PCT/US2013/075849 patent/WO2014113171A1/en active Application Filing
- 2013-12-20 US US14/653,221 patent/US9848322B2/en active Active
- 2013-12-20 WO PCT/US2013/077294 patent/WO2014113190A1/en active Application Filing
- 2013-12-20 EP EP13871565.1A patent/EP2946491A4/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2013-12-26 JP JP2015549867A patent/JP6254188B2/en active Active
- 2013-12-26 US US14/653,455 patent/US9801054B2/en active Active
- 2013-12-26 CN CN201380066181.1A patent/CN105009511B/en active Active
- 2013-12-26 WO PCT/US2013/077745 patent/WO2014113197A1/en active Application Filing
- 2013-12-26 EP EP13871686.5A patent/EP2946525B1/en active Active
-
2014
- 2014-01-03 TW TW103100202A patent/TWI528772B/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 2014-01-13 TW TW103101130A patent/TWI531176B/en active
- 2014-01-13 TW TW104144491A patent/TWI605691B/en active
-
2016
- 2016-02-02 US US15/013,520 patent/US9860912B2/en active Active
- 2016-03-03 US US15/060,390 patent/US9788201B2/en active Active
- 2016-03-15 US US15/070,461 patent/US9942914B2/en active Active
- 2016-04-28 US US15/141,541 patent/US10051653B2/en active Active
- 2016-04-28 HK HK16104868.3A patent/HK1216958A1/en unknown
- 2016-04-28 HK HK16104869.2A patent/HK1216949A1/en unknown
- 2016-05-03 HK HK16105016.1A patent/HK1217073A1/en unknown
- 2016-05-20 HK HK16105749.5A patent/HK1217854A1/en unknown
- 2016-10-16 US US15/294,731 patent/US10292180B2/en active Active
-
2017
- 2017-04-12 JP JP2017078767A patent/JP2017163564A/en active Pending
- 2017-09-07 US US15/697,662 patent/US10448419B2/en active Active
- 2017-10-02 US US15/722,889 patent/US10129903B2/en active Active
- 2017-10-04 US US15/725,205 patent/US10433327B2/en active Active
- 2017-11-06 US US15/804,786 patent/US10868648B2/en active Active
- 2017-11-29 JP JP2017229444A patent/JP6418665B2/en active Active
-
2018
- 2018-02-09 US US15/893,212 patent/US10492214B2/en active Active
- 2018-10-01 US US16/148,990 patent/US10582528B2/en active Active
-
2019
- 2019-01-16 HK HK19100730.4A patent/HK1258360A1/en unknown
- 2019-06-21 US US16/448,906 patent/US10972235B2/en active Active
-
2020
- 2020-03-03 US US16/808,165 patent/US11139932B2/en active Active
Patent Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2008008964A2 (en) * | 2006-07-14 | 2008-01-17 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Methods and apparatus for supporting multiple connections |
US20100080116A1 (en) * | 2008-09-29 | 2010-04-01 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Re-establishing a radio resource control connection with a non-prepared base station |
US20120044836A1 (en) * | 2009-04-27 | 2012-02-23 | Sivapathalingham Sivavakeesar | Mobile network, radio access node, system including a relay apparatus, and method thereof |
US20120289231A1 (en) | 2011-05-12 | 2012-11-15 | Krishna Balachandran | Method And Apparatus For Improved Mobile Communications In Heterogeneous Wireless Networks |
Non-Patent Citations (4)
Title |
---|
"3GPP; TSGRAN: SCENARIOS AND REQUIREMENTS FOR SMALL CELL ENHANCEMENTS FOR E-UTRA AND E-UTRAN (RELEASE 12)", 3GPP TR 36.932 V12.0.0, December 2012 (2012-12-01), XP050708019, Retrieved from the Internet <URL:http://www.3gpp.org/DynaReport/36932.htm> * |
"Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2", 3GPP TS 36.300, December 2012 (2012-12-01) |
"Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification", 3GPP TS 36.331, December 2012 (2012-12-01) |
See also references of EP2946491A4 |
Cited By (25)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US11743244B2 (en) | 2014-08-04 | 2023-08-29 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Signaling in dual connectivity mobile communication networks |
KR20170042314A (en) * | 2014-08-04 | 2017-04-18 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Signaling in dual connectivity mobile communication networks |
KR102288057B1 (en) * | 2014-08-04 | 2021-08-11 | 삼성전자 주식회사 | Signaling in dual connectivity mobile communication networks |
US11038859B2 (en) | 2014-08-04 | 2021-06-15 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Signalling in dual connectivity mobile communication networks |
EP3178290A4 (en) * | 2014-08-04 | 2018-03-07 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Signalling in dual connectivity mobile communication networks |
CN105451278B (en) * | 2014-08-07 | 2019-06-28 | 上海诺基亚贝尔股份有限公司 | Prothetic group station changes method and apparatus in doubly-linked welding system |
CN105451278A (en) * | 2014-08-07 | 2016-03-30 | 上海贝尔股份有限公司 | Method and device for changing secondary eNB in double connection system |
US10349309B2 (en) | 2014-08-19 | 2019-07-09 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Admission control and load balancing |
US10356661B2 (en) | 2014-08-19 | 2019-07-16 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Admission control and load balancing |
JP2020031453A (en) * | 2014-09-03 | 2020-02-27 | 株式会社Nttドコモ | Base station and data transfer method |
JPWO2016035835A1 (en) * | 2014-09-03 | 2017-06-15 | 株式会社Nttドコモ | Base station and data transfer method |
WO2016035835A1 (en) * | 2014-09-03 | 2016-03-10 | 株式会社Nttドコモ | Base station and data transfer method |
CN105792282B (en) * | 2014-11-28 | 2019-04-12 | 财团法人工业技术研究院 | Evolved Node B and Traffic Scheduling Method |
CN105792282A (en) * | 2014-11-28 | 2016-07-20 | 财团法人工业技术研究院 | Evolved Node B and Traffic Scheduling Method |
US10588065B2 (en) | 2014-12-30 | 2020-03-10 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method and apparatus for performing inter-MeNB handover without SeNB change in wireless communication system |
US10225779B2 (en) | 2014-12-30 | 2019-03-05 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method and apparatus for performing inter-MeNB handover without SeNB change in wireless communication system |
US10856196B2 (en) | 2014-12-30 | 2020-12-01 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method and apparatus for performing inter-MeNB handover without SeNB change in wireless communication system |
US11044655B2 (en) | 2014-12-30 | 2021-06-22 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method and apparatus for performing inter-MeNB handover without SeNB change in wireless communication system |
EP3241384A4 (en) * | 2014-12-30 | 2018-06-13 | LG Electronics Inc. | Method and apparatus for performing inter-menb handover without senb change in wireless communication system |
US10278103B2 (en) | 2014-12-30 | 2019-04-30 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method and apparatus for performing inter-MeNB handover without SeNB change in wireless communication system |
US10397805B2 (en) | 2015-03-25 | 2019-08-27 | Nec Corporation | Communication device, communication system, and control method |
JPWO2016152140A1 (en) * | 2015-03-25 | 2018-02-01 | 日本電気株式会社 | Communication apparatus, communication system, and control method |
CN112261695A (en) * | 2016-11-04 | 2021-01-22 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method, device and system for sending end mark |
CN112261695B (en) * | 2016-11-04 | 2022-01-14 | 华为技术有限公司 | Method, device and system for sending end mark |
US11818645B2 (en) | 2016-11-04 | 2023-11-14 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Method for sending end marker, device and system |
Also Published As
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US10868648B2 (en) | Method, apparatus and system for managing bearers in a wireless communication system | |
US10085189B2 (en) | Method of controlling handover procedure and base station | |
US20160373972A1 (en) | Network Nodes and Methods Therein for Handover for Dual Connectivity | |
EP3471493B1 (en) | Radio link failure processing method and related device | |
US20170181044A1 (en) | Method, base station, and dual connectivity system for providing services to handover of a user equipment | |
US9467912B2 (en) | Method and apparatus for managing handovers | |
US11683818B2 (en) | Operation method of communication node in millimeter wave based communication system | |
US10772144B2 (en) | Switching of flow separation for new radio in dual connectivity | |
EP3707958A1 (en) | User equipment, nodes and methods performed therein | |
CN107534911B (en) | Handover using a group Evolved Packet System (EPS) bearer | |
EP3525547A1 (en) | Method of radio bearer establishment in dual connectivity | |
TWI669018B (en) | Method of handling handover in dual connectivity | |
US10278115B2 (en) | Bearer admission control method and bearer admission control apparatus | |
US10064115B2 (en) | Method and apparatus for handover in dual connectivity user equipment and base station | |
US11115880B2 (en) | Path switch method between LTE and 5G node | |
WO2015143702A1 (en) | Bear management device and method and communication system | |
US11490438B2 (en) | Protocols and architectures for NR-NR dual connectivity (NR-DC) | |
WO2015161575A1 (en) | Method, base station, mobile management entity, and system for reporting location of user terminal | |
KR102270370B1 (en) | Method and apparatus for location registration of terminal in mobile communication system | |
WO2021056453A1 (en) | Method, device and computer storage medium of communication | |
JP2023510974A (en) | Second network device, terminal device and method |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 13871565 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 2013871565 Country of ref document: EP |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 14653221 Country of ref document: US |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |